Home

2706-817, MessageBuilder Software User Manual

1. Address Worksheet Before entering tags in the Tag Editor dialog use a copy of the Address Worksheet in Appendix H to record them Each line in the worksheet is 1 word 2 bytes or 16 bits since this is the unit of controller address memory Use separate worksheets for display logic controller write and for entry logic controller read variables since these are stored in different memory areas The figure shows two examples of recording addresses For proper address formats refer to the controller s user manual Assign e a whole word 16 bits to signed and unsigned integers and 4BCD data types e specific bits to bit data types e a word or words adjacent to one another for bit triggers e character arrays to ASCII data types Read Tag Name MOTOR_DISPLAY o Handshake Tag Name HANDSH m Write Tag Name MOTOR_ENTRY Notification Tag Name RTRN_MSG_NO Controller Address jo de OO oOo ot i WRITE Entry Address Worksheet Word Address Octal 17 16 15 14 13 12 ul 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 41 0 Tag Name Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 42 4 1 0 1 020 RTRN_M G_NO 1 021 MOTOR_ENTRY READ eee OO Display
2. De Allen Bradley MessageBuilder Configuration Software Catalog No 2706 MB1 ie mm BERR IP Pee ee Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will the Allen Bradley Company be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation the Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Allen Bradley Company with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of the Allen
3. Working with Tags 8 9 Copying tags Select Copy and Paste entire tags or individual fields Then edit their attributes as needed See also Duplicating Tags below 72 TE VIEW oN In fact since tags and fields are copied to the Microsoft Windows clipboard they can be pasted in another application even an application in another project When a tag is copied the new tag s name is the same as the original tag s name in the Tag Editor Table View An X appears in the Status column for the new tag s row until its name is changed For this result Do this selecta field click the left mouse button in the field click the left mouse button in the Status column for selecta row the row the column at the far left click the left mouse button in the Status column for the first row Then either select several adjoining rows drag the mouse down the column or press and hold the SHIFT key and press the Page Upor Page Down key click the left mouse button in the Status column for select several separated rows the first row Then press and hold the CTRL key and click in the Status column of the other rows To copy and paste tag information 1 Select the row that you want to copy or the contents of a field 2 Click the Copy tool Or choose Copy from the Edit menu 3 Use the up down arrow keys to move the cursor to the new location 4 Click the Paste tool Or choose Paste from the Edit menu If a ta
4. Publication 2706 817 1 6 Introducing MessageBuilder Configuration Software Typical Message Contents Temperature Too High Time is 16 23 CST Date is 06 24 96 Pressure is 300 PSI Enter Flow Rate Bar Code Reading Publication 2706 817 X Valve is open Time or Date Display Time Displays indicate the current time hours minutes and seconds according to the terminal s Real Time Clock Specify the format of the display using the Terminal Setup dialog Date Displays indicate the current date day month and year according to the terminal s Real Time Clock Specify the format of the display using the Terminal Setup dialog Set the Real Time Clock using the RTC Download command in the Application menu Display Variables Numeric Variable Displays shows the current value at a specific controller address binary BCD or signed unsigned integer Scaling y mx b may be used ASCII Variable Displays present status information to the terminal operator according to the current character array at a specific controller address Entry Variables Numeric Variable Entries may be used in applications designed for MessageView 421N and 421F terminals These variables allow the terminal operator to enter a numeric value from the terminal keypad Scaling y mx b may be used ASCII Variable Entries may be used in applications designed for MessageView 421D 421N and 421F terminals if the terminal firmware
5. 0 cece cece teens 7 14 Message Editor Terminal View cc ccc cue e eee eens 7 16 Embedded Variables and Graphics 0 ceeeeeeee 7 18 Numeric Variable Display 2ciiccsewsicesscwacweaawea cca 7 23 ASCII Variable Display es ches eceads dove eave eee eave da Owe 7 26 Numeric Variable EADY s040 asco daca oeeew anwes nukri 7 27 ASCII Vanable ENUY sist cea cae eew code Monk sak eee deed 7 30 Message AtribUteS cdi det niaduetingus suntiead renane 7 33 slaving saucey eed e E a a ud a see ain eee A 7 41 Function KEYS aissas deanna creat hcg eed tem ey ded wares 7 48 FED AtHIDUTES 52 aien opahan soe cea esa TENE aa a cues 7 52 Special Messages wets kunanpu cen a tions eee bed 7 54 Working with Tags Managing Projects Terminal and Communication Setup Validating Applications and Transferring Files Table of Contents toc iii Chapter 8 Using the Tag Editor sxtvsangadesaeese nant awakes aa 8 1 Validating Tag Addresses ccc eee eee eee eee 8 4 Defining Tags a0 cisvaac vias variind rara Enpi sav wamdea as 8 5 Working With Tags cece eee eee eee tenets 8 8 Finding Tags ca tracadung shranre ay dusaare bs dacaware Repay be we 8 11 COMING Tags nto vaca d gee eres aeeewesouewe ned nagas 8 12 Printing VOUS e5 4 sea ated sara abi a ado be ee Ae Hea pad Gara ors 8 13 Tag Import Export Utility 2s da ea cee eo be sadn ee Maes de weer 8 17 Chapter 9 ADOUEPIOIECS o uau vel certs deudes eseudiaw Meateaw ares 9
6. Placeholder AAA ASCII Character Placeholder Placeholder Graphics Placeholder GR Actual graphics symbol Message text Alphanumeric Alphanumeric Special Messages The MessageView terminal supports a predefined set of Special Messages Message numbers 9901 to 9999 are reserved for Special Messages Special Messages are triggered just like any other message while an application is running When triggered they are typically not displayed by the terminal but acted upon Special Messages e cannot be edited although bit triggers may be assigned to them e are not displayed in the Message Editor Table View e are not displayed in the Message Editor Terminal View e cannot be chained to another message e are not logged into the Historical Event stack The Special Messages dialog is found on Page 7 54 Publication 2706 817 Planning an Application This table gives the current Special Messages Message rae ee Number Message Description ASCII Triggering Device Requirements Clears all active display messages Use the Ctrl T command 9901 Clear Display The display slave buffers and Slave Devices to terminal Ctrl T 9901 MV Address CR are not cleared Clear Value Use the Ctrl T command 9902 Triggered Message Ca Me Value Tiggered Message Queue I t timina CuLTIOQO2 MV Address CRI and any display slave buffers Queue Aborts all terminal func
7. Toolbars The status bar appears at the bottom of the MessageBuilder window For Help press F1 It indicates what the software is doing at the moment It explains a tool s function when the left mouse button is pressed down while the cursor is over a tool It explains the command when a menu command is highlighted It gives the status of the Caps Lock Num Lock and Scroll Lock keys on the keyboard To toggle the status bar on or off 1 2 Choose View from the menu bar Choose Status Bar from the View menu A check mark appears next to the Status Bar command when it is active To turn the status bar off choose the command again Standard Toolbar Message Edit Toolbar Tomar 4 Bius Aar Ziom MessageBuilder Basics 3 9 Standard and Message Edit toolbars Two toolbars are located at the top of the application window Tools provide easy access to commonly used commands Instead of opening a menu and choosing a command simply click a tool to carry out an action Some tools complete the action immediately others open a dialog or a menu for further input Note Tools on a toolbar can be accessed only with a mouse All toolbar commands are available on one of the menus or in the Applications area 5 amp A RN SUP S x Ca D vs LI S 8 X V L SF SF ssy OCOL KL LS Ni KY AX KO CA CA X g To identify a tool move the cursor arrow to the tool Press and hold the left mouse button wh
8. currently loaded File Name c ab mbwin hestack cs I Clear Historical Event Stack file after successful upload 2 Under Source verify that Operator Terminal is selected This is the only option available 3 In the File Name box enter a file name 8 characters maximum with the CSV extension in which to save the HE stack information Or select Browse to search for an existing file which will be overwritten by the uploaded file Publication 2706 817 11 14 Validating Applications and Transferring Files Publication 2706 817 4 Select Clear Historical Event Stack after successful upload if you want the HE Stack file in the terminal to be cleared Note If the HE Stack file becomes full a warning message informs the terminal operator that it is full After this message is acknowledged the operator may use the Front Panel Editor to clear the file If the file is not cleared the oldest messages are overwritten as new messages are added 5 If more than one of the computer COM ports is configured with a DF1 driver specify which port to use Select the Setup button The DF1 Setup dialog opens with the available INTERCHANGE ports Select a port and close the dialog 6 Select OK to start the upload MessageBuilder displays its progress The terminal remains in run mode during the upload naie Oger ermina be hesiek WeTUDLL Yara LETI Mba Fa linii AE Siew Ceppi 1PH IH Ar ei Cara be
9. An item in a Menu that that carries out an action when it is selected Command Button A labelled rectangle in a dialog that carries out an action when selected Its label that describes the action to carry out Close Cancel Choosing a command button followed by ellipsis Options opens another dialog Control Tag A tag that specifies the Controller s memory address for a specific Global attribute Controller A device that controls a MessageView terminal by Triggering messages and providing data for display variables See Logic Controller ASCII Triggering Device Copy To put a duplicate of the selected item onto the clipboard so that you can transfer it to another location CSV Format This format is used by Excel and some other software packages The HE Stack is uploaded in CSV format Cursor Point The flashing vertical line in the Edit Box where text graphics or variables are added to the message Cut To move the selected item onto the clipboard from which it can be placed somewhere else See also Delete D Daughterboard A communications card installed in a Message View terminal It provides a Remote I O port for the terminal Delete To remove the selected item permanently See also Cut Publication 2706 817 G 4 Glossary Publication 2706 817 Device Any of a number of mechanical units such as Logic Controllers ASCII Input devices and computers that may be connecte
10. Fy AA Adding graphics to a message A set of 32 ISA bitmap graphics is supplied with MessageBuilder software They illustrate components commonly used in manufacturing See Page B 6 for the list of ISA symbols Graphics may be embedded in a message Each graphic occupies an area 24 x 16 pixels the area required by two half display mode characters Since a message has a maximum of 100 characters it can theoretically have up to 50 graphics symbols Graphics cannot be resized Note Graphics may be embedded only in half text size display mode messages If they are used in quarter or full text size display mode messages the application will not pass Validation To add a graphic to a message 1 Set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box where the graphic should be placed 2 Click on the Embedded Variable tool to display a menu of choices Or select the Format menu to display a similar menu 3 Select Graphic to display the Select Graphic dialog which illustrates and names all 32 ISA symbols Select Graphic Horiz valve with actuator 1 2 Horiz valve with throttling actuator 3 Horiz Valve with manual actuator 4 Vert valve with actuator 5 Vert valve with throttling actuator 6 Vert valve with manual actuator 7 8 9 0 PASUESE gt Butterfly valve Check valve Relief valve Liquid filter 1 Vacuum filter 1 1 KOE 4 Use the scroll bar if necessary to display the
11. feme s leet Unde on FILE Miert aie Pape E Piguet me esane E C jamia maci Lo Z lr 2 Select the default or another printer and specify its settings ATTENTION Check the Microsoft Windows user manual to make sure the settings are correct for the type of printer 3 Select the Options button to open a dialog to fine tune the specific printer This dialog is different for each type of printer 4 Select OK to return to the Print dialog If the printer is not listed 1 Check for hardware compatibility between the printer and one of the printers listed 2 Check if your printer has an emulation mode that is compatible with one of the printers listed 3 It may be necessary to install a printer driver for your printer Refer to the Windows User s Guide ase Setup _ Working with Tags 8 15 To set up the page 1 Select the Page Setup button in the Print dialog to open the Page Setup dialog Or choose Page Setup from the Project menu Page Srtup El Shom Galina O Wee Hariman wiih For D ash Columa ieaie EET Lane i UP AVLRHAAD UT Enter a number to specify each page Margin Top Bottom Left Right Default is 0 5 for each margin Select the Show Gridlines box if the Table View gridlines should be printed Select the box Use Maximum Width for Each Column if each field should be the maximum width allowed for it Deselect the box if the printed output should be based on the conte
12. 11 B 4 Firmware download 11 18 Flash 7 38 change rate 10 15 Preferences 7 15 Flash tool 7 38 B 3 Form View tool Tag Editor 8 3 B 5 Format menu Align 7 37 A 4 ASCII Char 7 21 A 5 ASCII Variable Display 7 26 A 4 ASCII Variable Entry 7 30 A 5 Date Display 7 19 A 4 Edit Variable 7 23 A 5 Enable Function Key 7 51 A 5 Flash 7 38 A 4 Graphic 7 20 A 5 Inverse Video 7 38 A 4 Publication 2706 817 Index Publication 2706 817 Numeric Variable Display 7 23 A 4 Numeric Variable Entry 7 27 A 4 Text Size 7 34 A 4 Time Display 7 19 A 4 Freeze attribute 7 39 Function keys 4 20 4 24 See also Jog feature LEDs attributes 7 48 enabling 7 51 Return Number tag 10 24 setup 7 48 7 51 tags 7 50 G Global See also Control tags Status tags advanced terminal options 10 12 10 16 formatting date 10 18 formatting time 10 18 function key attributes 4 20 7 48 LED indicator tags 4 25 7 52 list of parameters F 1 Graphics 7 20 ISA Symbols B 6 B 7 Preferences 7 15 H Handshake Timeout attribute 10 16 Handshaking acknowledge 10 23 ASCII Variable Entry 7 31 diagram 4 28 hardware 4 29 latched function key 4 24 7 50 Numeric Variable Entry 7 29 diagram 4 28 pseudo 4 29 4 30 timeout See Timeout true 4 26 4 2
13. Application menu Description 6 8 A 5 Download 11 6 A 6 to a DOS file 11 8 Function Keys 7 48 A 6 HE Stack Upload 11 13 A 6 LED Indicators 7 52 A 6 Preferences 7 14 A 6 Project Management A 5 devices 9 5 projects 9 2 RTC Download 11 9 A 6 Special Messages 7 54 A 6 Tag Editor 8 2 A 5 Terminal Setup 10 1 A 6 Upload 11 11 A 6 Validate 11 2 A 5 Applications See also Error messages Projects asterisk in Title Bar 6 7 changing terminal type 10 3 creating 6 2 date saved 6 8 description See Description download upload 11 5 new name 6 7 opening 6 4 planning 4 1 4 4 reports 12 1 safety 4 2 saving See Saving validating See Validating version 6 8 APS format importing exporting tags 8 17 8 21 ports 2 13 Index ASCII and Extended ASCII characters 7 6 I 2 I 3 ASCII Control Characters 7 21 A 5 ASCII Input devices ASCII Variable display 7 30 Aux Port dialog 5 5 5 6 setup 10 27 ASCII Triggering devices Comms Setup dialog 5 7 5 8 control amp response codes 5 8 5 11 port setup 10 9 ASCII Variable Display 7 26 7 27 ASCII Variable Entry 7 30 7 31 Attributes function keys See Function keys global See Global setting up 7 33 7 39 undoing redoing changes in 7 10 Auto Clear attribute 7 36 See also Jog feature Auto Format
14. Planning an Application 4 9 All messages including Special Messages must be triggered to be displayed on or used by the MessageView terminal A message may be defined as only value trigger or both value trigger and bit trigger e Value trigger is acquired from either a logic controller or from an ASCII Triggering Device e Bit trigger is acquired only from a logic controller using Remote T O communication Note In time critical or priority type applications bit triggering is recommended if available Important An ASCII Triggering device cannot use Bit Triggering Value triggering This method uses the message number as a trigger Each message in an application has its own unique number so there are as many value triggers in the application as there are messages When the terminal receives the message number value trigger it e displays the message if its assigned lines are free and its Hidden attribute is disabled e queues the message if its lines are occupied the Hidden attribute is disabled and the Message Queue is enabled logs the message into the HE Stack whether is is displayed or not if its HE Stack attribute is enabled ignores the message if the line s are occupied and the HE Stack attribute and the Message Queue are disabled e slaves the message whether displayed by the master device or not if the slave attribute is enabled Some messages may be triggered but are not displayed e messages wit
15. Transfer applications between a computer on the DH link using a ee ee 1784 KT B or KT2 communications card and the Remote 1 0 port of a MessageView Terminal on a Remote I O network 1784 KTC on ControlNet Transfer applications between a computer on the DH 485 network iii using a 1784 KTX communications card and the DH 485 port of a essageView Terminal Transfer applications between a computer on the DH link using a 1784 KTX on DH 1784 KTX communications card and the Remote I O port of a essageView Terminal on a Remote 1 0 network 1784 P CMK on DH PCMK communications card and the R Transfer applications between a computer on the DH link using a 1784 essageView Terminal on a Remote I O network emote 1 0 port of a PIC on COM Pot Not used by MessageBuilder S oftware Publication 2706 817 E he DH 485 port of a MessageView te nterface converter or between a com essageView terminal Transfer applications between a computer on the DH 485 network and rminal using a 1747 PIC puter and the RS 232 port of a Installing MessageBuilder Software 2 9 3 Select the Add Device button to add and open the configuration Unique number assigned to INTERCHANGE driver This is not the computer s COM port DF 1 parameters must be set to Baud 19200 Parity None Error Detect CRC Typical COM Port 1 and Interrupt 4 or COM Po
16. ct HE User name Meceagelailder Company name Sera Mamie Haii It gives you the version number and release date of MessageBuilder software e the version number of the Allen Bradley Utilities software the serial number of this particular software package Publication 2706 817 Chapter 4 Planning an Application This chapter covers the following topics Design checklist e Safety considerations e Applications and projects Messages e Triggering a message e Controlling devices e Slaving e Slave Device e Historical Event Stack e Function keys e Function key types e LED indicators e Handshaking e Tags e Data types e Address worksheet e Defining tags e Scaling data display variables e Scaling data entry variables e Precision and rounding Design Checklist Before creating an application check the following YH Plan the application what is it supposed to do and how VY Outline the documentation the operator will work from Finish it after the application is completed If Consider safety requirements I Review data types and data formats I Fill in the Address Worksheet Appendix H I Review communications Chapter 5 Publication 2706 817 4 2 Planning an Application Safety Considerations Publication 2706 817 The application designer must make sure that an application cannot be used in an unsafe manner Failsafes must be built into e
17. 01 8 Input Words 8 Output Words The operator presses F1 The terminal sets a bit in the address assigned to that function key and clears the message Fi For Bronze Wash The ladder program reads bit 03 at address 1 030 03 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 030 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Input Word The ladder program sets bit 01 at address 0 031 01 031 The terminal reads the address which is assigned as a bit trigger for the next message The next message is displayed Publication 2706 817 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Output Word Block Transfer Rack 03 Starting Module Group 0 s Communications Overview 5 17 The RIO interface on the MessageView RIO daughterboard supports the transfer of blocks of data between a PLC and a Message View 421 terminal Note Some logic controllers do not support block transfer Check the user manual for the controller used in the system Using Block Transfers Block transfers are assigned to a single byte of input data module control byte and output data module status byte within the rack assigned to the terminal These two bytes control the operation of the block transfer and are no longer available for di
18. 11 B 5 E Edit menu Copy 7 7 7 8 A 2 Cut 7 7 A 2 Delete Message 7 2 A 2 Find 7 4 A 3 Insert Message 7 2 A 2 New Message 7 2 A 2 Paste 7 7 7 8 A 2 Redo 7 10 A 2 Renumber 7 12 A 3 Replace 7 9 A 3 Sort 7 11 A 3 Topics 7 13 A 3 Undo 7 10 A 2 Edit menu Tag Editor Copy 8 9 A 8 Cut 8 8 A 8 Delete 8 8 A 9 Duplicate 8 10 A 9 Find 8 11 A 9 Insert 8 8 A 9 Paste 8 9 A 9 Embedded Variable tool 7 18 B 3 Embedded Variables See Variables Enable Debug Mode attribute 10 14 Enable Function Keys tool 7 51 B 3 Enable Message Queue attribute 10 13 Enable Simulate Mode attribute 10 14 Error messages See also Exceptions creating editing applications C 1 tag import export 8 22 Index 1 3 upload download E 1 Exceptions 11 2 errors found in Validation D 1 printing 11 3 saving 11 4 F Field width ASCII Variable Display 7 26 ASCII Variable Entry 7 31 Numeric Variable Display 7 24 Numeric Variable Entry 7 28 File menu Close 6 10 A 1 Exit 6 10 A 2 New 6 2 A 1 Open 6 4 A 1 Reports 12 2 A 1 Save 6 6 A 1 Save As 6 6 A 1 Upgrade Terminal 11 18 A 1 Workstation Setup 2 7 11 6 A 1 File Transfer Utility icon 2 5 using 11 15 11 17 Verify tool command 11 17 Find message 7 4 Find Tag tool 8
19. 13 finding messages 7 4 naming 7 13 sorting on 7 11 Transfer utilities See Downloading Uploading Trigger Priority attribute 10 17 Triggering 4 9 4 11 See also Bit triggers Value triggers priority 4 13 4 15 10 17 Troubleshooting See Error messages Help U Undo tool 7 10 B 1 Unsigned integer format See Data formats Upgrading terminal 11 18 Publication 2706 817 Index Publication 2706 817 Uploading application 11 11 error messages in E 1 HE Stack 11 13 using File Transfer Utility 11 16 V Validating 7 13 dialog 11 2 error messages See Exceptions individual messages 7 14 tag addresses 8 4 Value triggers 4 9 See also Chaining tag address 10 21 Values at Power Up attribute 10 14 Variables ASCII Variable Display 7 26 ASCII Variable Entry 7 30 embedded variables 7 18 Numeric Variable Display 7 23 Numeric Variable Entry 7 27 Preferences 7 15 tags See Tags Verifying File Transfer Utility 11 17 View menu Status Bar 3 8 A 3 Toolbar 3 9 A 3 Zoom 7 17 A 3 View menu Tag Editor BCD Integer 8 8 A 10 Form 8 3 A 9 Sort 8 12 A 9 Status Bar 8 2 A 9 Summary 8 3 A 9 Tool Bar 8 2 A 9 W Wait Time attribute 7 35 Warning messages See Exceptions Window menu active view 7 17 A 7 Arrange Icons A 7 Cascade A 7 Exceptions 11 2 A 7 New Wind
20. 3 It may be necessary to install a printer driver for the printer Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide Publication 2706 817 11 4 Validating Applications and Transferring Files Publication 2706 817 Sending Validation Messages to a File To send validation messages to a file it is necessary to e add the Generic Text Only printer to the Installed Printers list assign the printer to a FILE port For details on how to add Generic Text Only on FILE to the Installed Printers list on your computer see the Microsoft Windows User s Guide This printer driver allows you to print text but not graphics To send validation messages to a file 1 Select the Printer Setup button in the Exceptions dialog to open the standard Windows Print Setup dialog Printer Default Printer currently HP LaserJet IIISi on LPT1 Specific Printer Options Generic Text Only on FILE rOrientation Paper Portrait Size Letter 8 1 2 x 11 in oO Landscape Source l 2 Select Generic Text Only on FILE from the list of Specific Printers If it is not listed it must be installed first 3 Select OK to exit the Printer Setup dialog 4 Select the Print button in the Exceptions dialog to open the Print to File dialog Output File Name 5 Enter the name of the file in which to save the validation messages 6 Select OK to output messages to the file If the f
21. 53 7 56 10 22 10 24 10 25 10 26 Numeric Variable Display 7 25 Numeric Variable Entry 7 29 Table View 8 2 Tags G 1 See also Edit menu Tag Editor Error messages address worksheet 4 35 addresses diagram 4 31 attributes 4 36 conflict with project 9 8 control tags See Control tags defining 8 5 8 7 duplicating 8 10 exporting 8 20 importing 8 18 printing 8 13 8 16 saving 8 8 sorting 8 12 status tags See Status tags unknown in project 9 7 worksheet H 1 Technical Assistance P 4 Terminal setup Auxiliary Devices 5 4 changing type 10 3 global attributes See Global new application 6 3 power up setting 10 16 RIO port configuration See Remote I O Index l 7 RS 232 port configuration See RS 232 Terminal Setup tool 10 1 B 2 Terminal View illustrations 3 10 7 16 zooming 7 17 Terminal View tool 7 16 B 2 Text Size attribute 7 34 7 35 Time formatting 10 18 setting terminal clock 11 9 Time Display 7 19 Time Special Messages setup 7 55 Timeout block transfer 5 19 handshake 4 28 10 16 Toolbars application not open 3 3 Message Edit 3 9 Standard 3 9 Tag Editor 8 2 Tools menu Tag Editor Export 8 20 A 10 Form Editor 8 3 8 17 A 10 Import 8 18 A 10 List Editor 8 3 8 17 A 10 Topic attribute 7 12 Topics filtering topics 7
22. Applications designed for Message View 421F terminals Function Keys enabled Exceptions Dialog A list of all the warning and error messages generated during a Validate operation Export The process of changing Tags automatically from MessageBuilder format to a different format Glossary G 5 F File Transfer Utility Software that supports transfer of an MVA file between a computer that does not have MessageBuilder running and a MessageView terminal It can also download the RTC clock and upload the HE Stack file In Microsoft Windows it appears as an icon in the MessageBuilder group Firmware Software that allows the Message View terminal to run an Application Several versions of firmware are available depending on how the terminal is to be used Firmware can be upgraded using software disks from Allen Bradley and the MessageBuilder Download command Flashing A Message or part of a message that is emphasized by being turned on and off regularly on the Message View terminal display Function Keys A set of keys labeled F1 to F16 only on the Message View 421F terminal that may be enabled for a Message When a displayed message has a function key or keys enabled the terminal operator can use the key s to initiate a procedure Function keys are disabled unless they are specifically enabled for a message being displayed G Global An Attribute or Parameter that is defined once and may then be use
23. Select the Edit Device button to open the configuration dialog for the selected driver Edit parameters and select OK when done Reboot your computer to load the driver and its configuration To remove a current driver 1 Select a driver from the Configured Devices list Select the Remove Device button 2 3 4 A dialog asks for confirmation of the removal Choose OK Reboot your computer to unload the driver To specify advanced parameters for drivers 1 Select the Advanced button from the INTERCHANGE Device Configuration dialog BPR Svat Dire Con gaia ierra Ye Peni LI Feien ben ye ien TAMA Perens ES hee qpa eg inu parisi kahen H dusts a Hii ei balls D Ha of omeniosied dgis iem DIES maiie Tribi epide Erwe Modify the settings as needed See below Select the OK button to save the settings Or select the Cancel button to return to the Configuration menu without changing the parameters Installing MessageBuilder Software 2 11 Memory Manager Options Load drivers high when enabled checked loads INTERCHANGE drivers executables into high memory Drivers are not loaded until you reboot the computer If this option is disabled drivers are loaded into the base 640K memory MessageBuilder recommends Either enabled or disabled Memory Manager Selection allows you to specify the memory manager in use on your system Select one of the radio buttons MessageBuilder rec
24. The first word of a bit sequence for triggering messages by their bit number The bit sequence is up to 64 words long The terminal continuously scans the bit sequence whenever one or more bit triggered messages exist in the application Bit position 0 1023 Latched Function Key Handshake Bit A bit that when set returns a Latched Function Key to the de energized state Every Latched Function Key in the application requires a corresponding Handshake tag 0 1 LED Indicator Bit A bit that controls an LED indicator on the 2706 M1F 1 terminal One bit is optionally assigned to each LED indicator in the application The terminal continuously scans the LED indicator tags whenever they are assigned 0 1 Numeric Display Signed Integer Unsigned Integer or BCD A numeric value that is scanned formatted and displayed whenever a message with an embedded Numeric Variable Display is triggered A Numeric Display tag is required for every embedded Numeric Variable Display in the application Depends on the type Numeric Entry Handshake Bit A bit that when set informs the terminal that the Numeric Variable Entry and Message Return Number have been acquired by the controller Use of the Numeric Entry Handshake is optional 0 1 Special Message 9905 Year Unsigned Integer A value for setting the year of the Real Time Clock in the terminal The value is acquired when Special Message 9905 Set Time
25. Transfer IBM PC 6008 SI VME 6008 SV 0 7 Yes DEC QBUS 6008 SQ PLC 5 11 3 3 Yes PLC 5 15 PLC 5 20 3 a PLC 5 25 PLC 5 30 i ms PLC 5 40 1 octal Yes PLC 5 60 PLC 5 80 1 27octal Yes SLC 1747 SN Series A 0 3 No SLC 1747 SN Series B 0 3 Yes Other 1771 SN Subsystem 1 Toctal No Remote I O Communication parameters Define RIO communication parameters in the Communication Setup dialog which is accessed from the Terminal Setup dialog Prenat A Frisca fel Maika Nis Paie WI oorerusicoien Sctop Discrete I O Communications Overview 5 15 The options in this dialog are Remote I O Remote 1 0 Device Paranoia Description Options Type of controller that will PLC Scanner Type communicate with the RIO see Tabbo Page 5 14 port of the terminal Unique name assigned to Narie controller Enter it in the licepacdiansit Node Name field in the Tag 9 Editor Unique node address of Terminal Rack Address essageView 421 terminal 0 76 octal on Remote 1 0 link odule groups occupied by Module Group the terminal in the rack they 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 must be next to one another The baud rate of the RIO 57 6 K to 10 000 ft Baud Rate link determines the 115 0 K to 5 000 ft maximum cable length 230 4 K to 2 500 ft Specifies whether the terminal occupies the Last Chassis highest assigned module Yes No group within the rack To configure Remote I O Pa
26. and set runtime parameters for the Message View terminal Tag Editor Opens the Tag Editor to view add or edit tag information for an application Tag information is specific to the communication protocol that the application will use Project Management Opens the Project Management dialog to manipulate display create copy rename delete projects and to manipulate create copy rename delete devices in projects Description Opens a dialog to enter an application description and change the application name Also shows when the last version of the application was saved Validate Checks the entire application for potential problems This command allows the designer to make necessary corrections before downloading is attempted Publication 2706 817 A 6 Menus and Commands Summary Publication 2706 817 Download Downloads an application to a MessageView terminal or a DOS file Download to a terminal uses DF1 point to point protocol through a connection at the RS 232 COM port Upload Uploads an application from a Message View terminal RTC Download Sends the computer s time and date to the terminal to update its Real Time Clock HE Stack Upload Uploads the Historical Event Stack file from the terminal to a file in CSV format Terminal Setup Sets runtime communication and operating parameters for the Message View terminal Special Messages Assigns bit triggers or o
27. m Tool Summary B 3 Message Edit Tools Insert Message Inserts a new message with default text before the current highlighted message Append Message Appends a new message with default text after the last message in the list Delete Message Permanently deletes the highlighted message from the Message List Cancel Changes Removes any changes in the Edit box since the last Store Message Store Message Copies the message in the Edit box to the highlighted row in the Message List Message Edit box Displays the text of the highlighted message so it can be edited Formatting Tools Flash Sets highlighted text graphics or variables to flash on off when the message is displayed by the Message View terminal Inverse Video Sets highlighted text graphics or variables in reversed video Embedded Variable Opens a menu to insert a variable ASCII control character or graphic in a message at the cursor position If a variable is selected opens the dialog to edit that type of variable Enable Function Key Opens the Enable Function Key dialog to specify which function keys are enabled for the current message Left Justify Aligns a message at the left side of the display Toggles with Center Publication 2706 817 B 4 Tool Summary Tag Editor Toolbar Publication 2706 817 k W a e e HH E i th Center Centers a message in the display Toggles with Left Justify Many of the Tag Edito
28. name nvalid Tag Bit Trigger Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels nvalid Tag Bit Trigger must be of type Output or BTW ag name nvalid Tag Bit Trigger type Unsigned Integer Tag name must be of nvalid Tag Bit Trigger Tag name overlaps Discrete 1 0 Rack Control S tatus byte nvalid Tag Bit Trigger Tag name will not fit in the Block Transfer Table Max Bit Trigger nvalid Tag Block number for Tag name nvalid Tag Brightness Level Tag name must be of type Output or BTW nvalid Tag Brightness Level Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer nvalid Tag Brightness Level Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels nvalid Tag Brightness Level Tag name overlaps Discrete I O Rack Control Status byte Invalid Tag Day Read Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer nvalid Tag Acknowledge Handshake Tag number or tag is not defined in the Table Validation Error Messages Meaning What to do The Acknowledge Handshake Tag in Terminal Setup Control Tags address is not in the discrete I O image of the rack or in the block transfer s configured for the Terminal The tag is controlled by the PLC and is read by the Terminal The tag must be in the Output image or be in a BTW Block Transfer Write The
29. the procedure replaces existing components with new components The procedure will not overwrite configuration files e If the installation detects the same version of INTERCHANGE you are allowed to reinstall the components Insert MessageBuilder Disk 3 to install the remaining INTERCHANGE files Publication 2706 817 2 4 Installing MessageBuilder Software Publication 2706 817 15 The installation prompts you to update the AUTOEXEC BAT file It adds C AB BIN to the path C RSINIC BIN to the path SHARE EXE to the file Windows 3 1x only Environment variable ABIC_CONFIG C RSINIC BIN ABICRUN BAT starts INTERCHANGE software Important MessageBuilder Configuration software and INTERCHANGE Software will not run without these lines Note If you do not update your AUTOEXEC BAT file during MessageBuilder installation MessageBuilder software writes the changes to the file AUTOEXEC EXM for future reference 16 The INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility opens Use this utility to select and configure the DF1 on COM Port communication drivers that your computer workstation will use to transfer MessageView applications See Page 2 8 17 Review the release note that appears at the end of the installation procedure 18 When the installation is complete you must exit Windows and reboot your computer Installing MessageBuilder Software 2 5 Installation Summary MessageBuilder installation copie
30. to 2 Offset b engineering E and period f present a sign or for the number must be first iny mx b units y Default is no sign which represents f present a sign for the exponent must immediately follow the eorE Default is no sign which represents Do notuse blanks tabs or carriage returns The minimum Maximum precision is 4 places to the right of the decimal and maximum Maximum characters 12 point Data s values thatthe 0to9 If present a sign or for the number must be first Limits 70 i operator can e E and period Default is enter for the tag f present a sign for the exponent must immediately follow the eorE Default is Required fields for either Table View or Form View To bring up the Description Editor 1 Select the Description field 2 Click the right mouse button 3 Choose Editor from the menu that appears 4 When finished entering the description select OK Scaling and Data Entry fields In Form View these fields are present only when the Data Type is signed unsigned integer or BCD In Table View these fields are not present Publication 2706 817 8 8 Working with Tags Working With Tags FEE Table View only Vit Toul be a Biss bie IACH rie ger Culex Cine Qielete Oaplicetc Gace Dipitet Gerena Publication 2706 817 Saving Tags To save tag definitions in Form Vi
31. 1 Managing Project oieee ihana aana iaa a deans 9 2 Managing Devices in Projects aaua 9 5 Loading R eplacing Tags or Devices in a Project n anaana 9 7 Restoring a Project oaoa 9 9 Chapter 10 Overview of Terminal Setup aaa 10 1 Changing the Terminal Type ccc cece eee eee eens 10 3 Remote I O Communications ccc eects 10 4 Block TransterS saaana miea hardened ok wares deere eo Saree 10 7 RS 232 Main Port Communications 0c cece eres 10 9 Setting Advanced Terminal Options ccc cece eee eens 10 12 Setting Format for Time and Date ccc ee cece eee 10 18 Defining CONMIGO TAGS axis a4 ek oe Seb oR OY a ook eee 10 21 Defining SMS TAUS sei ccdvangatisengadtavanntcas ee ad 10 25 Auxilia PORS CUNY cui cucehdupteyd dueteenddutedeahepas 10 27 Chapter 11 Helpful HiIMS ss 2ccctatecsid vee eatsdees beste appends ead 11 1 Validating Applications 20 cece cece eee eee teens 11 2 Transfer Utilities oo ccccceeee eee e ena 11 5 Downloading an Application toa Terminal 0 11 6 Downloading to a DOS file 1 cece eee eee ees 11 8 Downloading Date Time to Real Time Clock cece eee 11 9 Uploading an Application froma Terminal 0 eens 11 10 Uploading the Historical Event Stack cece eee ees 11 13 Using the MessageView File Transfer Utility 0 esas 11 15 Terminal Upgrade sses oes ody seew ade ds eee ead Pelee wees es 11 18 Publication 2706 817 toc iv
32. 5 04 Error on row stat BRL in this case Bit SLC 5 04 duplicate tag name Character Array The conveyor is shut down runnine SLC 5 04 Editing this row D ooo i e Unsigned Intec This tag is the address location whe SLC 5 04 iSelect the data type Tag 6 of 7 z ie x SS mB EE val aj a5 Publication 2706 817 LOCUM mager AT iam Heirat Cascade Tik Harizotal Tike Vertical Arang joon one HI JJ BCU Eomma Working with Tags 8 3 To open the Form View e From a dialog in MessageBuilder select or enter a tag name and select the Edit Tag button e From the Tag Editor Table View choose Form from the View menu Tag Form red Tag Name Data Type Description Displays 3 motor speed E Node Name Tag Initial Value Ef Tag Address Update Frequency Array Size pao ot id Scaling Data Entry Limits Navigating through the Tag Editor To move between fields in Form View or Table View Move the mouse pointer to the field and click the left button e Or press TAB to move forward through fields and SHIFT TAB to move backward e Or in Form View press ALT X where X is the underlined letter in the field name To change from Table View to Form View Click the Form tool on the toolbar e Or choose Form from the View menu e Or choose Form Editor from the Tools menu To change from Form View to Table View Select the Tag Editor button in the Tag F
33. 7 45 Autoexec bat file 2 4 Auxiliary devices See also ASCII Input devices Slaving master device hardware handshake 4 29 summary 5 4 Auxiliary port See RS 232 Background Message 10 17 Baud rate Remote I O 5 14 10 6 RS 232 5 2 10 10 BCD format See Data formats Bit format See Data formats Bit Trigger attribute 7 40 Bit triggers 4 12 base address 10 22 finding messages 7 4 Least Significant Bit 4 13 sorting messages 7 11 Special Messages 7 54 Publication 2706 817 Index Publication 2706 817 Block transfers 5 17 5 22 configuring 5 18 5 19 error messages in E 1 example multiple 5 22 example read 5 20 example write 5 21 setup 10 7 10 8 Brightness attribute 10 15 C Cancel Changes tool 7 10 7 33 B 3 Center tool 7 37 B 4 Chain attribute 7 41 Chaining 7 41 renumbered messages 7 34 Character array See Data formats Characters accented 7 6 I 3 Communications 10 2 See also RS 232 Remote I O Computer See also INTERCHANGE keyboard conventions 3 1 requirements 2 1 Contacts function keys 7 49 Control bytes See Slaving master device Control characters 7 21 I 2 Control codes slave device 7 42 Control tags acknowledge message 10 23 Function key message 10 24 message tags 10 21 Controllers 4 7 RS 232 devices See ASCII Triggering devices Remo
34. 8 10 A 10 P Packets See Slaving master device Password attribute 10 18 Paste tool 7 7 7 8 B 1 Paste tool Tag Editor 8 9 B 4 Pasting message 7 8 text string 7 7 Placeholders 7 18 PLC See Logic controllers Ports See Remote I O RS 232 Publication 2706 817 Index Publication 2706 817 Print tool Tag Editor 8 13 B 4 Printing error messages in C 1 Exceptions from validating 11 3 reports 12 6 tags 8 13 Priorities See Triggering Priority Project menu Tag Editor Exit 8 4 A 8 Page Setup 8 15 A 8 Print 8 13 A 8 Projects 4 3 9 1 applications See Applications creating 6 3 9 4 managing 9 2 reconciling with an application 9 7 tag database 4 36 viewing 9 2 Q Queue See Message queue R Read Tag ASCII Variable Display 7 26 Numeric Variable Display 7 25 Redo tool 7 10 B 1 Relay See Slaving master device Remote I O See also Block transfers Discrete T O devices See Logic controllers port setup 5 14 10 6 runtime parameters 10 4 10 6 Renumbering messages 7 12 Message attribute 7 34 Replacing text string 7 9 Reports creating 12 2 options 12 1 printing 12 6 Return Message Number attribute 10 12 Return Number ACK message tag 10 23 Function key tag 10 24 message tag 10 22 RIO See Remote I O RS 232 See also ASCII Input devices A
35. 90 70 N90 71 The MessageView display variables are updated using the new data Note If interfacing to an Allen Bradley PLC2 single block transfer is recommended Publication 2706 817 Chapter 6 Working with Application Files This chapter covers the following topics e Starting MessageBuilder e Creating a new application e Opening an existing application e Saving an application e Renaming and describing an application e Closing an application e Exiting MessageBuilder Starting MessageBuilder MessageBuilder opens like any other Windows application To start MessageBuilder 1 At the DOS prompt type win and press ENTER 2 Double click the MessageBuilder group icon in the Program Manager Then double click the MessageBuilder icon to open the welcome screen showing copyright and release information Or use the Run command in the File menu of the Program Manager and type the path and file name Allen Se adip Measage cides Fonte Ua Hase Date TEZIE Capel ETE Aien Eey DH ren Thir product ic cessed Io User name Company name Tanal Sumber 0 te te Waher The Omer pipa a phoriod ee paien irie Unami mgroducien s dahbutns of Gir popan oo ay peim of i map rece in reve cmi and oms ponaliecc and l be Boceceled in ee maman tias peasible carves Laver Publication 2706 817 6 2 Working with Application Files Creating a New Application Cirle Workstation Stop Upgrad
36. A Latched Function Key retains its latched state after the message is terminated After a terminal reset or powerup the initial state of a Latched Function Key is always its released state A Latched Function Key requires a handshake tag The handshake tag unlatches the Function key when the bit at the handshake tag address is set to 1 by the logic controller Function Key Function Key Function Key Controller Program Sets nitial State Pressed Released Handshake Bit to 1 OFF ON ON OFF Handshake Bit 0 Handshake Bit 0 Handshake Bit 0 Handshake Bit 1 Write Tag Bit 0 Write Tag Bit 1 Write Tag Bit 1 Write Tag Bit 0 ee Controller Program Sets eee Handshake Bit to 0 ATTENTION If communication with the logic controller uses Remote I O protocol with block transfer the Function key write tags must all be assigned to the same block as the Function Key Return Message Number tag LED Indicators Planning an Application 4 25 Message View 421F terminals have a red LED located next to each function key Each LED may or may not have an Indicator tag assigned to it Indicator tags are globally defined in the LED dialog e When a LED is assigned a certain tag that tag remains assigned to it throughout the application e When an LED does not have a tag assigned to it the LED has no tag any time it is used in the application When the LED does not have an Indicator tag assigned to it th
37. ASCII Triggering device communicates through the RS 232 port on the main board of the terminal It is used with terminals that do not have daughterboard cards Catalog Nos 2706 M1D MIN and MIF Message View features supported by a controlling device A MessageView terminal can support the following features when controlled by either type of device e displaying triggered messages with or without embedded variables queuing messages e chaining messages supporting Special Messages supporting hidden messages to be sent to the Historic Event Stack when triggered e displaying messages with Numeric Entry variables embedded in 421N and 421F terminals e implementing Handshaking for latched function keys in 421F terminals e scaling Numeric Display and Numeric Entry variables e returning Message Numbers to the controlling device e displaying Startup and Background messages e supporting Debug Mode e supporting Simulate Mode Publication 2706 817 4 8 Planning an Application Publication 2706 817 Message View features supported by a logic controller A MessageView terminal can support the following additional features when controlled by a PLC or other logic controller supporting Handshaking for numeric entry and ACK messages as well as for latched function keys supporting bit triggering supporting Startup and Background messages that contain embedded display variables sending Preset or Last values for variables
38. Acknowledge Handshake Tag in Terminal Setup Control Tags is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control S tatus Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack Tag is undefined in the project database Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as W Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Use the tag editor to define the tag Tag is undefined in the project database Use the tag editor to define the tag The tag address is notin the discrete 1 0 image of the rack or in the block transfer s configured for the Terminal The tag is controlled by the PLC and is read by the Terminal The tag must be in the Output image or be in a BTW Block Transfer Write The assigned tag is the wrong data type The tag is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack The tag will not fit within the valid range in the discrete I O image of the rack or in the block transfer s configured for the Terminal Address defined in the block transfer is incorrect The tag is contr
39. Address Worksheet Word Address Octal w i 15 4 13 12 uj wf 7 6 5 44 3 2 41 l0 Tag Name Decimal 15 14 13 12 u 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o 0 027 MOTOR_DISPLAY 0 028 HANDSH eee Publication 2706 817 4 36 Planning an Application Defining Tags Read or Write tags that define controller addresses for variables are entered in the Tag Editor See Page 8 2 A tag has the following XD attributes Tag Attributes Description Tag Name Unique name identifying tag address Data Type Bit BCD Unsigned Signed Integer Character Array Array Size Number of elements in a character array For other data types leave blank Description General description of the variable N de Name Name of the logic controller that will store the address Tag Address Specifies word or bit location in controller memory Initial Value Value in tag address at powerup How often the tag address will be updated while the Update regueney operation is running Scaling Scale and scale offset values Data Entry Limits Upper and lower limits of data stored at tag address Usage depends on the variable These attributes can be entered only in the Form View The Tag Editor supports two different methods for entering tags e Table View for entering multiple tags e Form View for entering a single tag t Project DiR Pire Opiom Dmie Winder Help Isp Hema Daia Tepe CO O ay zon E N Miede Pee Tag rat
40. Bit data type nvalid T sg number Embedded En Write Tag name Initial Value exceeds the allowed value for this tag type nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded En Write Tag name Max Data Entry Limit exceeds the allowed value for this tag type nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded En Write Tag name Max Entry value must be greater than Min Entry value nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded En Write Tag name Maximum Data Entry exceeds data limits 2147483647 to 2147483647 Publication 2706 817 Validation Error Messages Meaning The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type Tag is undefined in the project database The tag is controlled by the PLC and is read by the Terminal The tag must be in the Output image or be in a BTW Block Transfer Write The tag address is not in the discrete 1 0 image of the rack or in the block transfer s configured for the Terminal The tag is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack The tag is undefined in the project database The tag address is not in the discrete 1 0 image of the rack or in the block transfer s configured for the Terminal The assigned tag is the wrong data type The tag is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack The ass
41. Bradley Company is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is especially important for successful application and understanding of the product MessageBuilder and Message View are trademarks of Alen Bradley Company Inc PLC and PLC 5 are registered trademarks of Allen Bradley Company Inc SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 Dataliner and AdaptaScan are trademarks of Allen Bradley Company Inc INTERCHANGE is a trademark of Rockwell Software Inc Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation MS DOS and Microsoft Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Preface Introducing MessageBuilder Configuration Software Installing MessageBuilder Software MessageBuilder Basics Planning an Application Table of Contents Chapter 1 Whatis MessageBuilder sexi cutwe ei dupa a 1 1 MessageBuilder Software Features cece eee 1 2 Typical Messages in an Application 0c c cece eee eee 1 5 Typical Message Contents 0c eee eee 1 6 Chapter 2 System Requirements ccc cece eee e eens 2 1 Installing MessageBuilder Software ccc eee eee 2 2 INTERCHANGE Device Conf
42. Date is triggered 0 2035 Special Message 9905 Month Unsigned Integer A value for setting the month of the Real Time Clock in the terminal The value is acquired when Special Message 9905 Set Time Date is triggered 0 12 Special Message 9905 Day Unsigned Integer A value for setting the day of the Real Time Clock in the terminal The value is acquired when Special Message 9905 Set Time Date is triggered Special Message 9905 Hour Unsigned Integer A value for setting the hour of the Real Time Clock in the terminal The value is acquired when Special Message 9905 Set Time Date is triggered 0 23 Special Message 9905 Minute Unsigned Integer A value for setting the minute of the Real Time Clock in the terminal The value is acquired when Special Message 9905 Set Time Date is triggered 0 59 Publication 2706 817 G 2 Tags and Data Types Tag Type Purpose Range A value for setting the second of the Real Time Clock in the Special Message 9905 Second Unsigned Integer terminal The value is acquired when Special Message 9905 Set 0 59 Time Date is triggered A value for setting the level of brightness of the terminal display Bit Brightness Bit Brightness Special Message 9908 Set f 0 12 4 60 Brightness Unsignee Integer 25 5 75 a 2 38 6 87 3 50 7 100 Value trigger Unsigned Integer A value for triggering messages by
43. Display Numeric Vorinblc Entry AS Yorinkic Eetry ADOI Caml har Grapbir Ceable Cancun Ley Creating Messages 7 23 To edit a variable 1 Double click on the placeholder to select the variable Or click and drag the mouse pointer over the placeholder Or hold down the SHIFT key and use the left or right arrow keys 2 Click on the Embedded Variable tool to display the dialog for the selected variable type Or select the Edit Variable command on the Format menu 3 Revise as necessary 4 Select OK A Numeric Variable Display provides a numeric readout of a value stored at a controller tag address To create the variable set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box where the variable should be placed e Click the Embedded Variable tool on the Message Edit toolbar and select Numeric Variable Display on the dialog Or select the Numeric Variable Display command on the Format menu To edit the variable highlight the variable placeholder in the message e Click the Embedded Variable tool e Or select the Edit Variable command on the Format menu When a variable is created or edited its dialog appears Numeric Yariable Display Pai wen fi E I Fill with Zeros Decimal Point Fixed Point Position jo C Floating Point Read Tag es 2 coo Publication 2706 817 7 24 Creating Messages Digits 3 ria n E Field Width Z lt I Fill with Zer
44. I O network or an ASCII Triggering Device network Node Address A unique integer assigned to each node on a network Data transfer between devices on a network requires a destination address Numeric Keypad On MessageView 421N and 421F terminals keys the operator can use to input data in Numeric Entry variables Publication 2706 817 G 8 Glossary Publication 2706 817 P Parameter A characteristic of a device or system that is defined as part of its set up For instance a MessageView terminal s Remote T O port must be set up as part of the Application so it can communicate with the specific type of Logic Controller the system will use Paste To copy the contents of the clipboard to a specified location To paste attributes or variables of a message see the procedure in the manual Placeholder Each type of variable has its own placeholder which represents it in the Edit Box and Terminal View PLC Acronym for Programmable Logic Controller an Allen Bradley trademarked device Pointer The arrow shaped cursor on the computer screen that follows the movement of the mouse and indicates which area of the screen will be affected when you press the mouse button The pointer changes shape during certain tasks Also called mouse pointer Port The part of a device through which it communicates with other devices Before two devices can communicate they must have a hardware connector cable joining thei
45. Message Edit box e inthe Message List double click on the message to highlight the whole message in the Message Edit box e inthe Message Edit box click and drag to highlight all or part of a message e inthe Message Edit box double click to highlight the word or placeholder under the cursor e inthe Message Edit box hold down the SHIFT key and use the left or right arrow keys to highlight all or part of the message Publication 2706 817 7 6 Creating Messages Publication 2706 817 Creating a text string To add or insert text in a message 1 Click in the Message Edit box where the text is to go Or select the Message Edit box and move the insertion pointer using the left right arrow keys or the Home End keys 2 Start typing Important Highlighted text is overwritten Accented characters Characters that do not appear on the computer keyboard such as accented characters used in European languages may be added to any MessageBuilder message These characters and their ASCII numbers are given in the ASCII tables in Appendix I When ASCII and Extended ASCII characters are added to MessageBuilder messages they are treated as text characters See Page 7 21 for a discussion of ASCII Control characters To use ASCII characters in a message 1 Set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box where the ASCII character is to go 2 Look up the ASCII character on Page I 2 or I 3 and note decimal number The ran
46. Messages ASCII Variable Display Tema Size Miga b Mash berse Video Time apir Daie Daa piry Humeric Variable Diapliry SL Watts Maliy fumetic Varinblc Entry AEDE Parikia Faty ASUI Comtml ghar Grapbir C i Variable Enable Functlan Bey AA Field width 7 5 Read Tag STOPPED e Publication 2706 817 An ASCII Variable Display provides an alphanumeric readout of a ASCII text string stored at a controller tag address To create the variable set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box where the variable should be placed e Click the Embedded Variable tool on the Message Edit toolbar and select ASCII Variable Display on the dialog e Or select the ASCII Variable Display command on the Format menu To edit the variable highlight the variable placeholder in the message e Click the Embedded Variable tool e Or select the Edit Variable command on the Format menu When a variable is created or edited its dialog appears ASCII Variable Display Field width 7 G Read Tag STOPPED Characters The Field Width spin control specifies the maximum number of alphanumeric characters that can be entered in the variable Note The message will not pass Validation if the Field Width is greater than the Read Tag s Character Array value Default is 32 To change the field width select or enter a value in the spin control Read
47. Next gt gt button Publication 2706 817 MessageBuilder Basics 3 15 Contents The Help Contents screen is illustrated above 1 Double click a subject on this index to bring up a new screen which contains a subindex of subjects on the topic 2 Then double click on a subject in the subindex until you reach text describing the topic you want information on Search The Search button at the top of the Contents screen brings up a dialog with an alphabetical list of all the Help headings Type a word or select one from the list Close Then choose Show Topics Message Attributes Message Paste dialog Message Validation MessageBuilder Basics MessageBuilder Defaults Command Summary Edit Menu File Menu Format Menu Help Menu Opening and Closing Menus To locate a topic use the scroll bar e type one or a few letters to display the part of the alphabet that contains the subject you are interested in When you see the name of a Help subject that you want 1 Highlight the name or type it in the Word box 2 Select the Show Topics button 3 Select the Go To button A screen appears with text describing or explaining the selected topic Publication 2706 817 3 16 MessageBuilder Basics Help Topics Contents The Help Topics button at the top of the Help Contents screen brings up a tabbed dialog The first tab is Contents Mpdidgillaidsi links In this screen if the bu
48. Only n a n a Copied All Copied Copied Copied 6 Select OK to implement the choice Replacing a text string in a message or messages 1 Press CTRL H to bring up the Replace dialog Or select Replace in the Edit menu 2 Enter the Find Text string and the Replace Text string Find Text and Replace Text can not include graphics or variables However they may have spaces and punctuation 3 Select the Match Case check box if capitalization is important in the Find Text string 4 Select one of the Search radio buttons to choose whether the search should go up or down through the Message List 5 Select Find Next and then for each message found decide whether to replace the text string Or select Replace All and the text string is replaced automatically in every message where it occurs Publication 2706 817 7 10 Creating Messages Publication 2706 817 H Storing changes to the current message To store changes to a message do one of the following e Click the Store Message tool to store and update the edited message and its attributes into the highlighted message in the Message List e Highlight a different message in the Message List Before a new message appears in the Message Edit box changes to the previous message are stored To cancel all changes in the current message Click the Cancel Changes tool to return the message in the Message Edit box to the last time it was stored Changes include additio
49. Otherwise select Cancel to quit Attempt to allocate additional memory has failed Close other Windows applications and try again If this is unsuccessful MessageBuilder exits Print manager failed Error received from print manager spooler Check print spooler for possible errors Printer setup failed Error occurred during printer setup Check validity of the print driver Reload driver is necessary Project does not exist There is no project of that name Select another project name Project exists Entered a project name that already exists Enter another project name or use the existing project The input file is nota MessageBuilder application file Please select a new data file The file is nota MessageBuilder Application file and is not compatible with MessageBuilder Enter a different file name and retry MessageBuilder Application files typically have the extension MBA or MVA Publication 2706 817 Message Terminal Setup Terminal selected in Terminal Setup does not match Application Type Background message number doesn t exist Bit Trigger Number number duplicated number times Bit Trigger Priority mismatch with undefined Bit Triggered Messages Bit Trigger Tag missing or tag not assigned Chain To Message number greater than the maximum allowed Checking Msg number for unsupported features 100 characters Reduce the tag sizes of d
50. Parameters Parameter name Description Default MessageView MessageBuilder P Range 421 Terminals Software When a message is displayed whether its No Return Msg Num message number should be sent to the Yes controller RIO Baud Rate Setting up Remote 1 0 communications port 3R View Only e 115 2K 230 4K RIO Block Transfer Whether block transfer default or discrete 1 0 Disabled View Only should be used Enabled RIO Last Chassis Is this the last chassis on the logic controller View Only RIO Module The starting module for MessageView 0 View Only addresses 1to3 Whether the controller should pass Disabled RIO Pass Through data applications through to the computer on View Only n a Enabled another network i nat 4octal RIO Rack Number Setting up Remote I O communications port 0 to 3 5 to 76oca View Only e RIO Rack Size Setting up Remote 1 0 communications port Ya Yo 3 4 Full View Only RS 232 Data Bits Setting up the motherboard communications 8 R port 7 RS 232 Hardware Setting up the motherboard communications Enable r b Handshake port Disable Setting up the motherboard communications None RS 232 Parity port Odd Even e e RS 232 Stop Bits Setting up the motherboard communications 1 b port 2 T 19200 RS 232 Baud Rate n up the motherboard communications 300 1200 2400 9600 p 38 400 Whether to send data t
51. Publication 2706 817 10 24 Publication 2706 817 Terminal and Communication Setup To edit the Acknowledge Tag attributes 1 Put the insertion pointer in the tag box 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog Lag Heme Dga Ta Mate Hame Tan jetid Wakae EDE E F F dny fiddien Lfpelaiis Frapar p 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section starting on Page 8 2 4 Select OK Note In an ASCII Trigger application only a tag name is required for acknowledge tags Node name and address may be left blank Function Key Tag The Return Number tag is the address where the terminal writes the message number of the most recent active message on the display if e the message has Function key s enabled and e the Return Message Number attribute is enabled in the Advanced tab dialog The only valid data type for this tag is unsigned integer Note If the controller is an ASCII Triggering device the Return Function Key Message Number is sent back as part of the Ctrl F message See Page 5 11 To enter the global Function key tag e select the name of a tag from the list box or e type anew tag name and select the Edit Tag button to define the tag Terminal and Communication Setup 10 25 To edit the Function Key Tag attributes 1 Put the insertion pointer in the tag box 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section start
52. Read MG 3 999 0 584 ai ip ee aa ties PID Read Write PD 3 999 n a n a n a SFC Read Write SC 3 999 n a n a n a String Read ST 9 255 0 255 LEN DATA n a ASCII Read A 9 255 0 255 n a 0 15 Publication 2706 817 Octal format all other values are decimal Remote I O allows the MessageView to write its own output words Data Types Planning an Application 4 33 The MessageView terminal can read and write both of these data types e single bit data type e value data type Bit data Bit data occupies a single bit address and represent an On closed or Off open condition Address B3 10 1 On 0 Off Use a bit address e to read or write a value of 0 or 1 in a variable to trigger a message Value data Value data types occupy a word 2 bytes or 16 bits address that represents a numeric value No matter how large or small the value a whole word must be assigned to it Address N7 2 22258 1684 5192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 211 0 0 00 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Data Formats The MessageView terminal recognizes and transfers 5 data formats Data Format Bit Oorl Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 BCD 0 to 9999 Character Array alphanumeric characters Bit Data in bit format occupies only one bit of memory Its address is given not as a word N7
53. Scanner Name The Acknowledge Tag in Terminal S etup Control Tags address is notin the discrete 1 0 image of the rack or in the block transfer s nfigured for the Terminal The assigned tag is the wrong data type The Acknowledge Tag in Terminal S etup Control Tags is controlled by the Terminal and is read by the PLC The tag must be in the Input image or be in a BTR Block Transfer Read The Acknowledge Tag in Terminal S etup Control Tags is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack The tag definition is incorrect The assigned tag is the wrong data type A message can not exceed 100 characters Am What to do Resolve the conflicting attributes to achieve compatibility between Text Size and starting Line Resolve the conflicting attributes to achieve compatibility between Text Size and starting Line Resolve the conflicting attributes to achieve compatibility between Text Size and starting Line Reduce the number of characters in the message Delete the empty message or edit the message to make its length non zero Use the Message control on the Message Editor Table View to change the number to a legal message number between 1 and 9900 inclusive Change the Line attribute to not be ALL or disable the Scroll attribute option for the message Disable the Scroll attribute option or disable the Center attribute option for the message Res
54. Startup Message assigned that has embedded display variables is not allowed The tag is undefined in the project database The embedded Graphic symbol number 13 is not allowed for slaving messages Embedded Carriage Return requires All attribute enabled The terminal is a 421D type An appropriate return message number tag must be defined if Return Message Number to PLC option is selected An entry is not allowed to be wider than the displayable area he Function Key Write Tag is undefined for e or more Function Keys that are enabled in the Application The defined message cannot be displayed properly What to do Remove or change the value of the embedded ASCII character 13 by selecting the embedded ASCII character in the message and pressing the Delete key or selecting the Format E dit Variable Dialog Use the tag editor to change the tag array size Use the Message Editor Table view to change he text size or remove the embedded arriage R eturn from the message esolve the conflict by chaining to a different essage or removing the embedded display ariables in the chained To message hange or disable the Background Message n the Terminal S etup Advanced dialog or remove the embedded display variables from the message Change or disable the Startup Message in the Terminal Setup Advanced dialog or remove the embedded display variables from the message 3 P O SOs Use the
55. Ta m irria Sa Toar Erm E Opes E hmm Open _ in C Puai T Mamake Dki Habd Tias Disia Taji lbdaa Ta kebesan Tog Creating Messages 7 49 Function Key Select a Function key from the Function Key list box After all its attributes are set you may select another Function key and set its attributes Type Select the Type list box and highlight the type needed None the Function key is not used e Momentary changes state 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 when pressed and released Changes back to its initial state after the defined Hold Time has expired e Maintained changes state 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 when pressed and remains in the changed state when released Ifthe message is in Jog mode the Function key returns to its original state when pressed and released again Ifthe message is in non Jog mode a new message must be triggered and displayed with the same Function key enabled so the key can be pressed and released again e Latched changes state 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 when pressed and remains in the changed state when released To return the Function key to its original state the logic controller must set a handshake bit See Page 4 24 for a discussion of Latched Function Keys and handshaking Initial State If a Maintained Function Key was selected under Type select Open or Closed initial state This option is greyed out when another type is selected A Maintained Function Key toggles between two states
56. Table of Contents Creating Reports Menus and Commands Summary Tool Summary Configuration Software Error and Warning Messages Validation Error Messages Upload Download Error Messages Global Configuration Parameters Tags and Data Types Tag Address Worksheet ASCII and Extended ASCII Characters Glossary Index Publication 2706 817 Chapter 12 Types of Reports viiciasccedeticwsdactaaesawandene weed 12 1 Creating and Printing a Repot cece cece eee 12 2 Changing the Report Setup aaa 12 3 Previewing a Report auaa aaa 12 5 Setting up a Printer ouuu 12 6 SendingaReporttoaFile ccc cece cece ees 12 7 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H Appendix Registering Your Copy of MessageBuilder Software Intended Audience Preface Preface Welcome to MessageBuilder Configuration Software You can use this software to create control panel applications for Message View 421 Operator Terminals MessageBuilder software allows you to create applications designed specifically to control processes in your plant When you load a MessageBuilder application in a MessageView terminal the terminal displays messages that e give information about the operation e ask for input to control the operation Your software registration card is located in the envelope with the software disks To register your software mail the card t
57. Tag Msg number Embedded Numeric Display Tag name has wrong type nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Numeric Display Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels The tag address is notin the discrete 1 0 image of the rack or in the block transfer s configured for the Terminal Publication 2706 817 D 10 Message nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Numeric Display Tag name Scale value of 0 iS not valid Embedded must be of type nvalid Tag Msg number Numeric Display Tag name Output or BTW nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Numeric Display Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Numeric Display Tag name overlaps Discrete I O Rack Control S tatus byte nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded Numeric Entry Write Tag name Tag minimum absolute value is too large for Numeric Entry field width nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Numeric Display Tag name Bit address specified but tag isn t Bit data type nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Tag name references device name as Node Name This is not the Logic Controller selected in Terminal Setup Comms Setup nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Tag name references no device Tag Node Name must match the Logic Controller selected in Terminal Setup Com
58. Tag is Unsigned Integer the Test Battery tag is Bit 2 Select OK to return to the Special Messages dialog 3 Select OK to return to the Message Editor Table View Read Tags If the Set Time Date or Set Brightness Special Message is used its tags need to be defined Select the Read Tags tab This dialog appears iai dea aagee Bibig site Tag Aad Tage l Date ge Publication 2706 817 7 56 Creating Messages 1 For each variable choose an existing tag name from the List Box or create a new tag The only valid data type for e a Date or Time Read Tag is Unsigned Integer e the Brightness Level tag is Bit 2 Select OK to return to the Special Messages dialog 3 Select OK to return to the Message Editor Table View To edit the Special Message tag attributes 1 Put the insertion pointer in the tag box 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section starting on Page 8 2 4 Select OK ASCII Triggering devices Tag Node Name and Address attributes are ignored by an ASCII Triggering device They may be omitted when creating applications for use with such a device Publication 2706 817 Using the Tag Editor Chapter 8 Working with Tags This chapter covers the following topics e Using the tag editor e Validating tag addresses e Defining tags e Working with tags e Finding tags e Sorting tags e Printing tags e Using tools e
59. The project could not be created Cause could be a full disk or a write protected network partition What to do Check available disk space Verify the computer s write privileges if itis on a network AB Utilities failed to initialize MessageBuilder could not initialize Utilities during startup because SHARE EXE is not running MessageBuilder installation should add SHARE EXE to the AUTOEXEC BAT file See the RELEASE TXT file in C AB for more details Cannot delete project associated with current application The project belonging to the current application cannot be deleted Reassign the current application to another project then delete the project Cannot find desired terminal in Terminal catalog The CATALOG DAT file is missing or corrupted This file stores the terminal type that is selected when creating a new application or changing the application to fita different terminal type Contact A B technical support Cannot find or cannot load the Application File Transfer Utility The WINMFT EXE executable failed to load Verify that WINMFT EXE is in the same directory as MBWIN EXE If itis not there reload the file from the installation disk Cannot initialize print device Printer could not be initialized Check the Print Setup settings and try again Cannot load the data for tag tag name Internal error Check tag information Contact A B technical Support if error
60. Trigger application only a tag name is required for message tags Node name and address may be left blank Acknowledge Tags The Acknowledge tag is the address where the terminal writes a 1 when its ACK key is pressed in response to a message with the Acknowledge attribute enabled The only valid data type for this tag is bit Note If the controller is an ASCII Triggering device the Acknowledgement is sent back as part of the Ctrl K message See Page 5 11 The Handshake tag is the address where the terminal scans for a 1 to confirm that the ACK key press was acquired by the logic controller If this tag is not defined Acknowledge handshaking is disabled The only valid data type for this tag is bit Note An ASCII Triggering device does not support handshaking for an Acknowledgeable message The Acknowledge Return Number tag is the address where the terminal writes the message number of the most recent active message on the display if the message has the Ack attribute enabled and e the Return Message Number attribute is enabled in the Advanced tab dialog The only valid data type for this tag is unsigned integer Note If the controller is an ASCII Triggering device the Return Message Number is sent back as part of the Ctrl K message See Page 5 11 To enter these global acknowledge tags e select the name of a tag from the list box or e type anew tag name and select the Edit Tag button to define the tag
61. Typical message contents MessageBuilder is a Microsoft Windows software package An application designer can use it to create custom applications for Message View 421N 421F and 421D terminals MessageBuilder software makes creating an application as easy as possible by supplying dialog boxes toolbars and menus These include menus and toolbars keyed to the current situation dialogs to set up the computer workstation the Message View terminal and the interface to controllers used in the process dialogs in which applications and projects are created and edited the Message Editor Table View in which messages are created and edited the Message Editor Terminal View which previews individual messages the Tag Editor in which tags are created and edited validation of the application before it is downloaded to a terminal and on command while the application is being created printer dialogs for making permanent records of specific or general aspects of the application on line and context sensitive help Publication 2706 817 1 2 Introducing MessageBuilder Configuration Software MessageBuilder Software Features Delete Meceage An lel ete Inir Me cooing e New Hrtan lt linolbar Cutthe selected cbject s and place on the clipboard Comers Search fer Help On How To Use Heip About MegoageBuilder Publication 2706 817 MessageBuilder software has a number of features that make des
62. Use the tag editor to define the tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Numeric Entry dialog to select or add an appropriate tag g Use the tag editor to define the tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup Status Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup Status Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial essages Read Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag se the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial essages Write Tags dialog to select an ppropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag Message Invalid Tag Value Trigger Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels Invalid Tag Value Trigger Tag name must be of type Output or BTW Invalid Tag Value Trigger Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer Invalid Tag Value Trigger Tag name overlaps Discrete I O Rack Control Status byte nvalid Tag Value Trigger Tag name Invalid Tag Year Read Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer nvalid Tag Year Write Tag name must be f type Unsigned Integer o nvalid Tag Tag name references no devi
63. a destination file in the File box or select Browse to search for a destination file 5 Select OK The Exporting Tags From Project dialog opens followed by the Writing Destination File dialog Each of these dialogs display the percentage complete When the Export function has finished exporting the tags the Summary Report dialog opens Summary Report Results Tags Processed 312 Errors 38 e Select View Report to check it over e Select Save Report to save it to a file A report must be saved before it can be printed e Select OK to return to the Tag Editor Table View Examining the Results of an Import Export To examine detailed results of an import or export select the View Report button from the Summary Report dialog For example if a file has been imported View Report produces this dialog Full Fle pent IMAAT RERTHT F the CMAP TAES TET Maack m Drena SLC Tigi Piscteret 104 Exar TF Hem Tage HOMES HOHES Ac HOMES AS Publication 2706 817 8 22 This error device error no device specified Working with Tags Interpreting Import Export error messages 75 Means that a device has not been specified What to do Select OK then select or enter a device device error device does not exist the specified device has not been defined Select No to select or enter another device Select Yes to create a new device This dialog box opens 1 Select the type of de
64. a graphic the entire message Then either e click the Inverse Video icon e select Inverse Video from the Format menu Any text variables or graphics entered in the message while the Inverse Video icon is selected will be in Inverse Video setting The selected text will be displayed with black and white reversed in the Message Edit box and in the Terminal View Flash A message or any part of a message may be displayed flashing on and off In the Message Edit box highlight e text e a variable e a graphic the entire message Then either e click the Flash icon e select Flash from the Format menu Any text variables or graphics entered in the message while the Flash icon is selected will be in Flash setting The selected text will be displayed in a different color in the Message Edit box It will flash on and off in the Terminal View and in the MessageView terminal Note To change the color distinguishing Flashing text in the Message Edit box see Page 7 15 Creating Messages 7 39 Freeze IX Freeze Use the Freeze check box to keep display variables at the value they had when their message was triggered If the Freeze attribute is disabled the terminal continually updates display variables as long as the message is displayed Note The value sent to the Historical Event Stack if the HE Stack attribute is enabled is the value at the moment of triggering Historical Event Stack X HE Stack Use
65. a list of open Tag Editor windows A check mark next to a window name means the window is active New Opens a new window with the Tag Editor Table View Refresh Updates the Table View to reflect changes made in a Form View Help Menu Tag Editor Menus and Commands Summary A 11 Cascade Arranges open Tag Editor views so that they overlap each other with the title bar of each screen remaining visible Tile Horizontal Arranges open windows in a horizontal row in the workspace Tile Vertical Arranges open windows in a vertical row in the workspace Arrange Icons Spaces icons evenly along the bottom of the workspace so they do not overlap Close All Closes all the Tag Editor windows 1 Project View A list of all views currently open in the Tag Editor The active view is checked Use commands on the Help menu to access the Tag Editor Online Help utility Contents Displays an index to online Help About Displays copyright and release information about the Tag Editor Publication 2706 817 Standard Toolbar o uu g lt E i e E Appendix B Tool Summary This appendix contains a brief description of all MessageBuilder tools on the Standard Toolbar Message Edit Toolbar and Tag Editor Toolbar Certain tools cannot be applied in some fields of the dialog the icons are greyed out when those fields are selected File Tools New File Creates a new application file Op
66. and start typing e To delete text highlight it and press the DELETE or BACKSPACE key e To replace some or all text highlight it and type the new text List Boxes Boxes with a down arrow at the right To configure an item within a List Box e Click on the down arrow to the right of a list box to display its list then click on an item to select that option Or move the highlight to a list box and press ALT the down arrow key to display the list Then use the up or down arrow key to select an option If there are more items than can fit in the list a scroll bar appears Some list boxes let you use the mouse to select multiple items Click on the first item press and hold the SHIFT key then click the last item Or click the first item and drag the pointer to the last item To deselect a range click the first item on the list Drop Down Text Boxes Text boxes with a down arrow at the right separated from the text box To configure an item within a Drop Down Text Box e Click on the down arrow to the right of a list box to display its list then click on an item to select that option e Or move the highlight to a list box and press ALT J the down arrow key to display the list then use the up or down arrow key to select an option e Or highlight existing text in the box and type the appropriate name or number B Eaka Hasa Dies Pot Pra Lig bh Ami Theia Hain bea k e a BaT arl MessageB
67. and options supported by Message View terminals with RIO daughterboard Supports Controller Scanner Type Lowest Rack Highest Rack Block Transfer IBM PC 6008 S VME 6008 SV 0 7 Yes DEC QBUS 6008 SQ PLC 5 11 3 3 Yes PLC 5 15 PLC 5 20 j us PLC 5 25 PLC 5 30 i ves PLC 5 40 1 Total Yes PLC SRO Toca Yes SLC 1747 SN Series A 0 3 No SLC 1747 SN Series B 0 3 Yes Other 1771 SN Subsystem 1 7 Yes Publication 2706 817 10 6 Terminal and Communication Setup t The terminal type was defined when the application was created Determined by Terminal Name t To copy rename or delete a controller or terminal in a project use the Devices tab in the Project Management dialog See page 9 5 Publication 2706 817 To configure Remote I O communications 1 In the Terminal Setup dialog verify the terminal type selected in the Catalog and Version field 2 Select the Comms Setup button to open the Communications Setup dialog When the selected terminal in the Terminal Setup dialog has a RIO port the Comms Setup button opens a dialog to configure this port a Terminal Name from Setup dialog Tall lt ___ Must match ore Node Name in Tag Editor i atie Law 9 Perr k Ud Note The Rack setting limits are determined by PLC Scanner type To set up the logic controller 1 Select a logic controller name from the Name list box MessageBuilder software validates the
68. controller memory addresses and are referenced by the application via named tags The designer usually enters all the tags in the Tag Editor Table View before creating any messages Tags may also be edited later when they are assigned to their variables Publication 2706 817 4 4 Planning an Application Messages Publication 2706 817 5 The application designer can validate an application at any time using the Validate command on the Application menu Incompatibilities are caught during validation See Page 11 2 Note An application is automatically validated by MessageBuilder software before it is downloaded to a terminal 6 The designer or operator can monitor how the application is running Messages that have their HE Stack attribute set are logged into the Historical Event Stack file each time they are triggered These logged messages include the value of their display variables at the instant of triggering and the current date and time The HE Stack file is uploaded to the computer on request A Message View terminal has memory reserved for an application with up to 4096 standard messages Messages are triggered individually by the Logic Controller or ASCII Triggering device as required by the interaction between e the MessageBuilder application and e feedback from the machinery to the Logic Controller or ASCII Triggering Device The content of a message is determined by e the MessageBuilder application e
69. conventions used by Windows You should be familiar with basic Windows conventions That is you should know how to use the mouse select commands from menus and work with windows and dialog boxes If you use a mouse here are the basic terms used gt Feature How to use it ee Click Position the mouse pointer on the object area or field then press and release the left button once Position the mouse pointer on the object area or Double click field and click the left button twice quickly Click to highlight the item to be affected by the next Choose an item or command i h command or click on a dialog box option Click on an tool on a menu command or on an item Select an item or command ae i in a dialog box or Help window Point to an item press and hold the left mouse Drag button and move the pointer then release the mouse button Use drag to highlight a text string If you prefer to use the keyboard Action How to do it ___ Press the ALT key and type the letter underlined in Selecta command from a menu the menu name simultaneously Then type the letter underlined in the command name Use the arrow keys or in a dialog both the TAB and Choose area er commana arrow keys to move to the item Select an item or command Highlight an item then press the ENTER key Publication 2706 817 3 2 MessageBuilder Basics MessageBuilder Wind
70. desired number Bit Trigger Bit in the Find Bit Trigger Bit spin control type the number of the bit trigger for the message use the spin control to display the desired number Topic in the Find Topic list box select the list box and highlight the correct topic Note Search For Topic locates messages scattered through the application If you want to edit all messages assigned to a topic they can be brought together in the Message List by Sorting Creating Messages 7 5 5 Select the Find Next button When a match is found the matching message is highlighted in the Message List and appears in the Message Edit box If a match is not found by the bottom top of the list the Find function wraps to continue the search through the rest of the list If there is no match a dialog appears k kiessageuiider has finished searching Ber mereege let The search fem was nol iound 6 Select the Find Next button again to locate the next message that meets the search criteria The Find Message dialog remains open until Close is selected 7 Select the Close button to return to the Message Editor Table View at the last found message Editing Messages To edit a message select it by highlighting it in the Message List The selected message s text appears in the Message Edit box A vertical bar appears at the insertion point Message Edit Bar Message Edit Box Insertion point To highlight text in the
71. dialog See Chapter 10 These include e Remote I O and RS 232 runtime communication parameters e power up defaults e time date display format control and status tags e display settings handshake timeout and trigger priority e set up slaving or a slave device e ASCII triggering Application Validation Use validation to check all elements of the application for correct input See Chapter 11 When an application is downloaded to a terminal MessageBuilder software validates it automatically You can also validate the application at any time using the Validate menu option View warnings or errors detected during validation or send them to a printer or file Publication 2706 817 1 4 Introducing MessageBuilder Configuration Software INTERCHANGE Contig Utility gs Publication 2706 817 Application Upload Download Capabilities Transfer applications between a Message View 421 terminal and a computer running either MessageBuilder Configuration software MessageView File Transfer Utility See the section starting on Page 11 6 Upload Historical Event Stack The MessageView terminal maintains a running log of triggered messages in a Historical Event Stack file Upload this file from the terminal to a computer that has either MessageBuilder software or the File Transfer Utility installed See the section starting on Page
72. e At the bottom of the Window menu is a list of open windows Two of them have the same name The name that is checked represents the active Terminal View so the Table View is represented by the name that is not checked inactive Select it to activate the Table View Zoom The Terminal View can be resized in one of two ways e Click on one of the Zoom tools The Zoom In and Zoom Out tools may be clicked up to four times When the display reaches the maximum or minimum size the tool you have used becomes inactive and is greyed out e Or select the Zoom command on the View menu to open a dialog EE mete CEJ a ms C ma a Select a Zoom To percentage increase over the basic size Select OK and the Terminal View is resized Publication 2706 817 7 18 Creating Messages Embedded Variables and Variables of several kinds and graphics may be embedded in a Graphics message Specifics and limitations of each type are given in Chapter 4 see page references in each section below When the insertion pointer is in the Message Edit box open the Format menu or click the Embedded Variables tool to display a list of the types of variables graphics and ASCII Control Characters This table represents the available Embedded Variables and Graphics Maximum Decimal Displayed b Variable Placeholder Field z Tags Tag Format pay y Point Slave Device Length Time Sample time 10
73. is disabled messages that require operator input may need individual notification and handshake tags Note A message with the Hidden Message attribute set will not return its number to the controlling device since it is not displayed Enable Message Queue The Message Queue in the Message View 421 terminal stores value triggered messages until the line s in which they will be displayed is available Bit triggered messages are not queued e If this option is enabled up to 64 messages can be queued on a First In First Out basis They are displayed in turn as terminal display lines become available With this option enabled make sure to define a Value Trigger tag in the Control Tags tab dialog See Page 10 23 e If this option is disabled a message is displayed only if the line assigned to it is available when it is triggered Publication 2706 817 10 14 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2706 817 Send Values at Power Up If this option is enabled the terminal sends variable data to the controller after power is cycled or the terminal is reset Note This option is always enabled for Remote I O communications If the Send Values at Power Up option is enabled select one of the radio buttons under the Values at Power Up option Select To send the initial values set in the tags for the Preset Values variables send the runtime values at the moment when the Last Values terminal was reset o
74. line 1 overwrites the message in the first buffer and is slaved at once 5 If all the buffers are full and if no buffer has a message for the slave at node 6 line 4 a new message for the slave at node 6 line 4 overwrites the message in the oldest node 6 buffer If none of the buffers has a message for node 6 then the oldest buffer is overwritten no matter which node it was addressed to Publication 2706 817 4 16 Planning an Application Publication 2706 817 6 A message slated for Any Line is displayed on the same line that it was displayed on by the Master Device If the message was a Hidden Any Line message it is displayed on line 1 of the slave s display 7 A message with address 127 is placed in a buffer and is sent to all slaves All other buffers with the same Line Number attribute e g Line 3 are cleared 8 A message with address 127 slated as an All Lines message is placed in a buffer and is sent to all slaves All other buffers are cleared Note If the terminal operator accesses its Front Panel Editor or switches the RS 232 port to MessageBuilder parameters all slaving activities are interrupted Slaving activities are resumed when the operator sets the RS 232 port to Aux Port parameters and exits the Front Panel Editor Slave Message embedded variables Numeric and ASCII Entry variables and Function keys are supported in slaved messages but they are active only on the Master Device The terminal remov
75. may be e display variables that display values in the logic controller e entry variables that allow the terminal operator to enter values at the terminal via the front panel keypad an ASCII Input device A message may have up to 10 display entry variables provided the total message length is not over 100 characters To add a variable to a message 1 Set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box where the variable should be placed 2 Click on the Embedded Variable tool to display a menu of choices Or select the Format menu to display a similar menu 3 Select the name of the variable type to display its dialog box Each type of variable has its own dialog box They are discussed in detail in the next few pages 4 Edit the attributes for the variable 5 Select OK A placeholder is added to the message at the insertion pointer e for Numeric Display variables e A for ASCII Display variables e for Numeric Entry variables e FE for ASCII Entry variables The number of symbols in the placeholder for each entry and display variable represents the field width specified in its dialog Note A Variable placeholder may be removed using the Backspace key or the Cut tool or command It can be pasted only when the entire message is copied and pasted as described on Page 7 8 Tend Sloe i Alga b LLE Siza Miga Mash keere Wideo Time Dea pry Date Das play Humet Variable Degli ASC Varhable
76. message and how function keys work Explains how to use the Tag Editor feature of 8 Working with Tags MessageBuilder software Tags specify the addresses in which variable data are stored Tells how to link a project to an application and how to copy rename or delete projects 3 Managing Projects Also shows how to work with devices in projects Tells how to set operating and runtime 10 Terminal and communication parameters for the Communication Setup MessageView 421 terminal and a logic controller ar oer Tells how to validate an application Explains 11 Validating Ae several methods that transfer it between a and Transferring Files i computer and a terminal or a disk file 12 Creating Reports Tells how to design a report and print it You should have the Message View Display Terminal User Manual Publication No 2706 816 at hand while creating an application Also refer as needed to the manual s for the controller the system will be using Information and procedures relating to INTERCHANGE Software and Microsoft Windows are given in this manual For further details refer to the manuals for these products Publication 2706 817 P 4 Preface Allen Bradley Support Publication 2706 817 Local Product Support Contact your local Allen Bradley representative for e sales and order support e product technical training e warranty support support service agreements Technical Product Assistance If you have
77. name to be changed in the Existing Devices box 3 Select the Rename button 4 A dialog asks for confirmation of the rename Select Yes to rename the device or No to cancel the rename The Existing Devices box now has the new name not the old one Managing Projects 9 7 To edit devices in a different project than the current one If an application is open the project associated with it is listed in the Current Project box However a different project can be selected and its devices edited Select a project name in the Current Project list box The Existing Devices box lists all devices in the selected project Loading Replacing Tags or When reopening an application it is possible that the devices or tags Devices ina Project in the application are not in the project or are different from the devices or tags in the project This section shows how to e load unknown devices or tags in a project e replace devices or tags in a project If application devices or tags are not in its project MessageBuilder displays the following dialog if the application you are opening contains devices terminal controller or tags that are not stored in the project mini in bhe Prrgeect Prp Name ACIT Tan Hame sacth_teeer e e ee eee aa MessageBuilder must be told what to do The options are Select To Add the named device or tag to the project database Ignore the device or tag do not add it to the database Add all
78. port is used for the sole purpose of communicating with e a logic controller which runs the operation The Remote I O port of a MessageView terminal when connected to a logic controller is used to transmit and receive data utilizing discrete I O and block transfer modes Each MessageView terminal is configured to match the device type and communication parameters of the Logic Controller in its Remote T O system The configuration is set up when the application is created so a terminal may be used in a variety of systems according to the application downloaded into it This will be discussed starting on Page 5 12 Publication 2706 817 5 2 Communications Overview Publication 2706 817 RS 232 Port All MessageView terminals incorporate an RS 232 port for serial communications Use the RS 232 port to connect the terminal to A MessageView terminal uses its RS 232 port e to transfer applications and other information between the Message View terminal and a personal computer e tocommunicate with an ASCII Input device terminals which support ASCII Input to communicate with one or more slave devices terminals which support the slaving feature e tocommunicate with an ASCII Triggering device Catalog Nos 2706 M1D M1N and M1F e toconnect a 421D slave device Catalog No 2706 M1D to a master device RS 232 port DF1 configuration The RS 232 port of a MessageView terminal is used to transfer files to and from a c
79. questions about MessageBuilder Configuration software e check online Help e review information on the subject in this manual e review the release notes these are separate icons in the MessageBuilder Group in the Windows Program Manager e review any technical notes on the subject that you have received from Allen Bradley If you still have a question call your local Allen Bradley representative If you need more help call Allen Bradley Global Technical Support 6680 Beta Drive Mayfield Village Ohio 44143 Phone numbers e Inthe USA and Canada call 1 800 289 2279 e Outside the USA and Canada call your local Allen Bradley office or call USA 216 646 6800 e Fax number 216 646 6770 Note If you need to call Allen Bradley for technical assistance please have the serial number of your software available It may be found in three places on the software registration card onthe welcome screen that appears when MessageBuilder starts e inthe main Help menu choose About MessageBuilder to see the About MessageBuilder dialog which has the release date and version number of MessageBuilder software the release date and version number of the Allen Bradley Utilities software What is MessageBuilder Chapter 1 Introducing MessageBuilder Configuration Software This chapter covers the following topics What is MessageBuilder MessageBuilder software features Typical messages in an application
80. settings for the selected controller scanner Or highlight the name in the Name box and type a unique name for the selected logic controller Select the type of logic controller from the Type list box See the list on Page 10 5 If a name already exists the controller type will be entered automatically as defined by that name Block Transfers Terminal and Communication Setup 10 7 To set up the terminal port Use To Use only rack numbers supported by the controller or scanner Rack Specify the module groups used by the terminal in Module Graup the rack they must be contiguous Check this box if these module groups have the kastasi highest numbers assigned in the rack Specify the baud rate used on the RIO link The options are Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 feet 115 2 K 5 000 feet 230 4K 2 500 feet Block Transfer Discussed in detail in the next section 3 Select OK to save the Remote I O settings and return to Terminal Setup dialog Use block transfers on a Remote I O link to transfer a large block of data between the MessageView 421 terminal and the logic controller See the section starting on Page 5 17 Create up to 10 block transfer channels numbered 1 to 10 Each channel is associated with a block transfer read or write instruction BTR or BTW in the controller ladder logic To define block transfers 1 Select the Block Transfer button in the Communication Setup dialog Not
81. tag Use the tag editor to enter a different address for the tag or use the Terminal Setup Comms Setup Block Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag Use the tag editor to change the tag initial value Use the tag editor to change the Maximum entry value Use the tag editor to change the Maximum or Minimum entry values Use the tag editor to change the Maximum Data Entry value Validation Error Messages D 9 Message Meaning What to do Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Write Tag name Min Data Entry Limit is The assigned tag minimum Data Entry Limitis Use the tag editor to change the Minimum smaller than the allowed value for this tag invalid entry value type Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Write Tag name Minimum Data Entry The assigned tag minimum entry is less than Use the tag editor to change the Minimum exceeds data limits 2147483647 to the minimum value allowed Data Entry value 42147483647 nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Write Tag name Scale value of 0 or not in range 0001 to 9999 0 nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Write Tag name nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Write Tag name used but not defined nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Write Tag name has wrong type nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Write Tag name in
82. tag user manual Do notuse blanks tabs carriage returns or non printable The starting If the Data Type is a bit enter either harari ee l l value for the tag e Oorl Maximum precision is 6 places to the right of the decimal Initial Value in engineering point Numeric Entry variables only units which may not be the same units used by the controller Maximum characters for other Data Types 24 they can be 0to9 E and period f present a sign or for the number must be first Default is f present a sign for the exponent must immediately follow the eor E Defaultis Default initial value is 0 Update Frequency How often the terminal should read the data in the tag address 1 to 9 where 1 is the fastest update rate Use either of these methods Click the down arrow and click on the rate Use TAB to move to the Update Frequency field press ALT 4 to display the list of frequencies Does not apply to Remote 1 0 Publication 2706 817 Working with Tags 8 7 Field Description Valid Characters Notes Do not use blanks tabs or carriage returns Maximum precision for scale is 4 places to the right of the Scaling The values that decimal point Seale I n convert the tag s Maximum characters 12 Maximum precision for offset is 6 places to the right of the ny Smee controller integer e 0to 9 decimal point eee values x
83. that tells you what MessageBuilder software is doing at the moment T Table View A window in which Messages or Tags are created and their attributes assigned Tag The collective name for a group of Parameters that define a controller address and how it interacts with a MessageBuilder variable Tag Editor A section of MessageBuilder software in which Tags may be created edited and imported Terminal View A window that looks like the face of the Message View terminal for which the current Application is designed It shows what the Message being edited will look like in the terminal display Tile A way of arranging open windows in the workspace so that they do not overlap Each window occupies a horizontal segment of the workspace See also Cascade Tool An icon that can be used to Select frequently used commands Some tools complete the action immediately others open a Dialog for further input Trigger A unique value or bit assigned to a message used by the Controller to call up the message See also Bit Trigger Value Trigger U Upload The process of transferring an Application or a HE Stack file from a Message View terminal to a computer running MessageBuilder software or the File Transfer Utility An uploaded application exists in both MBA and MVA formats An uploaded HE Stack file exists in CSV format Glossary G 11 V Validate The process of checking an Application for mist
84. the Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack e tag address is notin the discrete 1 0 image of the rack or in the block transfer s nfigured for the Terminal The tag is controlled by the Terminal and is read by the PLC The tag must be in the Input image or be in a BTR Block Transfer Read The tag is controlled by the PLC and is read by the Terminal The tag must be in the Output image or be in a BTW Block Transfer Write There is no Node Name assigned to the tag The Text Size of a message with embedded graphical symbols must be Half i e the size of a graphic is fixed at 2 display lines D 11 Meaning What to do Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as W Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup C ontrol Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to enter a different address for the tag or use the Terminal S etup Comms Setup Block Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Use the tag editor to define the tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial Messages Read Tags di
85. the physical network Terminal Aborted File Transfer File is NOT compatible with terminal The type of MessageView application file that is being downloaded is not compatible with the selected terminal device Generate a new application file specifying the correct terminal type Terminal Aborted File Transfer File is too large for terminal The application file that is being downloaded will not fit in the terminal s memory Reduce the size of the application Terminal Aborted File Transfer Terminal has no file available An upload attempt failed because the terminal did not have an application loaded in memory Download an application to the terminal nal has no file available Term The requested file for upload does not exist This typically occurs when the HE Stack is empty thatis itis cleared Do not attempt to upload an empty HE Stack file Note CRC is Cyclic Redundancy Check a check for errors in files Publication 2706 817 Appendix F Global Configuration Parameters In this table a dot in the Message View 421 Terminals column means that the attribute may be changed by the terminal operator using the Front Panel Editor A dot in the MessageBuilder Software column means that the attribute may be changed by the application designer in the Terminal Setup dialogs Parametername Description Default MessageView Messa
86. the Windows clipboard It may be Pasted to the same or another message Note If it is to be pasted in the same message move the insertion pointer to remove the highlighting To paste a text string 1 Cut or copy the text string to the Windows clipboard 2 If necessary use the Find command or scroll bar to bring up the destination message in the Message Edit box 3 Set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box 4 Click the Paste tool Or press CTRL V Or select Paste from the Edit menu Note A text string may be pasted repeatedly Any cut or copied text string remains on the clipboard until e some other text string is cut or copied e Microsoft Windows is closed Note Text can be copied to or from another Windows application using these techniques Publication 2706 817 7 8 Creating Messages Publication 2706 817 Important When a text string is Copied Cut and Pasted or Replaced any embedded variables or graphics are lost in transit They must be recreated using the Embedded Variable tool or commands However see the next section to copy a message and its attributes Copying and Pasting a message with its variables and attributes 1 2 Click the Copy tool to copy the message including its text embedded variables and attributes to the Windows Clipboard Select the source message in the Message List Or select Copy from the Edit menu Important Make sure that the insertion pointer is not
87. the tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Function Keys dialog to select or add an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to define the tag or use the Function Keys dialog to select or add an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup Status Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup Status Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup Status Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial essages Read Tags dialog to select an ppropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial essages Write Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application LED Indicators dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as W Use the tag editor to enter a different address for the tag or use the Terminal Setup Comms Setup Block Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Use the tag editor to define the tag Use the tag editor to change the ta
88. the terminal to a value of 32 F the initial value in the Tag Editor needs to be 32 not 0 Precision and Rounding Equations for Scaling Example Entered Value Offset Controller Value gra Displayed Value Controller Value x Scale Offset Fixed Decimal 121 36 32 0 018 Stored Value Displayed Value 4964 x 0 018 32 121 35 Keypad Controlled Decimal 122 9 32 1 8 Stored Value 50 5 51 Displayed Value 51 x 1 8 32 123 8 4964 44 4964 Planning an Application 4 41 The logic controller stores values only as integers Digits to the right of the decimal are rounded off However the terminal can scale decimal values to or from integer values In this illustration the entered value of 7 5 is rounded up to 8 When this value is displayed or used in a mathematical formula the result may be incorrect Entered Value 7 5 Displayed Value 8 in Controller Value 8 rounded If decimal precision is needed select appropriate values for scale and offset Example Use scaling to convert a decimal value from degrees Fahrenheit to degrees Celsius Fixed Decimal Decimal Position 2 Field Width 6 Scale Entered Value 4964 44 n n 121 36 Rounded s Fz p Offset 32 4964 Displayed Value Scale 018 4964 12135 lt Controller Keypad Controlled Decimal Decimal Position Operat
89. to change 2 Select the Edit Color button The Color dialog appears with the current color selected Color Basic Colors Selected color A i Custom Colors 3 If you prefer to create a custom color select the Define Custom Colors button and a color mixing dialog appears Publication 2706 817 7 16 Creating Messages Message Editor Terminal pl ile ananga iman dew Windiw Esga piors Table mae A j ACTA ACT Publication 2706 817 bam Comer m e a Seen Turon Daian E S E A A E CICC ACIC C E Baisa Cio Caina Eea eo Be 265 oe tere _ __itele _ iets te tates 4 Experiment by selecting values in the boxes or by moving the cursor about in the color panel 5 When the current color suits you select the Add to Custom Color button and the color appears in the first Custom Color square on the other side of the dialog Repeat as often as you like Note The original color remains selected until you change it 6 Select the basic or custom color you prefer and press OK to return to the Message Editor Table View 7 If you later decide the default color was better call up the Color Selection dialog and select the Restore Defaults button It is useful to see how a message will look on the terminal display To open the Terminal View e click the Terminal View tool e select Terminal View on the Window menu Note The application is designe
90. unsigned signed integer or BCD The Notification Tag list box specifies the name of the tag address where the terminal sets a bit to 1 when a value is sent to the logic controller Handshake Tag list box specifies the name of the tag address where the controller sets a bit to 1 when a notification has been received Select these tags from their tag list boxes or type in new tag names The only valid data type for either Notification or Handshake tag is bit Note Use both Notification and Handshake Tag or neither See the section on handshaking on Page 4 26 If only one tag is entered the application will not pass Validation Note It is easier to create an application if all its tags are entered in the Tag Editor before you start to write messages If a new Read Tag name is used its parameters must be edited when it is assigned If the variable will be scaled needs different data limits or has a new Read Tag assigned 1 Put the insertion pointer in the Read Tag box 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog ee Ll T fa aes eens Umir Hamr Vag fi he Go HUPU E ips lee Soa beslag bite i ja e aa 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section starting on Page 8 2 4 Select OK Publication 2706 817 7 30 ASCII Variable Entry Feet Tend Sloe B Alga Fash faverie Wideo Time apir Dmie Cite pny Humeric Variable lispley ADOI Warabin IH eplay Humare Variable Eir
91. 0159 237 OF f Publication 2706 817 Glossary G 1 Glossary Note A word or words in bold face in an entry has its own entry in this Glossary A Active Window The window that is currently selected Only one window can be active at a time though a number of Table Views of one or several Applications may be open The title bar of the active window is highlighted to differentiate it from other open windows and its name is checked in the Window menu All Tools Menus Attributes and the Edit Box apply only to the active window Any open Dialogs must be closed before another window can be activated Address A label identifying a memory location in the Controller The link between the address and the Variable or other item that uses that address is specified by a Tag See also Node Address AI Software The WINtelligent series version of CSV format software Application A logical arrangement of Messages Tags and configuration Parameters for a specific type of Message View terminal in a system with a specific type of Controller The application runs in a Message View terminal to control a specific process Application File The form in which an application is stored in the computer or used by a MessageView terminal Files created and saved by MessageBuilder are in an MBA format MBA file type They are changed to MVA format MVA file type before being downloaded t
92. 06 817 Data entered by a Message View terminal operator can be scaled from engineering units such as e gallons pounds per square inch to machine control values Values entered at the terminal are scaled according to the formula y mx b y scaled value entered by operator x controller value m scale multiplier b offset To calculate value x stored at the controller address the formula becomes _y b _ Entered Value Offset X m Scale The scale and offset values are entered in the Tag Editor Scaled values affect the controller values as follows e A scale m entered as a value gt 1 generates an x value smaller than y b e A scale m entered as a value lt 1 generates an x value larger than y b Note An ASCII Input device may transmit either numeric or alphanumeric data e Ifit sends numeric data it may enter the data in a Numeric Entry variable where it may be scaled if necessary e Ifit sends alphanumeric data it enters the data in an ASCII Entry variable where it cannot be scaled Planning an Application 4 39 Example Scaling a data entry variable The offset b is specified as 2 and the scale m is specified as 01 If an operator enters a value of 30 for y sA ee x m p 2800 The terminal sends a value of 2 800 to the controller which compares it to the value from the weigh scale transducer Weigh Scale Value 2 800 Matches Input Value 2 800 Packag
93. 0o91 1333 58 i 0123 13 28 34 ic FS fcra oso J74 3c lt o9 134 5c 0124 174 7c 29 35 1D les ct foe 735 30 09 135 50 0125 175 7D 30 36 1E RS cw 062 76 3E gt o 136 5e 0126 176 31 37 iF us cw ff 063 7 sF os 137 se _ oz 177 7 4 Publication 2706 817 ASCII and Extended ASCII Characters 1 3 Extended ASCII Character Set 850 Multilingual Latin I Dec Oct Hex Char Char 0128 200 80 0 0129 201 81 i B 0130 202 82 0131 203 83 0 0132 204 84 6 0133 205 85 a 4 0134 206 86 a a u 0135 207 87 A p 0136 210 88 IL b 0137 211 89 c9 Ir 0233 351 E9 0138 212 8A CA a 0234 352 EA U 0139 213 8B i CB T 0235 353 EB U 0140 214 8C i cC It 0236 354 EC 0141 215 8D i CD 0237 355 ED 0142 216 8 CE F 0238 356 EE 0143 217 8F A CF q 0239 357 EF 0144 220 90 DO 0240 360 FO a 0145 221 91 D1 0241 361 Fl 0146 222 92 D2 0242 362 F2 0147 223 93 0148 224 94 0149 225 95 0150 226 96 0151 227 97 0152 230 98 0153 231 99 0 0154 232 9A 0155 233 9B g 0156 234 9C 0157 235 9D 0158 236 9E x
94. 1 If the Return Message Number tag is defined the Message View terminal will return the message number associated with a message that does not have the Ack attribute or function keys each time the message is displayed If a message is not displayed no message number is returned This provides a means of signalling to the logic controller that a message has been displayed Note Hidden messages do not return a message number when they are processed since they are not displayed The Return Message Number tag is globally defined That is the Return Message Number tag address is the same for all messages Planning an Application 4 31 Tags Create tags in the Tag Editor to link message triggers and message variables with specific controller addresses A tag specifies the address and data type whether a value should be written to that address or read from it and other information Chapter 8 shows how tags are used in MessageBuilder applications Message triggers and each embedded variable in a message must be linked to a controller data table The MessageView terminal either reads the data for a message trigger or a display variable or writes data for an entry variable PLC SLC Data Tables MessageView Display i LL pA Message with Entry Variable Discrete 1 0 Input Table Output Table Messag
95. 17 7 2 Creating Messages Working with Messages Cw Culex Copy Dit Ponte Deiat Delete Message Alafelete Kee Measige Publication 2706 817 In the Message Editor Table View you can e create and revise individual messages e enter and revise attributes for each message e work with many commands and tools which are available only when an application is open The Message List at the bottom of the Message Editor Table View lists all messages in the application e The Number column displays the Message number which is used as the Value Trigger e The Topic column displays the message subgroup to which the message is assigned The Message Text column displays the text and placeholders that make up the message text Each message in an application is created and edited individually To create a new message MessageBuilder software has four ways to create a message and add it to the Message List To append a message at the end of the Message List e click the Append Message tool on the Message Edit Toolbar select New Message in the Edit menu To insert a message above the currently highlighted message e click the Insert Message tool on the Message Edit Toolbar e select Insert Message in the Edit menu Each new message is highlighted in the Message List and is displayed in the Message Edit box It has default text of Message X where X is its Message Number To delete a message Highlight the
96. 2 but as a bit N7 2 10 A bit is a location and depends on its position in the word It can be set or reset Publication 2706 817 4 34 Publication 2706 817 Planning an Application Signed and Unsigned Integers Data in signed and unsigned integer format occupy one word 2 bytes or 16 bits of memory no matter how small the value is Every bit has a value that depends on its position in the word The value encoded is the sum of the bits that are set Unsigned Integer 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 256 16 4 1 211 Signed Integer 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 e aa SE a S 12 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 4 26 6 4 1 277 Sign Bit i 1 Negative 2 s 0 ositive Complement BCD Data in BCD format also called 4 BCD occupy one word of memory Every four bits encodes a single decimal digit 0 9 BCD 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 2 7 7 211 Character Array Data in Character Array format are assigned to ASCII variables The length of a character array is from 1 to 32 bytes The ST file type is a character array Other file types can also be viewed as characters Planning an Application 4 35
97. 37 45 25 105 45 JE 145 65 Je 6 6 6 ACK Ctr 038 46 26 106 46 F 146 66 f 7 7 7 BEL CtreG o9 a 27 107 a G 147 67 y e 10o 8 BS ciH 040 50 28 110 48 JH 150 68 h 9 u 9 aT ct fos 51 29 0105 151 69 i 10 12 Ja uF cm ffos 52 2A 0106 152 6A j u fn JB vt cik 03 53 2B 0107 153 6B k 12 14 Cc FF cme oss 54 2c 0108 154 6c I 13 15 D cR Ctrm o5 55 20 0109 155 6D m 14 16 Je so cin ffos 56 2 16 4E Nn ono 156 6 n 15 fi F st cmo 07 57 ar l 079 17 a lo om 157 6 o 16 20 10 DE Culp o 60 30 o foso 120 50 P om2 160 70 p 7 21 u bc crea ff o49 61 31 1 osn 12 51 Jo om 7 fa 18 22 12 oc2 cmr oso 62 32 2 fos2 12 52 R fou4 162 72 r 19 23 13 DC3 CtrS ff 051 63 33 3 fos 123 53 S ons 163 73 s 20 24 14 pc4 cmt 052 64 34 4 od 124 54 t one 164 74 t 21 25 15 Nak Ctlu ff 053 65 35 5 oss 1235 55 u ou7 165 75 u 22 26 16 SYN cmv 054 66 36 6 086 126 56 v ons 166 76 v 23 27 17 ETB cnw 055 67 37 7 0o87 127 57 w ono 167 77 w 24 30 18 CAN Ctx 056 70 38 8 joss 130 58 x 0120 170 78 x 2 31 19 lem ctly 057 n 39 9 os 131 59 Y ozn fim 79 y 26 32 1A SUB ctz 058 72 3a 090 132 5A z 0122 12 7A z 27 33 ESC fcri f 059 3 3
98. 4 19 for information on the Historical Event Stack and on Page 11 13 for information on how to upload it to the computer for analysis Reports Use the report function to create customized reports for an application See Chapter 12 Reports may include any or all of the following e application description e messages e message attributes terminal settings tags and their attributes e function keys e LED indicators Send reports to a printer supported by Microsoft Windows In addition to the report function you may print information on tags and their attributes via the Tag Editor see Page 8 13 Terminal Upgrade Use the Upgrade Terminal command to upgrade the firmware in your MessageView terminal s See Page 11 18 Typical Messages in an Application Introducing MessageBuilder Configuration Software 1 5 An application contains messages Messages may contain embedded data variables graphical symbols and when designed for Message View 421F terminals may have function keys enabled This example of a 421N Terminal View has a message that contains e a graphic symbol e an ASCII Variable Display E SMP Proj SMP DEMO MBA 2 EEG ply i gt This example of a 421F Terminal View has a message that contains e a Time Variable e a Numeric Variable Display e enabled Function Keys Note One message may occupy more than one line in the Terminal View if the Line attribute is selected as AI
99. 7 Before uploading an application 108 DF1 INTERCHANGE communication driver must be installed and loaded on the computer See Page 2 3 Driver communication parameters must be checked using the Workstation Setup command on the File menu See Page 2 7 Cable connections must be correct See the Message View Terminal User Manual Publication 2706 816 for details The Message View terminal must have its RS 232 port set to MessageBuilder communication parameters See Page 5 3 for an example of how to switch settings Applica Tay Eds Project eeprom Desorption Validate Deenload Upload HTE Dhrvaikri HE Stack Upload Terminal Setup Special Mranages Finca Eryn LED bitini Validating Applications and Transferring Files 11 11 To upload an application from a MessageView terminal 1 Choose Upload from the Application menu H Application Upload Source perator Terminal Appears only if DF 1 INTERCHANGE driver installed Communication Drivers j Currently loaded drivers DF1 lt _ _ _ Shows drivers currently loaded File Name C AB MBWIN SMP SD MVA Under Source verify that Operator Terminal is selected This is the only option available In the File Name box enter an MBA file name in which to save the uploaded application Or select Browse to search for an existing file which will be overwritten by the uploade
100. 8 HE Stack 4 19 status tags 10 25 upload 11 13 HE Stack attribute 7 39 Help Contents tool 3 14 B 2 Help menu 3 14 About MessageBuilder 3 18 A 8 Contents A 8 How To Use Help A 8 Search For Help On A 8 technical assistance P 4 Help menu Tag Editor About A 11 Contents A 11 Help Question tool 3 14 B 2 Hidden attribute 7 37 Historical Event Stack See HE Stack Hold Time Momentary function key 7 49 Indicator tags See LEDs Initial State Maintained function key 7 49 Insert Message tool 7 2 B 3 Insert Tag tool 8 8 B 4 Installation See MessageBuilder software INTERCHANGE configuring drivers 2 7 2 9 installation 2 3 installation problems 2 12 upload download 11 5 Inverse Video tool 7 38 B 3 ISA Symbols B 6 B 7 J Jog feature 4 21 7 36 examples 7 51 maintained function keys 4 24 Justify See Left Justify tool L Language attribute 10 15 Latched function keys See Function keys Least Significant Bit See Bit triggers LEDs 4 25 setup 7 52 Left Justify tool 7 37 B 3 Line attribute 7 34 7 35 Logic controllers addresses 5 12 file types 4 32 4 33 Remote I O setup See Remote I O types 5 14 10 5 M Maintained function keys See Function keys Master device See Slaving master device Master List 7 11 MBA file 11 1 Menus application no
101. 906 Day Unsigned Integer terminal The value is available when Special Message 9906 Get 0 31 Time Date is triggered A value that indicates the hour of the Real Time Clock in the Special Message 9906 Hour Unsigned Integer terminal The value is available when Special Message 9906 Get 0 23 Time Date is triggered A value that indicates the minute of the Real Time Clock in the Special Message 9906 Minute Unsigned Integer terminal The value is available when Special Message 9906 Get 0 59 Time Date is triggered A value that indicates the second of the Real Time Clock in the Special Message 9906 Second Unsigned Integer terminal The value is available when Special Message 9906 Get 0 59 Time Date is triggered Special Message 9907 Battery Test Bit A bit that when set indicates that the battery is functional 01 0 Fails 1 Pass Publication 2706 817 Appendix H Tag Address Worksheet This appendix contains a worksheet to help in planning an application Variables cannot be assigned to memory addresses that overlap and the only way to make sure they do not overlap is to write them all down Make copies as needed and use them to enter addresses for each tag in the application Depending on what your application requires you may need one or more worksheets for each of the following e RS 232 e Discrete I O e Block Transfer Read e Block Transfer Write Or you may prefer to have a separate worksheet for each b
102. Anything cut is put on the clipboard where it remains until something else is copied or cut or until Windows is closed Copy Copies a selected text string from the Message Edit box or copies a selected message from the application Anything copied is put on the clipboard where it remains until something else is copied or cut or until Windows is closed Paste Copies a text string from the clipboard to the cursor position in the Message Edit box or a message to the application Whatever is on the clipboard may be pasted as often as needed Delete Message Removes selected message s from the application Insert Message Creates a new message above the currently selected message New Message Appends a new message after the last message View Menu v Toolbar Menus and Commands Summary A 3 Find Opens a dialog to locate any message in the application by message number topic text or trigger Replace Opens a dialog to replace a text string with another text string in any or all of the messages in which the text string is found Sort Opens a dialog to sort all messages in the application by message number topic text or trigger Renumber Opens a dialog to set the number of the first message and renumber in sequence all messages that follow Topics Opens a dialog to define a text string for each topic used in the application Use commands on the View menu to toggle window b
103. Builder version nn nn is not compatible with the version of CMSERV DLL that is currently in memory MessageBuilder will exit Conflict between MessageBuilder and PanelBuilder DLL files Exit PanelBuilder to unload the DLL and then restart MessageBuilder before restarting P anelB uilder essageBuilder version nn nn is not compatible with the version of CTKRIO DLL that is currently in memory MessageBuilder will exit Publication 2706 817 Conflict between MessageBuilder and PanelBuilder DLL files Exit PanelBuilder to unload the DLL and then restart MessageBuilder before restarting PanelBuilder Message MessageBuilder version nn nn is not compatible with the version of WPFTDLL DLL thatis currently in memory MessageBuilder will exit Configuration Software Error and Warning Messages C 3 Meaning Conflict between MessageBuilder and PanelBuilder DLL files What to do Exit PanelBuilder to unload the DLL and then restart MessageBuilder before restarting PanelBuilder No default printer Use Control Panel to install and select a default printer A default printer has not been configured See the Windows user manual for details on how to install and select printers Not enough resource memory to open dialog Low memory error Close other applications and try again If error persists exit Windows reboot and try again Out of memory Close other applications and try again
104. Change Port To ASCII Triggering Slave Device Slave Port or ASCII Input the RS 232 port is currently set to communicate with the computer The name in the Change Port To menu item is the type of Auxiliary Device the application is designed for Note The physical connection between the computer and the terminal does not have to be maintained after an application is downloaded If it is not maintained the connection must be re established when a file is to be uploaded to or downloaded from the computer RS 232 Port Power Up attribute The application sets the Message View terminal s RS 232 port to power up to one of the two possible settings when the application starts running MessageBuilder parameters e auxiliary port parameters The Port Power Up attribute is configured in the Advanced tab in the Terminal Setup dialog See Page 10 16 MessageView terminal hardware firmware MessageBuilder software has been designed to configure the RS 232 port parameters for communication with a device compatible with the Message View terminal s hardware firmware configuration If the terminal s RS 232 port is used to communicate with e the computer only the port parameters do not have to be configured in the application They are predefined in the INTERCHANGE Configuration Utility see Page 5 2 and the Message View terminal s firmware e an Auxiliary Device while the application is running the port parameters m
105. Clock RTC in the terminal e HE Stack Upload for uploading the Historical Event Stack file to the computer in CSV format MessageView File Transfer Utility Use the MessageView File Transfer Utility WINMFT EXE to transfer applications when MessageBuilder is not running This utility is available as an icon in the MessageBuilder group See Page 11 15 Use tools or File menu commands to e download an application to a Message View terminal from an MVA file e upload an application from a MessageView terminal to an MVA file e verify an application on the computer in the same way it is verified in the MessageView 421 terminal e download the computer s time and date to the Real Time Clock RTC in the terminal e upload the terminal s Historical Event Stack file to a CSV file Publication 2706 817 11 6 Validating Applications and Transferring Files Downloading an Application to a Terminal Application Tag Editor Project Management Description Validate Download Upload RTC Download HE Stack Upload Terminal Setup Special Messages Function Keys LED Indicators Preferences Publication 2706 817 An application may be downloaded to a Message View terminal using the Application menu Download command Before downloading an application 104 e DFI INTERCHANGE communication driver must be installed and loaded on the computer See Page 2 3 Drive
106. EM Publication 2706 817 Planning an Application 4 29 Hardware handshake for an auxiliary port A Message View terminal may have its RS 232 port connected to an auxiliary device A number of auxiliary devices are listed on Pages 5 6 and 5 7 The RS 232 cable has an RTS line from the terminal to notify the device when it is ready to receive and a CTS line from the device to notify the terminal when it is ready to receive These are used as follows e Ifthe terminal s input buffer is full the terminal asserts the RTS line so the auxiliary device will stop sending data e Ifthe terminal detects an asserted CTS line it will not send any more data e Ifthe terminal detects an asserted CTS line after 30 seconds the terminal displays a CTS error message This message remains active for 2 seconds then it is cleared from the display After 30 seconds the terminal tests the CTS line again and if necessary displays the CTS error message again This cycle is repeated until the communications problem is corrected and the CTS line is non asserted Momentary or Maintained Function Keys pseudo handshake The MessageView terminal supports a pseudo handshake for Momentary and Maintained Function Keys The pseudo handshake uses the Function Key Return Message Number tag defined in the Terminal Setup Control Tags dialog See Page 10 24 If the Function Key Return Message Number tag is defined the Message View terminal will return the messag
107. Embedded Carriage Return not allowed with Full size text Embedded Display Variables are not allowed in Chained message number chained from message number Embedded Display Variables are not allowed in the Background message Embedded Display Variables are not allowed in the Startup message Embedded Entry Write Tag used but not defined Embedded Graphic 13 is not allowed in slave messages Embedded Carriage Return not allowed without All attribute set Error Msg number Numeric Variable Entry is not supported by terminal type Error Return Message Number to PLC checked in the Advanced dialog requires Msg Tags Return Number Ack Tags Return Number or FKey Tag Return Number be defined Field width of Entry is larger than the width of the display Function Key Write Tag missing or tag not assigned Graphic does not display properly on the end of the line Publication 2706 817 Validation Error Messages Meaning The embedded ASCII Character of value 13 is not allowed for slaving messages The assigned tag array size is smaller than the display field width Operator input cannot be completed without a large character array defined The message with Full attribute can not contain embedded Carriage Return Applications can not support embedded displayable variables in a chained to message The Background Message assigned that has embedded display variables is not allowed The
108. Exceptions dialog which displays errors detected during application validation Use this dialog as a reference while correcting errors Table View Brings focus to the Message Editor Table View Terminal View Brings focus to the Message Editor Terminal View with the current message displayed 1 Project Application MBA A list of all applications and all views currently open in the workspace The active window is checked Publication 2706 817 A 8 Menus and Commands Summary Help Menu Contents Search For Help On How To Use Help About MessageBuilder Project Menu Tag Editor Project Print Page Setup Edit Menu Tag Editor Ctrl C Ctrl Copy Paste Field Delete Insert Find Duplicate Once Duplicate Several Publication 2706 817 Use commands on the Help menu to access the MessageBuilder Online Help utility Contents Displays an index to online Help Search for Help On Provides a list of Help topics available online How To Use Help Provides a short tutorial and other information about using MessageBuilder Help About MessageBuilder Displays copyright and release information about MessageBuilder Use the version number and serial number on this screen if you need to call Allen Bradley for help Use commands on the Project menu to print the Tag Editor or selected parts of it Print Selects which tags to p
109. MessageView Address CR e LED is the LED being toggled e LED State is 1 On or 0 Off MessageView Address is the node address of the terminal in the ASCII network Handshaking is a means of acknowledging that a command has been received and performed by either the MessageView terminal or the logic controller The Message View terminal supports handshaking for e latched function keys e numeric and ASCII data entry variables e Auxiliary Port devices hardware handshaking The MessageView terminal supports pseudo handshaking for momentary function keys e maintained function keys e acknowledge messages all other messages Latched Function Key handshake Latched Function Keys require a defined handshake tag When a message uses a Latched Function Key the Function key write tag notifies the logic controller that the Function key bit assigned is latched in the On state The controller then uses the handshake tag to notify the MessageView terminal when the Function key is to be unlatched The handshake tag for a Latched Function Key is globally defined in the Function Key dialog That is the tag assigned to a Latched Function Key is the same tag every time that Function key is enabled for a message Notification Tag Handshake Tag B 2 Planning an Application 4 27 Numeric and ASCII Data Entry handshake Numeric and ASCII data entry variables do not require a defined handshake tag Howe
110. On command Message Number arranges messages in numerical order Each message keeps its own message number in a Sort so you can restore the original list by Sorting on Message Number Trigger arranges messages in order of the address of their bit triggers Messages without bit triggers appear first in the list in their original order Text arranges messages in order by the initial item Priority goes in order to a variable aspace anumber a letter Topic places messages with the same topic together Note If you want messages to be sorted within the topic do a preliminary Sort on the other attribute s before sorting on Topic Select Master List to retain this sort as a default when the application is closed and reopened If Master List is not enabled the Sort is used temporarily while editing In fact a number of Table Views can be displayed at the same time with different sort orders for their Message Lists Select OK to perform the Sort Messages are rearranged in the Message List according to the option chosen Publication 2706 817 7 12 Creating Messages Message m 6 Feline Measage Ahs Deiet janen ico ge Frw heag Fad Pig jalinee Sort Ma nqem her Tape f ii Publication 2706 817 Renumbering messages ATTENTION When you renumber a message or messages recheck chained messages They must be edited if they refer to a number that was changed Message numbe
111. PS ASCII AI or CSV ATTENTION The Export function automatically adjusts tag names and descriptions to fit the new format If this will cause problems edit the tags and their names before opening the Export tool e When you export to an APS ASCII file If the tag name is longer than 10 characters the Export function truncates the name If the description is longer than 50 characters the Export function truncates the description If special characters in the description are equivalent to those used by APS the Export function translates them carriage return lt cr gt to backslash quotation mark to double quotation marks backslash to tilde backslash If the tag name contains other special characters the Export function deletes them e When you export to an AI file If the tag name is longer than 15 characters the Export function truncates the name If the description is longer than 75 characters the Export function truncates the description e When you export to a CSV file If the comment description field contains quotation marks commas or carriage returns the Export function puts quotation marks around the comment field If the comment field contains embedded quotation marks the Export function changes them to double quotation marks Working with Tags 8 21 3 Under Source select a project and the logic controller associated with it 4 Under Destination type
112. Pat Al Maika NIEN Using the Aux Port tab The Aux Port tab in the Terminal Setup dialog allows you to configure an alternate set of communication parameters for the RS 232 port on the terminal This tab is used when the terminal specified in the Terminal Setup dialog has a Remote I O port Catalog Nos 27006 M1D1 M1N1 or M1F1 fetes aieea Teer Cedies tiem ton maha O ep Master Soup a Teele Comet a a eet Mm Pomi Clever hia Pan ista CEREN Oana faa Las pm A Ce p Bir lisia Woe Pectcl Deker Publication 2706 817 5 6 Communications Overview Publication 2706 817 The Auxiliary Device uses the same RS 232 port that Message Builder software uses to download the application but the port parameters may be different e See Page 10 27 for the procedure to configure the RS 232 port to communicate with one of the auxiliary devices listed below e See Page 5 3 for an outline of the procedure the terminal operator uses to switch from one set of port parameters to the other Note Parameters for communication between the Message View terminal and the computer are built into the terminal firmware and cannot be edited ASCII Input device A MessageView terminal with a RIO daughterboard and firmware that supports ASCII Input can accept data from an ASCII Input device Data from such a device is entered into ASCII or Numeric Entry variables embedded in a message ASCII Input devices incl
113. SCII Triggering devices Slave device Slaving master device devices 5 2 MessageBuilder configuration 5 2 port setup 5 3 10 9 10 27 runtime parameters 10 10 RTC Download 11 9 File Transfer Utility 11 16 S Save File tool 6 6 B 1 Saving applications 6 6 Exceptions 11 4 reports 12 7 tags 8 8 to an MVA file 11 8 Scaling data 4 37 4 39 Tag Editor 8 7 Scroll attribute 7 36 Scroll bar Message List 7 3 Searching See Message List Selecting See Message List Signed integer format See Data formats Simulate Mode 10 14 Slave device 4 18 Comms Setup dialog 5 7 5 8 port setup 10 9 Slaving master device 4 15 attributes setup 7 41 Auto Format 7 45 Aux Port dialog 5 5 5 6 buffers 4 15 packet format 7 42 setup 10 27 Slave alarm relay 4 17 7 47 slave packet 4 17 SLC See Logic controllers Software See MessageBuilder software Sorting messages 7 11 tags 8 12 Special Messages setup 7 54 list 4 5 Startup Message 10 17 Status Bar 3 8 Status tags 10 25 Store Message tool 7 10 B 3 storing attributes 7 33 F Table View illustration 3 4 7 1 Table View tool 7 17 B 2 Table View tool Tag Editor 8 8 B 5 Tag Editor 4 36 ASCII Variable Display 7 26 ASCII Variable Entry 7 31 changing views 8 3 Form View 8 3 Function key tag 7 50 7
114. Status byte Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded ASCII Entry Tag name array size must be between 2 and 33 Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded ASCII Entry Tag array size must be greater than ASCII Entry variable field width Validation Error Messages Meaning What to do The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type The tag is controlled by the Terminal and is read by the PLC The tag must be in the Input image or be in a BTR Block Transfer Read The bit trigger number is required to be within the range of 0 to 1023 The tag is controlled by the PLC and is read by the Terminal The tag must be in the Output image or be in a BTW Block Transfer Write The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag must have an array size between the values of 1 and 32 The tag address is notin the discrete 1 0 age of the rack or in the block transfer s onfigured for the Terminal oS The tag is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack The assigned tag array size is outside the valid range The assigned tag array size is smaller than the display field width Operator input cannot be completed without a large character array defined The tag definition is incorrect The tag is undefined in the pro
115. TERCHANGE V6 1 or later is compatible with Microsoft Windows 95 Publication 2706 817 2 2 Installing MessageBuilder Software Installing MessageBuilder Software Publication 2706 817 To install MessageBuilder Configuration Software 1 Insert MessageBuilder software disk 1 in the appropriate high density floppy disk drive 2 Start Windows if necessary by typing win at the DOS command prompt and pressing ENTER 3 To start installing MessageBuilder with Windows 3 1x in the Program Manager window choose Run from the File menu ALT F R e with Windows 95 in the Start menu choose Run MS key R 4 In the command line box type the drive letter of the drive containing the MessageBuilder Software disk 1 followed by a colon and the word setup For example type a setup Then select OK or press ENTER 5 You are prompted to begin the MessageBuilder installation Select e Yes to continue e No to cancel 6 The installation software checks your system for AB Utilities software If it detects an older version of AB Utilities software it warns you that the previous version will be deleted before the new version is installed If it detects the same or a newer version of AB Utilities software it notifies you that there is no need to upgrade it 7 If installation of AB Utilities is required you are prompted to install the AB Utilities Software e Insert the AB Utilities disk e Enter target drive an
116. Tag The Read Tag specifies the name of the tag address from which the terminal will read the display data Select a tag from the Read Tag list box or type in a new Read Tag name The only valid data type for the read tag is Character Array Note It is easier to create an application if all its tags are entered in the Tag Editor before you start to write messages If a new Read Tag name is used its parameters must be edited when it is assigned Numeric Variable Entry Flach fversea Widera Time Deapay Date Dea ply Humeiic Vartoble Dingle AFTI Vartable Diop ery Kumenc Varnablc Entry ASCH Variable etry ERA iml ghar Graphic Fal Vailabie Erable Funtian Rey Creating Messages 7 27 If the Read Tag is new or its parameters need to be edited 1 Put the insertion pointer in the Read Tag box 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog Lp Hr Opa Foe peee J Haie Hame Lay ria alam mcs fa eroereo ag Aone ligden Frogs Boing hije 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section starting on Page 8 2 Note Character Array size must be between 1 and 32 4 Select OK Slave devices Slave devices support the display of ASCII Display variables in messages They are updated while the slave message is actively displayed ASCII Triggering devices Tag Node Name and Address attributes are ignored by an ASCII Triggering device They may be omitted when creating applications for us
117. Tag import export utility importing tags exporting tags examining the results of an import export Tags define the link between each variable and its assigned address in the logic controller See the section starting on Page 4 31 for a discussion of how tags work Enter tag information in either of two ways Table View Enter and edit all tags for the application in a table which has its own toolbar and columns for tag attributes This is also called the Summary View Form View Enter or edit a single tag from an Edit Tag dialog available through the variable s dialog in the Message Editor Table View If Numeric Variables are to be scaled change from the Tag Editor Table View to the Form View as needed Publication 2706 817 8 2 Working with Tags Apalicatan Tag Citar Dgecription validas hreig i Uplowd To open the Table View 68 ATC Dewniond He Sark Upload Opening the Tag Editor Choose Tag Editor from the Application menu Terminal getap Sf pecaal Me saagei You can toggle the Status Bar and Tool Bar on and off just as with the Message Editor Table View Simply select the appropriate Prenent 7 i command in the View menu Name of ProjectName Type of View this window Allen Bradley Tag Editor SMP Proj Summary Menu Bar Tag Toolbar Character Arnab SLC 5 04 Character Array Data input from bar code scanner input from bar code scanner SLC
118. ace Press this button To a Open a Print dialog allowing you to prntal or specific pages of the report Next Page View the next page of the report Previous Page View the previous page of the report One Page View the report one page at a time Two Page View the report two pages ata time side by side Increase the magnification of the view so the Zoom In report looks larger You can increase the magnification several times Decrease the magnification of the view so the Zoom Out report looks smaller You can decrease the magnification several times Exit the Preview workspace and return to the Eee Report Setup dialog Publication 2706 817 12 6 Creating Reports Setting up a Printer Publication 2706 817 To print a report e A printer must be connected to your computer e The computer must recognize the printer as a valid printer See your Microsoft Windows User s Guide for details on installing printers To set up the printer 1 Select the Printer Setup button in the Report Setup dialog to open the standard Windows Print Setup dialog currently HP DeskJet 560C Printer on oi_100 tech3 LPT1 Specific Printer Options HP DeskJet 560C Printer on oi_100 tech3 LPT1 Orientation Paper Portrait Size Letter 81 2 11 in C Landscape Source in Tray If the default printer is not the one in use select a printer from th
119. ach application ATTENTION Do not configure Function Keys as emergency stops or other controls critical for safe operation Use separate hard wired operator interface devices Refer to Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 Communications interruptions The MessageView 421 terminal relies on communications with the logic controller or ASCII Triggering device e Communications are interrupted within the terminal when it isin the Front Panel Editor mode is receiving an application download from a personal computer has a major fault loses power detects that the Remote I O link has failed The logic controller considers the terminal as a faulted I O rack when it does not communicate The controller must be programmed to cope with this situation Specifically it must e return any machine or process to a safe state e monitor the rack fault bit associated with the Message View terminal s assigned rack Refer to the controller s user manual Applications and Projects Planning an Application 4 3 Here are the steps needed to create an application 1 The designer should document the application carefully This documentation should include the purpose of the application what information the operator will need to make good decisions and what choices the operator will have to make The designer and operator should discus
120. age Edit box where the variable should be placed e Click the Embedded Variable tool on the Message Edit toolbar and select Numeric Variable Entry on the dialog Or select the ASCII Variable Entry command on the Format menu To edit the variable highlight the variable placeholder in the message e Click the Embedded Variable tool e Or select the Edit Variable command on the Format menu Field width 10 Sj Creating Messages 7 31 When a variable is created or edited its dialog appears Forman Daia Tags C Fass E ima ie g e Format The Field Width spin control specifies the maximum number of alphanumeric characters that can be entered in the variable Note The message will not pass Validation if the Field Width is greater than the Write Tag s Character Array value Default is 32 To change the field width range 1 to 32 select or enter a value in the spin control Note If the input device sends more characters than fit in the Field Width the extra characters are ignored Tags The Write Tag list box specifies the name of the tag address to which the terminal will write the entered data Select a tag from the Write Tag list box or enter a new Write Tag name The only valid data type is Character Array The Notification Tag list box specifies the name of the tag address where the terminal sets a bit to 1 when a value is sent to the logic controller Handshake Tag list box specifies the name o
121. age is not allowed some other value than 13 Change or disable the Startup Message in the Terminal Setup Advanced dialog or create a message with the assigned message number The PLC Scanner with which the terminal communicates is not defined The Remote 1 0 rack information is not defined The Slave Address can not be less than 1 The Startup Message is assigned to an undefined message number Tag is undefined in the project database Use the tag editor to define the tag Use the Terminal Setup Comms Setup dialog or the Communication Setup Block Transfer dialog to define the RIO port information Use the Terminal Setup Comms Setup dialog or the Terminal Setup dialog to define the device The RIO communication port setup is incomplete The PLC or Terminal device name is not in the project database Validation Error Messages D 13 Message Meaning What to do Use the Terminal Setup Communication Setup dialog to configure the PLC S canner type and name Use the Trigger Priority control on the There is no Value Trigger tag defined for the Terminal Setup Advanced dialog to change application however the Trigger Priority is set the priority to Bit or use the Terminal to Value Setup C ontrol Tags dialog to define a Value Trigger tag Validation Tags PLC S canner The PLC Scanner with which the terminal communications port not defined communicates is not defined Value Trigger Priority mismatch wi
122. ages Function Keys LED Indicators Preferences Validating Applications and Transferring Files 11 13 The Historical Event Stack file is a log of messages maintained by the Message View terminal It may be uploaded to the computer using MessageBuilder menu commands 109 The file is a text file in CSV Comma Separated Value format Many commercially available software packages such as text editors spreadsheets or databases are able to view print analyze or otherwise manipulate the HE stack data Before uploading the HE Stack e DFI INTERCHANGE communication driver must be installed and loaded on the computer See Page 2 3 e Driver communication parameters must be checked using the Workstation Setup command on the File menu See Page 2 7 e Cable connections must be correct See the Message View Terminal User Manual Publication 2706 816 for details e The MessageView terminal must have its RS 232 port set to MessageBuilder communication parameters See Page 5 3 for an example of how to switch settings To upload the HE Stack from a Message View terminal Note An application file does not have to be open when this command is used 1 Choose HE Stack Upload from the Application menu Historical Event Stack Upload Source l OK j a Appears only if DF1 INTERCHANGE driver installed Communication Drivers j Currently loaded drivers DF1 lt Shows drivers
123. ai Waber l E F Taag fokbrin Ligia Furvpenccye a ieas 1 Defa e a May 8 Table View Form View Tags are stored in a database that is referenced by a project name The project name is entered when creating a new application file Note A project can be created only when a new application is created However once it has been created existing or new applications may be assigned to it Publication 2706 817 Planning an Application 4 37 Scaling Data Display Scaled Data Display Variables take raw numeric values and Variables mathematically manipulate them so the values can be shown in standard units such as e gallons e feet per second e pounds per square inch Values from the logic controller address are scaled using the formula y mx b y scaled displayed value x value stored in controller address m scale multiplier b offset The scale and offset values are entered in the Tag Editor Example Scaling a Display Variable 7 N Flow Rate is 13 GPS VW Ps Valve 1 5 5 5 Hp 3 GB BRE Flow Rate J Se Scaling Transducer p37 Er 510 510 x 0 0059 10 a Controller Note Messages sent to slave devices may contain scaled variables The variable tag contains the scaling information Publication 2706 817 4 38 Planning an Application Scaling Data Entry Variables Publication 27
124. akes that will cause problems when it is run MessageBuilder software notifies the application designer of any validation errors since they must be corrected before the application can be downloaded to a Message View terminal Applications are automatically validated as part of the Download process and they may also be validated while they are being created Value Trigger A message s number The Controller may specify a message number to call up the corresponding message Variable A number or an array of characters whose value in a message displayed by the Message View terminal is sent from data in the Controller or from the value input by the operator or by an ASCII Input Device In MessageBuilder software a variable is represented by a Placeholder Verify The process by which a Message View terminal checks an Application that has been Downloaded to make sure it is designed for the correct type of terminal W Workspace The area of the computer display in which the MessageBuilder Application is created and edited Z Zoom A procedure for enlarging the Terminal View so that it is larger than the default size Publication 2706 817 A Ack attribute 7 39 global tags 10 23 Ack Time attribute 7 39 Addressing See Tags AI format importing exporting tags 8 17 8 21 Alarm relay See Slaving master device Aligning 7 37 Allen Bradley address P 4 Append Message tool 7 2 B 3
125. al Publication 2706 816 for details e The MessageView terminal must have its RS 232 port set to MessageBuilder communication parameters See Page 5 3 for an example of how to switch settings To download the computer s real time clock to a terminal Note An application file does not have to be open when this command is used 1 Choose RTC Download from the Application menu to open the Download Date amp Time dialog Publication 2706 817 11 10 Validating Applications and Transferring Files Uploading an Application from a Terminal Publication 2706 817 2 3 Download Date amp Time Destination Operator Terminal Appears only if DF1 INTERCHANGE driver installed Communication Drivers Currently loaded drivers DF1 lt _ _______ _ _ Shows drivers currently loaded Under Destination verify that Operator Terminal is selected This is the only option available Select OK The terminal remains in run mode Its real time clock is updated in the background When the download is complete you are returned to the Message Editor Table View Note Error messages may appear during this download See Appendix E for a list of error messages and how to correct the problems The application may be uploaded from the terminal if it needs to be revised The upload saves the application to both an MVA file and an MBA file Open the MBA file in MessageBuilder for editing 10
126. al and Communication Setup 10 21 Defining Control Tags The terminal uses control tags to specify addresses for global attributes 1 Select the Control Tags tab from the Terminal Setup dialog iae ebe Teebas Com Tage GaTe ai pHs Tag Exe Tan Yate Taggar Feie Tie E El Ba Trager E 2 Assign tags as needed 3 Select the OK button to save all the settings from the Terminal Setup dialog and return to the main Message Editor Table View Or select another tab and continue setting up the terminal for the application Or select the Cancel button to return to the Message Editor Table View without saving any Terminal Setup settings Note If the Return Message Number attribute is enabled in the Advanced tab then one or more of the three Return Number tags in this tab must be defined Message Tags The Value Trigger tag address contains the message number of the most recently triggered message The terminal scans the integer value and displays or queues the message that has that message number This tag is required if the Message Queue was enabled in the Advanced tab dialog The only valid data type for this tag is unsigned integer Note In an ASCII Trigger application only a tag name is required for the value trigger Node name and address may be left blank See Page 5 8 for the Ctrl T command used to trigger a message Publication 2706 817 10 22 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2706 817 Th
127. alid Tag Message Return Number Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer Publication 2706 817 Validation Error Messages Meaning The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type ag is undefined in the project database The assigned tag is the wrong data type Tag is undefined in the project database The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type The tag is controlled by the PLC and is read by the Terminal The tag must be in the Output image or be in a BTW Block Transfer Write The tag is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack Tag is undefined in the project database The tag address is not in the discrete 1 0 image of the rack or in the block transfer s configured for the Terminal The Message Return Number tag in Terminal Setup Control Tags is the wrong data type What to do Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial Messages Write Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Function Keys dialog to select or add an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to define
128. alog asks for confirmation of the copy Select Yes to copy the project or No to cancel the copy The Existing Projects box now lists two copies of the same project under different names Managing Devices in Projects Application Tag Editor Project Management Validate Download Upload RTC Download HE Stack Upload Terminal Setup Special Messages Function Keys LED Indicators Preferences The New Device Name box is used when deleting copying or renaming devices Managing Projects 9 5 The Devices tab in the Project Management dialog lets you 80 e view Message View terminal devices and PLC SLC devices that are currently defined for a project e rename a device e make a copy of an existing device e delete a device ATTENTION Do not use the Devices tab of the Project Management dialog to create a new device Device parameters cannot be specified here Use other dialogs to add devices to a project Message View terminal devices are added to a project when an application is first created using the New Application dialog e Controller devices are added to a project using the Comms Setup button on the Terminal Setup dialog To manipulate devices 1 Choose Project Management from the Application menu to open the Project Management dialog Froject Management 2 Select the Devices tab if not selected The Devices tab lists all devices that are def
129. alog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial Messages Write Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to define the tag Use the tag editor to define the tag node name Use the tag editor to enter a different address for the tag or use the Terminal S etup Comms Setup Block Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block ransfer dialog to put the tag into a Block p er Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as R Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as W Use the tag editor to define the Node Name for this tag Use Half Text Size to display graphical symbols Publication 2706 817 D 12 Validation Error Messages Message Maximum allowable Embedded Entry Variables per message exceeded Message number Chain to message number cannot be 0 Message number number chained to invalid message number Message number number circular chain Message number number doesn t have a valid trigger source or isn t chained to from another mes
130. ame that matches the new terminal type from the list box Or highlight the entry in the box and type in a new name If you typed a new name select a Catalog number and firmware Version only the choices that fit the selected terminal type are displayed The Ports list box displays the ports available on the terminal you defined Select OK Special considerations Each application is designed for a certain type of Message View terminal If the selected terminal type and the application type do not match a dialog asks if the application should be changed a Sebectod traisg hpt dees eed etch ceed applicetion tpr Ceesert sppliceties te match the selected a cd izes Lue cence Select Yes to convert the application e Select No to keep the application as it is even though it may not pass validation e Select Cancel to keep the original terminal type Publication 2706 817 10 4 Terminal and Communication Setup Remote I O Communications Publication 2706 817 If messages in the application before conversion consisted of embedded Function keys or Entry variables and the new designated terminal type does not support these functions the conversion process will display an error dialog box MessageBuilder Application Cannot perform terminal conversion The following message s have function keys enabled Message s 1 The error dialog box reports the message numbers of any incompatibl
131. anbjontai Validate heen ned Upload ATC reilii HE Hack Upload Terminai Setup pris Meceeqee Publication 2706 817 MessageView 421F terminals have 16 Function keys on their keypad Function keys may be used in any application designed for a MessageView 421F terminal See the section starting on Page 4 20 for a discussion of Function keys Note Function keys are not embedded in the message The message enables one or more Function keys based on the Function key enable dialog Format menu and typically tells the terminal operator which keys to press The text description is developed by the application designer A message with Function keys enabled e cannot be displayed with another message that has Function keys enabled e may be displayed with a message that contains entry variables or with a message which requires acknowledgement Function key attributes When the application is designed make a list of the Function keys that will be used Set them all up before any messages are created and then enable them for specific messages as needed Important Function key attributes are global That is once a Function key s attributes are set they are the same every time that Function key is used in any message within the application If attributes are changed in one instance they are changed for all instances Select Function Keys in the Application menu to open the Function Keys dialog
132. appear in a menu bar under the title bar at the top of the Message Editor Table View Message The basic unit of a MessageBuilder Application It contains any or all of the following text embedded Variables Graphics and enabled Function Keys Each message has Attributes and a Value Trigger and it may also have a Bit Trigger It is edited in the Edit Box MessageBuilder Software A Microsoft Windows based program used to develop an Application that can run in a Message View terminal Message Editor The main window for Application design See also Table View Terminal View Message List Messages are entered in the Message List at the bottom of the Message Editor Table View as they are created They may be returned to the Edit Box for editing Messages in the Message List may be rearranged in a number of ways as needed MessageView Terminal An Allen Bradley Device which runs a MessageBuilder Application and controls a process The terminal provides an operator display interface to a Controller and often to other devices when the application is executing Terminals differ in their Keypad options and their Firmware Thus an Application must be designed for the capabilities of one type of terminal MFT Acronym for the MessageBuilder File Transfer Utility MVA Format See Application File N Node A point on a network to which a device can be connected The Message View terminal may be at a node on a Remote
133. ar Toggles the Tag Editor status bar on or off Sort Sorts tags by any field or fields Form Opens the Tag Form for the selected tag Summary Opens the Tag Editor Table View Publication 2706 817 A 10 Menus and Commands Summary Options Menu Tag Editor Options Duplication vy Address Validation Tools Menu Tag Editor List Editor Form Editor Import Export Window Menu Tag Editor Window New Refresh Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical Arrange Icons Close All v 1 newproject Summary Publication 2706 817 1 BCD Integer Filters the tags to display all tags with value data type Use commands on the Options menu to set Tag Editor options Duplication Sets the options for number of duplicates to be created with the Duplicate Several command on the Edit menu and sets the format for names of duplicated tags Address Validation Toggles address validation on and off Use commands on the Tools menu to import or export tags from a file in a different format List Editor Opens a new Tag Editor Table View Form Editor Opens the Tag Form for the selected tag Import Opens a dialog for importing tags from files in different formats Export Opens a dialog for exporting tags to files in different formats Use commands on the Window menu to arrange Tag Editor windows and icons to suit or to close all windows The bottom of the Window menu displays
134. arameters defined to communicate with a computer where MessageBuilder software resides for instance to upload the Historic Event Stack e The Auxiliary option configures the terminal to power up with an ASCII Triggering device or the communication device defined in the Aux tab dialog The terminal operator can use the Front Panel Editor to toggle this option Note This option may affect downloading an application if the MessageView terminal is configured to the Auxiliary Device when an attempt is made at communicating with a computer To correct this situation change the port configuration of the receiving MessageView terminal via the Front Panel Editor See the section on Page 5 3 that discusses switching RS 232 settings Handshake Timeout Handshaking is an option used to confirm that the information has been received by the controller whether a logic controller or an ASCII Triggering device If the terminal does not receive the handshake within a certain time a Timeout message appears on the display See the discussion on handshaking on Page 4 26 Set the Timeout time by selecting a value from the Handshake Timeout spin control The range is 0 to 60 seconds default is 4 seconds Terminal and Communication Setup 10 17 Trigger Priority Two or more messages may be triggered at the same time and contend for the same display line s See the section on triggering that starts on Page 4 9 e Ifthe messages are value triggere
135. ars and the toolbox on or off Click the menu name to toggle the command A check mark next to a command means the command is active Tool Bar Toggles the toolbar on or off Status Bar Toggles the status bar on or off Zoom Opens a dialog to enlarge or reduce the size of the Message Editor Terminal View Publication 2706 817 A 4 Menus and Commands Summary Format Menu Flash Inverse Video Time Display Date Display Numeric Variable Display ASCII Variable Display Numeric Variable Entry ASCII Variable Entry ASCII Control Char Graphic Edit Variable Enable Function Key Publication 2706 817 Use commands on the Format menu to change the appearance of message text and to enter display and entry variables Text Size gt Quarter Half Full Sets the size of the text in the message Align gt Left Center Toggles between centered and left justified Flash Toggles between flashing and non flashing for the highlighted text in the Edit Box Inverse Video Toggles between inverse video and normal text for the highlighted text in the Edit Box Time Display Enters a placeholder in the message that will display the current time in the Message View terminal Date Display Enters a placeholder in the message that will display the current date in the Message View terminal Numeric Variable Display Enters a placeholder in the message that w
136. assistance INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility New Ctrl N Open Ctrl 0 Workstation Setup Upgrade Terminal 1 C AB MBWIN ACTT4 MBA 2 CA AB MBWIN TEST MBA 3 BAACTT4 MBA 4 C AB MBWIN LINE1 MBA Exit Installing MessageBuilder Software 2 7 The INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility configures communication drivers that the computer will use to transfer applications It allows you to e view active communication drivers e select and configure a communication driver edit a communication driver e remove a communication driver e access advanced driver parameters This utility automatically updates the file CFG_KT INI when drivers are added configured and removed If you intend to transfer applications using an RS 232 DH 485 or Pass Through connection you must first configure the appropriate drivers Message View uses only RS 232 However other Allen Bradley products such as PanelView 900 might use other communication drivers Access the INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility in one of three ways e automatically as the final step in the MessageBuilder installation e as a separate icon in the MessageBuilder Group icon Note If Interchange was installed via another programming software such as AB PanelBuilder the Interchange icon will be found in that software s group MessageBuilder j Group Options Window Help 3 MessageBuilder MessageView File Trans
137. ation If the system uses Remote I O to transfer data the maximum number of bit triggers may be reduced RIO Method Rack Size gi al Triggers Discrete 1 0 ly 32 Discrete 1 0 1p 64 Discrete 1 0 3 4 96 Discrete 1 0 Full 128 Block Transfer Tq to Full 1024 Bit Trigger When the Bit Trigger attribute is enabled for a message its bit is also X Enable assigned Only one message may be assigned to a particular bit Bit address When a message is to be bit triggered the logic controller writes a 1 to a specific bit at the Bit Trigger tag address e When the logic controller resets the bit to 0 the corresponding message is not displayed e When the logic controller sets the bit to 1 the terminal displays the message if its assigned display line is available Important If its line is not available and the bit remains set 1 the terminal will display the message when the corresponding line becomes available If the bit is reset to 0 before the line is available the terminal will ignore the message e In order to trigger the same message again its corresponding bit must be changed to 0 and back to 1 Note Any message that has its HE Stack or slave attribute set is sent to the Historic Event Stack or the slave device when it is triggered The message does not have to be displayed Publication 2706 817 Planning an Application 4 13 Bit trigger priority Bit triggered messages are not queued as val
138. ation Files Creating Messages Publication 2706 817 WAGE ate 1 a Sides E ate te setae ex yo 4 31 Date NGS sy ona tind une ate AET AE 4 ox 4 33 Address Worksheet 0 cece eee eee eee nen eeeeees 4 35 DSH MING TAOS a c delta aaae demirine aiik aE aa aa E data degrades 4 36 Scaling Data Display Variables 0 0 cee eee ees 4 37 Scaling Data Entry Variables ci csccesiceaeewaceeeew ea eae 4 38 Precision and ROUNGING lt x s0ss Pacaveewwe awe wee sawed eves 4 41 Chapter 5 MessageView 421 Terminal Ports anaana 5 1 RS 232 Port Communication oaa 5 3 ASCII Triggering Commands naaa 5 8 Remote I O Communication s a aa 5 12 Discrete WO sir ipia tae a yaani puai a aa AER 5 15 Block TIQNSIGl sae ssevcedeeadeae peadtaaeteditareeoe evar 5 17 Chapter 6 Starting MessageBuilder cj avducesdves cee teeyaed ee eer 6 1 Creating aNewApplication ccc cece eee ees 6 2 Opening an Existing Application ccc cece eee ees 6 4 SAVING OMAP PICHHION ssi dancox dee saoies oeentes lt olaweads 6 6 Renaming and Describing an Application 04 6 8 ClOSiNG SR APDICCUON sat tudtucreemmedus dunia umeeeds 6 10 Exiting MessageBuilder oi acis cca tiatdag bees kee ee esas 6 10 Chapter 7 The Message EditorDialog ccc cece cece teens 7 1 Working with Messages cece cece eee teens 7 2 Selecting Messages cc eect eee ees 7 3 Editing Messages c2 ceekesedeturiuieustetie ee keus 4 e4 7 5 Set Preferences
139. attribute is enabled the Optional Control Byte is automatically embedded based on the text size selected in the message s Text Size attribute The Optional Control Byte may be placed in the message manually embedding it as the first character in the text portion of the message It overrides a Control Byte embedded by Auto Format Publication 2706 817 Creating Messages 7 43 Field 2 ASCII Text This field contains the ASCII characters and or special ASCII control characters that are to be displayed by or to control a slave device The ASCII text can include embedded variables graphics and control codes for Flash and Inverse Video It can have up to 100 characters The following codes may be embedded in the ASCII text Byte Decimal Value Definition Ctrl F 6 toggle between Flashing and non Flashing characters toggle between Inverse Video and non Inverse Ctrl l 9 Video characters Ctrl G 7 Embedded Graphic where the next byte is a graphic ISA symbol 1 to 32 If Auto Format is enabled Flash and Inverse Video control characters will be embedded automatically based on whether the attribute is enabled in the Message Edit box If the first or last byte of the ASCII Text field is a control character it will be interpreted as the Optional Control Byte or the Optional Display Mode Byte respectively Note An embedded Carriage Return control character decimal 13 is not allowed in the ASCII Text portion of t
140. can support these variables These variables allow the terminal operator to enter ASCII characters from an ASCII Input device via the RS 232 port or via the numeric keypad on the terminal Graphics Graphics consist of a set of 32 ISA symbols illustrating manufacturing components such as motors and containers a E Introducing MessageBuilder Configuration Software 1 7 Function Keys Message View 421F terminals can use applications that have Function keys enabled An enabled function key is assigned to one of these types A Momentary Function Key changes state when pressed and changes back to the original state when its hold time has expired after it is released A Maintained Function Key changes state when pressed and remains in the changed state when released It changes back to the original state when the Function Key is pressed and released again A Latched Function Key changes state when pressed and remains in that state until the controller unlatches it ATTENTION Function Keys are active only when they are enabled for a message currently displayed by the terminal All other Function Keys are non active Example Suppose a message has function keys F1 F5 and F9 enabled Whenever that message is displayed by the MessageView terminal these three keys are activated but the 13 other Function keys remain inactive When the message is terminated the three Function keys are inactivated at once Note A Latched Functi
141. cates tag names containing the sequence of characters The command is not case sensitive For example if you enter switch the Find command locates switch Switch SWITCH Switch_5 Limit_switch LimitSwitch etc 3 Select the appropriate button to move among the occurrences of the tag name Click To Move To the first occurrence in the current view the previous occurrence the next occurrence the last occurrence in the current view 4 When done select the Exit or Cancel button or press ESC on the keyboard Publication 2706 817 8 12 Working with Tags Sorting Tags Tool ber x Bishis ba Publication 2706 817 Tags may be sorted on any field or any number of fields in a user selected order When tags are rearranged in the table so that similar tags are together they may be edited more easily 1 Choose Sort from the View menu to open the Sort dialog Sort Column Sort Order Update Frequency 2 Specify which field s to sort by Double click on a field name in the Column box to add it to the Sort Order box e Or highlight a field and then select Add The Tag Editor moves the field name to the Sort Order box on the right You can specify any number of fields in your sort The default no fields in the Sort Order box is Sort by Tag Name 3 When all fields for this sort are entered select OK The Tag Editor sorts the tags and displays them in the Table View The fie
142. cation 2706 817 7 34 Creating Messages OE Text Size Half Flash layverse Wideo Line Times Dis polary Die Dia poly Humerlc Yarabe Dingliry ABC Variable Disp ery Hugetic Voriobic Entry AS Yoriabic Eetry Pera Cmimi ar Grapbir Ci Variable Ceable Dancin Bey Publication 2706 817 Message Use the Message spin control to assign a new number to the currently selected message This attribute does not change the position of the message in the list Important The message number is often used as a trigger If a message number is changed verify that another message does not chain to the old message number To change the order of messages in the list but not their numbers use the Sort command on the Edit menu See Page 7 11 Text Size and Line Number Select one of the available text sizes from the Text Size list box or from the Text Size menu that opens from the Format menu Options are Quarter Half and Full Select an option from the Line list box Options are 1 2 3 4 All and Any Default is Quarter Display mode and Line 1 This table gives the available options depending on which text size is selected If a message is assigned to a line too close to the bottom of the display for its size the error will be caught when the application is validated Text Size Occupies Characters Starting Line Quarter 1 display line 21 1 2 3 4 All Any Half 2 display lines 10 1 2 3 Al
143. ce Tag Node Name must match the Logic Controller selected in Terminal Setup Comms Setup nvalid Tag tag description Tag name overlaps Discrete 1 0 Rack Control Status byte Invalid Tag tag description Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels Invalid Tag tag description Tag name must be of type Input or BTR nvalid Tag tag description Tag name must be of type Output or BTW references no device Tag Node Name must match the Logic Controller selected in Terminal Setup Comms Setup nvalid Text Size attribute assignment for message with Embedded Graphics nvalid Tag Bit Trigger Tag not defined nvalid Tag tag description Tag name Validation Error Messages The tag address is notin the discrete 1 0 image of the rack or in the block transfer s configured for the Terminal The tag is controlled by the PLC and is read by the Terminal The tag must be in the Output image or be in a BTW Block Transfer Write The assigned tag is the wrong data type The tag is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack Tag is undefined in the project database The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type Tag is undefined in the project database The tag node name is not assigned The tag is assigned the same address as
144. choose Save from the File menu MessageBuilder replaces the previous version of the application on disk with the new version To save a new or existing application with a new name ETE 1 Choose Save As from the File menu to open the Save As dialog Coiled File Save As File Name Directories c ab mbwin actt4_mba c ab mbwin cin Warostation Saip Upgrwde ermina 1 TESTA 2 AETA MAA J BCT MEA 4 LIKE MEA Save File as Type Drives MessageBuilder Files c Publication 2706 817 Working with Application Files 6 7 The first time an application is saved its default name is the first 8 letters of the application name 2 Accept the default or enter another name 1 to 8 characters long in the File Name box MessageBuilder automatically adds the MBA filename extension to the name Note You may save the file with another file type filename extension However do not use MVA which is used for the translated form that runs on a Message View terminal 3 Ifa file has already been saved to the name entered in the File Name box this dialog appears ahaa This ie already enkats Replace exletiag Mey Select Yes to overwrite the file and No to return to the File Save As dialog 4 To save the file to a different directory select the directory name in the Directories box To save it to another drive select a drive name in the Drives box 5 Select the OK b
145. ck box in front of each Function key the current message will use 3 Select OK to return to the Message Editor Table View The text of the message typically tells the operator what to do with each enabled function key For instance F1 Start Conveyor F4 Enable Paint Sprayer Using jog mode in messages with Function keys enabled Jog mode is discussed in detail on Page 4 21 Example 1 When Auto Clear is enabled the message is terminated as soon as a Function key is pressed and if a Momentary Function key its Hold Time is expired To enable Jog mode disable the Auto Clear attribute for the message The message then remains active on the display until e the the terminal operator presses the 0 and keys on the terminal at the same time e the controller triggers Special Message 9901 Clear Display e the terminal is reset Publication 2706 817 7 52 Creating Messages LED Attributes Publication 2706 817 Example 2 A Maintained Function Key that has been pressed only once remains in the changed state after the message is terminated It may be returned to its original state in either of two ways e Enable jog mode by disabling the Auto Clear attribute The message tells the operator to press and release the Function key twice e Chain or trigger another message that has the same Function key enabled The second message tells the operator to press the Function key again The LED located beside the Function ke
146. ck box to include ISA graphics embedded in messages in the report To clear this option select the box again From the Topics list box specify whether you want to include messages assigned to a specific topic or all messages The default is All Press this button To Print Send report to a printer or file Select Cancel at any time to abort printing of the report Cancel Exit dialog without printing the report Report Setup Change page headers and title page of the report Print Setup Define printer settings for the report P review Preview how the report will look Save Settings Save current report settings as the default Otherwise the dialog reverts to the original settings when closed Changing the Report Setup Creating Reports 12 3 Specify the page headers and the title page of a report To change the page headers and title page 1 Select the Report Setup button from the Report Setup dialog to open another Report Setup dialog Report Setup Page Number User Defined Text e Title Page Application Name l Time l Date User Defined Text m 2 By default all options are selected If some are not needed select the appropriate check boxes in each area To enable an option select the box again Select To Print Application Name The name of the application Time Time of printout in 24 hour format Hour Minute S eco
147. ck transfer requires a corresponding Block Transfer Write or Block Transfer Read instruction in the ladder program for the controller The Data File and Length settings must match the Data File and Length settings in the Block Transfer dialog BTR or BTW MessageView Rack Assignment BLOCK TRANSFER READ WRITE a Group No 0 7 Rack 03 Group eer High or Low Byte Always 0 for MessageView a Block Nae a File that controls how the instruction works Data File N37 1 Address of the data file which is written or read Length 4 Must match the address entered in the Block Continuous N Transfer dialog Length of the data being transferred Must match the length entered in the Block Transfer dialog Operating mode of the transfer Publication 2706 817 5 20 Communications Overview The operator enters 30 as the motor speed in the Numeric Variable Entry Entry variable with Tag Name Motor Speed to Address N7 2 The MessageView terminal places the data in the first word of a 4 word block Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4 30 The value 30 entered on the MessageView terminal display is now stored at N7 2 sai satel Publication 2706 817 Helpful Hints for Block Transfers Keep these suggestions in mind when using blo
148. ck transfers Read and Write Blocks can use the same address e Read and Write Blocks may overlap partially or completely e Since Remote I O scanners usually make only one block transfer in one I O scan improve response times by compacting the data into the fewest possible blocks no unused bits if the Function Key Return Message Number global attribute is enabled make sure that the tags for function keys are in the same block as the Function Key Return Message Number tag Example Block Transfer Read In this example the MessageView 421 terminal is assigned to rack 3 and its starting module group is 0 A Numeric Variable Entry variable has the address N7 2 and its value is read by the logic controller in a part of the data block being transferred Using information supplied by the Communication Setup utility the MessageView determines the position of the data and the block size mi F ruraa n E kE kE F ia The PLC reads the 4 word block of data and stores it at the Data File address BTR BLOCK TRANSFER READ Rack 03 Group Module Control Block Data File N Length Continuous EN Read From MessageView lt Data To PLC Communications Overview 5 21 Example Block Transfer Write In this example the Message View 421 terminal is assigned to rack 3 and its starting module group is 0 A Numeric Variable Display variable has the address N7 0 and its value is w
149. click the MessageView File Transfer Utility icon in the MessageBuilder program group to open the utility workspace e Or select WINMFT EXE in the Windows File Manager Meancepe ies Me Tranrier Lii Wris gt ae E Publication 2706 817 11 16 Validating Applications and Transferring Files Application Upload Download Application Application Verify HE Stack Upload RTC Download Exit Publication 2706 817 In the Message View File Transfer Utility applications and data may be downloaded uploaded either from the Toolbar or from the File menu Click or Choose Application Upload To Upload an application from a MessageView terminal to an MVA file The MVA file can be opened as an MBA file in MessageBuilder for editing Application Download Download an MVA file to a MessageView terminal To create an MVA file download the application to a DOS file See Page 11 8 Application Verify Compare the application in the terminal with the application to be downloaded to determine if they are the same or different HE Stack Upload Upload the Historical Event Stack from a MessageView terminal RTC Download Download the date and time from the computer to the MessageView terminal s Real Time Clock Exit Exit the MessageView File Transfer Utility Note All Download and Upload dialogs are identical to the dialogs accessed from th
150. continues Cannot locate tag tag name Internal error Check tag information Contact A B technical Support if error continues Cannot parse address for tag tag name Internal error Check tag information Contact A B technical Support if error continues Cannot perform terminal conversion The following message s have function keys enabled Message s number number Cannot perform terminal conversion The following message s have Numeric Variable Entry fields Message s number number Cannot perform terminal conversion The following message s have ASCII Variable Entry fields Message s number number The application is being converted to a Terminal that does not have Function Keys One or more messages has Function Keys Enabled Attempting to convert an application from a 421N or 421F terminal to a 421D terminal Attempting to convert an application from a terminal with a daughterboard to one without a daughterboard Remove all the messages that have Function Keys enabled from the Application Remove Numeric Entry variables from all messages listed Remove ASCII Entry variables from all messages listed Publication 2706 817 Cc 2 Configuration Software Error and Warning Messages Message Meaning What to do oi Failed to send a text string This may be a Check the Print Setup settings Print S pooler Cannot print line i i printer
151. d RSIIC BIN directories In Windows 3 1x the AUTOEXEC BAT file also includes SHARE EXE If you edit this file yourself MessageBuilder software requires these modifications If the computer has Windows for Workgroups installed it has a virtual device driver VxD called VSHARE 386 If Windows for Workgroups uses this share driver remove the SHARE EXE file from the AUTOEXEC BAT file The Windows for Workgroups manual has details on using VSHARE 386 Note Windows 95 does not need the SHARE EXE file It has its own virtual device driver installed Possible difficulties with INTERCHANGE drivers The INTERCHANGE drivers may cause conflicts with other drivers sharing common interrupts or memory areas in the system Here are some problems that may occur and what to do about them If you are using a special Windows video driver try using the standard Windows VGA driver you may also have to edit the EMM386 line in the CONFIG SYS file to remove specific memory exclusions added by the special video driver Exit Windows and run ABICSTOP see below If ABICSTOP is not successful comment out the ABICRUN line in the AUTOEXEC BAT file and reboot then run ABICSTOP again If you are experiencing lockups when using a serial mouse in a DOS application try waiting several seconds for the mouse to initialize If mouse operation is still a problem run ABICSTOP It may be necessary to create a dual boot environment to manage conflicting drivers Re
152. d priority is determined by which Message Number is entered into the Value Trigger address first e Ifthe messages are bit triggered priority is determined by the lowest set bit in the Bit Trigger tag If one message is value triggered and one is bit triggered priority is determined by this option the Trigger Priority global attribute if Bit is selected the message with a bit trigger is displayed and the one with the value trigger is queued if the Message Queue is enabled if Value is selected the message with a value trigger is displayed and the one with the bit trigger waits If the bit is still set when the value triggered message is terminated its message is displayed Note Bit triggering cannot be used by an ASCII Triggering device so this option must be set to value trigger Startup Message Enable this option if a certain message should be displayed whenever the terminal powers up e Select the message number in the spin control e Or highlight the current number and type the selected number Background Message Enable this option if a certain message is to be displayed after 2 seconds in which no active message is displayed e Select the message number in the spin control e Or highlight the current number and type the selected number Note ASCII Triggering applications do not support Startup or Background Messages with embedded display variables The terminal operator can use the Front Panel Edi
153. d the Message View Tag Editor same r 7 Project Management terminal verifies the application before running it 103 Description Validate In validating each message each tag and the application as a whole TA is checked See Appendix D for a list of Exceptions messages Upload me Download HE Stack Upload The Preferences dialog may be set up to validate each message as it Terminal Setup is created See Page 7 13 Or the application designer may validate Special Messages Eunction Keys LED Indicators the entire application at any time Er terentes To validate an application Choose Validate from the Application menu e Ifthe application passes validation the following dialog opens MessageBuilder Application D Application Validated OK e Ifthe application does not pass validation the Exceptions dialog opens with a list of all errors found Correct the errors and then validate again Tar iraid Tag Yaha ligga Tag Waie liigaga T ag The Emor Prreaiied Tag Mig Embodied Esby Snia Tag Peta Sends validation messages to a printer or file Defines printer settings winre Dirite Tle anienge lois While correcting errors select the Exceptions command in the Window menu to access the Exceptions dialog Press To Terral ire close the dialog send validation messages to a printer or file define printer settings Publica
154. d Width spin control specifies the maximum number of characters 0 to 9 and that can be entered in the variable Default is 12 To change the field width select or enter a value in the spin control Decimal Point A logic controller can store only integer values If the entered value is a decimal it will be rounded by the logic controller However if the value is scaled it may be entered as a decimal but stored as an integer See the section on entry scaling beginning on Page 4 38 The Decimal Point area specifies whether the decimal point is fixed formatted or keypad controlled e Select Fixed to position the decimal point 0 to 4 places to the left of the rightmost character As the terminal operator enters the value the numbers are shifted to the left around the decimal point Select or enter a value in the Position spin control The decimal position must be less than the field width For This Position 6 6 5 6 55 6 553 6 5535 Select AJl wl Nnjej o Data Tags Write Tag CTA Notification Tag Handshake Tag B B B Creating Messages 7 29 e Select Keypad Controlled to allow the operator to enter the decimal point using the keypad Tags The Write Tag list box specifies the name of the tag address to which the terminal will write the entered data Select a tag from the Write Tag list box or enter a new tag name Valid data types for the write tag are
155. d application file Select the Setup button to specify which port to use if more than one of the computer s COM ports is configured with a DF1 driver The DF1 Setup dialog lists the available INTERCHANGE ports Select the appropriate port and close the dialog Select OK The upload begins MessageBuilder software displays the progress of the upload TL ima i ay Warisan hie Temes Di Loree Tapage d Thi TE Aias Mi miep omar ins AB ih ereere Cat ma pa L F Te ee ranam Tarmin eel Publication 2706 817 11 12 Validating Applications and Transferring Files 6 A dialog opens asking for the name of the MBA file in which to save the uploaded application The default file name is that of the uploaded application Enter a file name and path then select OK fed pepe WA cE miaa E l If the MBA file already exists a dialog asks if the file should be overwritten 7 A dialog verifies that the application file was saved to the specified MBA file Select OK to return to the MessageBuilder workspace E Created application ie C AB MBWIN SMP SD MBA Note Error messages may appear during this upload See Appendix E for a list of error messages and how to correct the problems Publication 2706 817 Uploading the Historical Event Stack Application Tag Editor Project Management Validate Download Upload RTC Download HE Stack Upload Terminal Setup Special Mess
156. d as often as needed in the application Graphic One of 32 standard ISA Bitmaps representing motors valves and other objects used in manufacture Greyed A command that is unavailable or disabled at the moment is represented by a greyed icon menu item or button For instance most of the commands on the Format menu can be used only when the cursor point is in the Edit Box When it is elsewhere in MessageBuilder these commands are greyed out H Handshake Acknowledgement that data has been received by another device such as a Logic Controller HE Stack Acronym for the Historical Event Stack A file in the Message View terminal in which messages are logged as they are Triggered with a time date stamp It may be viewed by the terminal operator or uploaded into a computer for analysis Publication 2706 817 G 6 Glossary Publication 2706 817 I Import The process of changing Tags automatically from a different format into MessageBuilder format Inverse Video A Message or part of a message that is emphasized by having its colors reversed in the MessageView terminal display ISA Acronym for Instrumentation Society of America MessageBuilder software includes a set of standard ISA Bitmap Graphic symbols that can be embedded in a message J Jog Feature One aspect of the Auto Clear attribute When Auto Clear is disabled for a Message that has embedded Function Keys jog feature is enabled If
157. d dialogs apply to all tabs OK saves parameters on all tabs Cancel does not save any parameter Terminal Port dialogs MessageBuilder software has two dialogs where communication parameters for a terminal port may be set up Terminal Ports Where they are configured Remote I O in the dialog accessed by the Remote I O and RS 232 Comms Setup button See Page 10 4 Catalog Nos 2706 M1D1 M1N1 M1F1 RS 232 in the Aux Port tab See Page 10 9 RS 232 only RS 232 in the dialog accessed by the Catalog Nos 2706 M1D M1N M1F Comms Setup button See Page 10 27 The Comms Setup button dialog is used to configure the communications between the Message View terminal and the controlling device This configuration is commonly called Controlling Communications The Aux Port tab dialog is used to configure the communications between the Message View terminal and an input or output device that is not a controlling device This configuration is commonly called Auxiliary Device Communication Changing the Terminal Type Terminal and Communication Setup 10 3 To change the type of MessageView terminal assigned to an existing application 1 Choose Terminal Setup from the Application menu The Setup Tab shows the information that was associated with the terminal name when the application was first created Change the Terminal Type to the type of terminal that the application will be designed for Select an existing Terminal N
158. d directory for installing files Recommended drive and directory is C AB The files are copied to the target directory 8 Re insert MessageBuilder software disk to continue installing the MessageBuilder software 9 10 11 12 13 14 Installing MessageBuilder Software 2 3 You are prompted to begin the MessageBuilder installation The installation software checks your system for MessageBuilder software If it detects a previous version of MessageBuilder software it warns you that the previous version will be deleted before the new version is installed If it detects the same version of MessageBuilder software it gives you the option of re installing or deleting the files Re install writes over existing files Delete removes the files you must then run the installation again to install the new software Enter registration information name company name and product serial number The serial number is on your registration card Enter target drive and directory for installing files Recommended drive and directory is C AB The files are copied to the target directory Insert MessageBuilder disk 2 to install the remaining files You are prompted to install the INTERCHANGE software Enter target drive and directory for installing files Recommended drive and directory is C RSIMIC The files are copied to the target directory e Ifthe installation detects a previous version of INTERCHANGE
159. d for a particular type of terminal The Terminal View shows the front face of that terminal type eqcflmilder SMP BAPE hoc EL File Edn View great Sealant Help F PELi E paa E LE E Tepic Hacip loa Winder Cascade Tile firemge inne New Windew Exceptions Tabte Yima Tenmnlinel Wen L SMP Prej SMP DEMO MEA 2 SMP Ponj SMPDEMG MIA E Iosibar A itra Boe Creating Messages 7 17 The Terminal View displays the active highlighted message If the Terminal View is the active window when a message is being edited in the Message Edit box the changes appear in the Terminal View display An active window has its Title Bar highlighted e Text appears as entered in its correct display mode size e Variables are represented by placeholders see the table on Page 7 18 e Graphics appear as they will appear on the terminal display e Scrolling is not supported in the Terminal View but Flash and Inverse Video appear as they will on the terminal display Note If the message is longer than the Terminal View can display scroll through the message in the Message Edit box to see the remainder of the message When the Terminal View is the active window its display will follow the insertion point in the Message Edit box That is it will scroll through the message up to the cursor point To return to the Message Editor Table View select e The Table View tool e The Table View command in the Window menu
160. d on disk Save As Saves a copy of the application file with all its changes under a new name The original file remains intact Reports Opens a dialog to generate a customized report for an application using the default or user defined format Reports can be printed or saved to a file Workstation Setup Accesses the INTERCHANGE Configuration Utility to configure serial communications required for transferring files to and from a Message View 421 terminal Upgrade Terminal Opens a dialog to load updated firmware in a Message View terminal 1 XXX MBA The four applications opened most recently are listed here for convenient access 1 is the most recent or current application Publication 2706 817 A 2 Menus and Commands Summary Edit Menu Ctrl Z Ctri Y Ctrl4 xX Copy Ctrl C Ctrl Delete Message AlttDelete Insert Message New Message Find Ctrl F Replace Ctri H Sor Renumber Topics Publication 2706 817 Exit Quits MessageBuilder and returns to the Windows desktop If an application is open a dialog asks if it should be saved first Use commands on the Edit menu to manage messages and their attributes Undo Reverses the most recent edit operation cut copy paste delete Redo Reverses the previous Undo operation s Cut Removes a selected text string from the Message Edit box or removes a selected message from the application
161. d to a MessageView terminal A MessageView terminal is itself a device DF1 An Allen Bradley communications protocol used to transfer an application or other data between a computer and a MessageView terminal s RS 232 port Dialog A window that opens to request information Dialogs have options you must choose before MessageBuilder software can carry out a command Direct I O One of the two methods of data transfer used by a Remote I O port on a MessageView terminal See also Block Transfer Double Click Press and release the left mouse button twice quickly without moving the mouse Drag Highlight text by pressing and holding down the left mouse button while moving the mouse Download The process of transferring data from a computer to a Message View terminal or storing an application as a DOS file Specific download commands load an Application in the terminal change the date or time in the RTC or update Firmware Driver A personal computer s ports are configured by a set of communication parameters collectively called a driver installed by INTERCHANGE software A Message View terminal s Ports are configured as part of its application E Edit Box The place where the active Message highlighted in the Message List is edited Only one message is edited at a time The message in the Edit Box may have its text entered and edited its Attributes assigned Variables and Graphics embedded and in
162. data from the terminal to the controller e display variables are BTW block transfer write data from the controller to the terminal Communications Overview 5 13 Module groups The MessageView 421 I O can occupy 4 1 2 3 4 or a Full rack Each 4 rack contains two module groups 32 input and 32 output bits An entire rack contains 8 module groups that are numbered from 0 to 7 Rack MessageView 1 0 a a a Four 1 4 Rack Sizes 1 4 1 4 174 174 IIFA Input O 1 1213 14 5 16 7 Eight Input Output Module Groups Output 0 1 1213 1415 1617 A N A 4 SF SF SF Each input or output module group has 16 bits If a MessageView terminal does not occupy a full rack another terminal or device can be configured for the unused modules For example Parameter MessageView 421 Other Rack Device Rack Number 1 1 Starting Module Group 0 6 Rack Size 3 4 My Last Chassis No Yes Important Two I O systems can not share the same module The maximum rack number that can be assigned to the terminal depends on the type of logic controller Publication 2706 817 5 14 Communications Overview Publication 2706 817 Controller Types The Remote I O port can communicate with any of the PLC or SLC controller scanner types listed below Supports Controller Scanner Type Lowest Rack Highest Rack Block
163. device The three classes of messages may have Return Number tags e messages with the Ack attribute enabled e messages with Function Keys enabled messages of all other kinds Note If the Return Message Number to PLC attribute is enabled then one or more of the three Return Number tags in the Control Tags tab must be defined See Page 10 21 If the controller is an ASCII Triggering device the Return Message Number is sent back as part of the Ctrl N message See Page 5 12 Terminal and Communication Setup 10 13 ATTENTION When this global attribute is selected be certain that if block transfer is used The Acknowledge bit tag is assigned to the same block as the Return Message Number tag Function Key write tags are assigned to the same block as the Return Message Number tag The Function key Return Message Number is sent to the controller twice e when the message is displayed e when the Function key is pressed and released If the controlling device is an ASCII Triggering device the Function key Return Message Number is sent back as part of the Ctrl F command See Page 5 11 The Acknowledge Return Message Number is sent to the controller twice e when the message is displayed when the ACK key is pressed and released If the controlling device is an ASCII Triggering device the Acknowledge Return Message Number is sent back as part of the Ctrl K command See Page 5 11 If the Return Message Number option
164. ds to the ASCII Triggering device To enter these global status tags e select the name of a tag from the list box or e type anew tag name and select the Edit Tag button to define the tag To edit a Status Tag attributes 1 Put the insertion pointer in the tag box 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog Tag Form SMP Proj Tag Name Data Type Description Node Name Tag Initial Value sLc 5 04 el fo Tag Address Update Frequency 0 6 1 1 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section starting on Page 8 2 4 Select OK Note In an ASCII Trigger application only a tag name is required for HE Stack tags Node name and address may be left blank Auxiliary Port Setup Terminal and Communication Setup 10 27 A terminal with a daughterboard Catalog Nos 2706 M1D1 M1N1 or M1F1 has both a Remote I O RIO port and an RS 232 port The RS 232 port may be configured to communicate with other devices using the Aux Port tab For a terminal without a RIO port see Page 10 9 For details on RS 232 port configuration see the section starting on Page 5 3 While the application is running a terminal with a daughterboard and the appropriate firmware can communicate with a logic controller and with either e an ASCII Input device see a list on Page 5 6 e one or more slave devices as a slaving master device Slave devices are listed on Page 5 6 To configure the RS 232 Auxiliar
165. dth For This Position 97 97 2 97 27 97 276 97 2767 Select il wlrno r o e Select Floating Point to have the terminal position the decimal Read Tag el Creating Messages 7 25 Read Tag The Read Tag specifies the name of the tag address from which the terminal will read the display data Select a tag from the Read Tag list box or type in a new Read Tag name Valid data types for the read tag are unsigned signed integer or BCD Note It is easier to create an application if all its tags are entered in the Tag Editor before you start to write messages If a new Read Tag name is used its parameters must be edited when it is assigned If the variable will be scaled needs different data limits or has a new Read Tag assigned 1 Put the insertion pointer in the Read Tag box 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog far F kma Hamr Tam air hae com a m To a Cosa Hem ints i j h SS Cory 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section starting on Page 8 2 4 Select OK Slave devices Slave devices support the display of Numeric Display variables in messages They are updated while the slave message is actively displayed ASCII Triggering devices Tag Node Name and Address attributes are ignored by an ASCII Triggering device They may be omitted when creating applications for use with such a device Publication 2706 817 7 26 Creating
166. e Specific Printer list box If it is not listed see below Set appropriate attributes for the printer Select the Options button to fine tune the printer The Options dialog is different for each type of printer When done select the OK button Select the Print button from the Reports Setup dialog to print the report Select Close to return to the Message Editor Table View If the printer connected to the computer is not listed 1 Check for hardware compatibility between the printer and one of the printers listed Check if your printer has an emulation mode that is compatible with one of the printers listed It may be necessary to install a printer driver for your printer Refer to the Windows User s Guide Sending a Report to a File Creating Reports 12 7 To send a report to a file is is necessary to e add the Generic Text Only printer to the Installed Printers list e connect the printer to a FILE port For details on how to add Generic Text Only on FILE to the Installed Printers list on your computer see the Microsoft Windows User s Guide This printer driver allows you to print text but not graphics To send a report to a file 1 Select the Printer Setup button in the Report Setup dialog to open the standard Windows Print Setup dialog Printer C Default Printer currently HP DeskJet 560C Printer on oi_100 tech3 LPT1 Specific Printer Generic Text O
167. e valid Ack Time attribute with Ack attribute Ack Time is enabled for a message that is not Resolve the conflicting attributes Disable the ssignment Ack enabled Ack Time attribute for a non Ack message valid Ack Time attabute with Hidden l Resolve the conflicting attributes Disable the i Hidden messages can not be acknowledged Ack Time or Hidden Message attribute for essage attribute assignment message Resolve the conflicting attributes Disable the Hidden or Slave message attribute or change the Line message attribute nvalid Auto Clear attribute with Wait Time TENE Disable selection of the Auto Clear attribute or i The message is invisible aia ero and Scroll attribute not assigned increase the Wait Time valid Block Transfer Table Block number The enabled block transfer block musthave a Use the Communication Setup Block Transfer as an invalid direction direction dialog to define the direction valid Block Transfer Table Block number Use the Communication Setup Block Transfer as an invalid length dialog to define the proper length valid center attribute with HE stack and Resolve the conflicting attributes Disable the idden attributes and no slave enabled Center Message attribute for messages that ttribute are only Historical Event Stacked valid embedded ASCII char without slave Embedded ASCII characters are defined ina Select Slave Enable attribute or delete the The Message Queue option was selected b
168. e and also with MessageBuilder programming software the terminal must be set to the correct port configuration before proper communications can be established See the discussion on Page 5 3 Publication 2706 817 10 12 Terminal and Communication Setup Setting Advanced Terminal Options Publication 2706 817 The Advanced tab in the Terminal Setup dialog allows the application designer to define a variety of global configuration parameters for the Message View terminal To set or modify advanced terminal options 1 Select the Advanced tab from the Terminal Setup dialog Terminal Seto eater ai i Eam diei Tents Conte Tan Bastan tes Per D Gites Hester ambes to AC harb Maia eca Lorgeeee H Fenai eag Jame H rekih J F iaria at Pai B Fp ihg T manaii E hobes Term Poe Ba Vien F Enas mo 2 Modify the settings as needed 3 Select the OK button to save all the settings from the Terminal Setup dialog and return to the main Message Editor Table View e Or select another tab and continue setting up the terminal for the application e Or select the Cancel button to return to the Message Editor Table View without saving any Terminal Setup settings Return Message Number to PLC If this option is enabled the message number of the displayed message is sent to the controller provided its global Return Message Number tag is defined The controller may be a logic controller or an ASCII Triggering
169. e If the controller scanner does not support block transfer the Block Transfer button is dimmed and inactive t ik a a A Ak oN sa hnn nanna II ell lellal el a Echelle ell all Paas Temagi flock Tosnsim Timem I Publication 2706 817 10 8 Terminal and Communication Setup 2 Enter the parameters for each block transfer to be used Use To Enabled Enable or disable the block transfer Address Specify the starting address of the block transfer in a native SLC or PLC Remote 1 0 link Mode Select Read or Write Select the number of words 1 to 64 required by the Length block transfer A length of 63 is reserved for Pass Through 3 Select OK to return to the Communication Setup dialog Note Pass Through Enable and Block Transfer Timeout are future enhancements Ignore them in this dialog Example In this example two block transfer assignments are specified Enabled Herir sa ws a mA lr reo E E O a E G a OU gt E rs l a Hm i a aa P Bari Thagh Block TrerufeTisecst AE pecos ATTENTION When block transfer is used be certain that if the Return Message Number global attribute is selected The Acknowledge bit tag is assigned to the same block as the Acknowledge Return Message Number tag Function Key write tags are assigned to the same block as the Function Key Return Message Number tag Publication 2706 817 RS 232 Main Port C
170. e LED follows the state of the associated Function key LED1 with F1 LED 16 with F16 For example LED4 will light when Function key F4 is pressed LED4 remains lit as long as the Function key is in the On state and the message displayed remains active When the LED has an Indicator tag assigned to it the LED operates independently of the associated Function key For example pressing and releasing Function key F1 will have no effect on the operation of LED1 The controller program turns the LED On and Off by setting or clearing the bit at the Indicator tag address Thus the logic controller can indicate a process status to the operator without displaying a message No Indicator Tag Indicator Tag INITIAL INITIAL STATE STATE D D 6 a M a am iE T 8 Ei amp k ej Step Description Step Description Function Key pressed Bitsetto 1 in F key Write Tag address Bitat Indicator Tag address set by logic controller LED changes state based on bit read from Indicator Tag address Function Key pressed Bitsetto 1 in F key Write Tag address LED changes state based on bit read from Write Tag address 88 Publication 2706 817 4 26 Planning an Application Handshaking Publication 2706 817 An ASCII Triggering device sends the Ctrl L command to control a tagged LED Ctrl L LED LED State
171. e percentage complete Working with Tags 8 19 When the Import function has finished importing the tags the Summary Report dialog opens Summary Report mii View Report Tags Processed 104 Save Report Errors 0 e Select View Report to check it over e Select Save Report to save it to a file A report must be saved before it can be printed e Select OK to return to the Tag Editor Table View To handle data collisions If two or more tags have the same name this dialog opens Important The Import function does not check for duplicate addresses only duplicate names Tag Name Conflict Q There are tags in the import file with names that are already in the project database Do you want to Click The Import utility will Ignore conflicting tags The tags in the project remain and the conflicting ones in the Import source file are discarded Rename conflicting tags The Import function adds an extension to duplicate tags _ where is 1 2 or 3 After three tags of the same name are renamed any more imported tags of that name are discarded Update the tags in the project with the data from the ees imported tags Exit the Import E xport utility and return to the Tag Editor Publication 2706 817 8 20 Working with Tags Publication 2706 817 Exporting tags 1 Choose Export from the Tools menu to open the Export Tags dialog Select an output format A
172. e Application menu in MessageBuilder software The only dialog that is different is the Application Verify dialog Error messages Error messages may appear while the File Transfer Utility is downloading or uploading files See Appendix E for a list of error messages and how to correct the problems fgplicatan Uninc Drenk d Application hpplitakain Were HE Stack pinsi KTC Deewnlomd Validating Applications and Transferring Files 11 17 Verifying an Application when using the File Transfer Utility Use the Verify command to compare an application with the application loaded in a specific terminal You might want to download an application only if it is different from the one installed The verification process checks whether the applications match Note This Verify command is different from the Validate command which is part of the Application Download from MessageBuilder software See the Glossary To verify an application 1 Click the Verify tool Or choose Application Verify from the File menu Application Verify Source ox perator Terminal a oHm Appears only if DF1 INTERCHANGE driver installed Communication Drivers j Currently loaded drivers DF1 lt _ ___ Shows drivers currently loaded File Name C AB MBWIN SMP SD MVA 2 Under Source Operator Terminal is the only option available 3 In the File Name box enter the name of a
173. e Bit Trigger tag is the base address for a table that contains up to 1024 bits 64 words Specific messages are assigned one bit as their bit trigger The terminal scans the bit table and triggers the message whose bit corresponds to the lowest set bit in the table This tag is required if at least one message in the application has a bit trigger assigned and enabled The only valid data type for this tag is unsigned integer Note An ASCII Triggering device does not support bit triggers The Return Number tag is the address where the terminal writes the message number of the most recent active message on the display provided e the message has no function keys enabled and e Acknowledge is not enabled and e the Return Message Number attribute is enabled in the Advanced tab dialog The only valid data type for this tag is unsigned integer Note If the controller is an ASCII Triggering device the Return Message Number is sent back as part of the Ctrl N message See Page 5 12 To enter these global Message Tags e select the name of a tag from the list box or e type a new tag name and select the Edit Tag button to define the tag To edit the Message Tag attributes 1 Put the insertion pointer in the tag box 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog Terminal and Communication Setup 10 23 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section starting on Page 8 2 4 Select OK Note In an ASCII
174. e Terminal ACTT LBA 2 ESCM 9 TEST MAA 4 LIME 1 HHA Ewit Greyed until a valid Project Name is entered Terminal Type list box List box of available Catalogs and Versions of the selected Terminal Type Communication ports and protocols of the selected Catalog and Version Publication 2706 817 The MessageBuilder window opens ready to display a new or existing application file MessageBuilder EE For Help press F1 A MessageBuilder application is a unified set of messages with the associated tags and devices To create a new application specify the name of the application and its project 1 Click the New File tool on the Standard Toolbar to open the New Application dialog Or choose New from the File menu New Application Application Name Project Name a E Description rTerminal Type Information Terminal Name B a y Ports Physical R 232 Protocol SIMPLEX Physical None Protocol None MV Type My421D Catalog and Version 2706 M1D MessageView 421D FAN 100 1 xx _ 2706 M1D1 MessageView 421D FRN 1 02 1 xx 2706 M1D1 MessageView 421D FRN 2 00 2 xx Note When you select an MV Type option its three catalog numbers are displayed When you highlight one of the Catalog and Version options its Ports are displayed t To copy rename or delete devices from a project see Page 9 1 t For an exis
175. e Trigger tag in the Terminal The message can not be triggered with the Setup Control Tags dialog select Bit Trigger defined application Enable for this message or select Chain Enable in another message to this message The message numbers for all messages in an Renumber or delete the offending message to The message is chained to itself application are not unique insure that message numbers are unique Disable the Slave Enable attribute for the The message has the Slave Enable attribute message or select Slave Device as the Aux set when Slave Device is not selected Port Device in the Terminal Setup Aux Port dialog Use the Terminal Setup Comms Setup dialog Embedded ASCII Entry variables are not to convert the terminal type or delete the allowed for ASCII trigger application embedded ASCII entry variables in the message Applications can not support embedded Resolve the conflict by removing the Numeric Entry in the message embedded Numeric Entry Variable s Use the Terminal Setup Communication Setup dialog to configure the PLC Scanner type and name Use the Terminal Setup Communication Setup dialog to configure the Remote 1 0 rack information The Slave Address can not be greater than Change the value of the Slave Address 127 between 1 and 127 inclusive Change the value of the Slave Address between 1 and 127 inclusive The Slave Address of 13 assigned to the Change the value of the Slave Address to mess
176. e application e In the Catalog and Version list highlight the catalog number and firmware version FRN x xx installed in the terminal Note Make sure that the Catalog number and Firmware Version selected matches the Catalog number and Firmware Version of the terminal in which the application will reside e The Ports box displays the physical ports and protocol for the selected terminal type This box is read only If a description will be useful select the Description button to open another dialog See Page 6 8 Select the OK button to begin creating the MessageBuilder application Publication 2706 817 6 4 Working with Application Files Opening an Existing Application To reopen an application Bie Cte Sure ia Hepi Warkstatian Smiap Upgrade ermina 1 TESTA ACTIA MAA OFAC TOMBS ALRT BAT Ex Publication 2706 817 The bottom of the File menu lists up to four application files the ones that were opened most recently To reopen one of them simply select it Note The paths for files in the File menu are given if different from the current directory In the File menu illustrated at the left below one file ACCT4 MBA was opened from a floppy disk and saved to the current directory Note Devices or tags in a reopened application may not match those in its assigned project See Page 9 8 for details on how to reconcile the project with its application To open an application file that is no
177. e is Accepted Value from Weigh Scale 2 800 MessageView Termina Scales Value to 2 800 for Match Code Operator Inputs Weight of 30 P ounds Publication 2706 817 4 40 Planning an Application Publication 2706 817 Data Limits for a scaled variable If a value exceeds the range for the selected data type the terminal will display a Value Not in Range warning When using scaling it is a good idea to limit the minimum and maximum values an operator can enter These values are set in the Tag Editor Form View The range for scaled values should be calculated before the Tag Form dialog is filled out Use the following formula to determine scaled minimum and maximum values Maximum Input Value Maximum Value for Data Type x Scale Offset Minimum Input Value Minimum Value for Data Type x Scale Offset Example Scale 1 8 and Offset 32 Fahrenheit to Celsius conversion Data type is Signed Integer 32 768 to 32 767 The minimum and maximum values an operator can enter without truncating Maximum Input Value 32 767x1 8 32 59012 Minimum Input Value 32 768 x 1 8 32 58950 Initial value of a scaled variable The initial value specified in the Tag Form dialog is written to the controller upon powerup or reset This initial value is not scaled so it must be entered in the units used by the logic controller For instance assume the terminal uses C and the controller uses F To initialize
178. e messages in the application If the terminal is changed To Renova from J Function keys essageView 421F essageView 421N LEDs Function keys essageView 421F essageView 421D LEDs Entry Variables essageView 421N essageView 421D Entry Variables essageView 421N essageView 421F none essageView 421N none Seeeueuen 210 essageView 421F none Note The conversion will not take place aborts if these incompatibilities exist Each of the messages reported in the error dialog must be edited individually before the application can be converted This section shows how to define runtime parameters for a Message View terminal and a PLC or SLC that will communicate over a Remote I O RIO link The Message View terminal operates as a single rack on the network Its RIO communication parameters are set to match those of the logic controller it will exchange data with while the application is running Message View terminals with RIO daughterboards are Catalog Nos 2706 M1D1 M1N1 and M1F1 Terminal and Communication Setup 10 5 SLC Controller with 1747 SN Scanner PLC Controller MessageView 421 Terminal LLLP fo A e Y a LIL ETT LIL PTTL HEEE HEEE HEEE RIO Port Remote I O Network This table lists the controller types
179. e number associated with the Function key each time the Function key is pressed This provides a means of signalling to the logic controller that a Function key bit has been set or reset The Function Key Return Message Number tag is globally defined That is the Return Message Number tag address is the same for all messages using a Function key Publication 2706 817 4 30 Planning an Application Publication 2706 817 Acknowledge messages pseudo handshake The MessageView terminal supports a pseudo handshake for acknowledgeable messages The pseudo handshake uses the Acknowledge Return Message Number tag defined in the Terminal Setup Control Tags dialog See Page 10 23 If the Acknowledge Return Message Number tag is defined the MessageView terminal will return the message number associated with a message each time an acknowledgeable message is acknowledged If a message is not acknowledged no message number is returned This provides a means of signalling to the logic controller that a message has been acknowledged The Acknowledge Return Message Number tag is globally defined That is the Return Message Number tag address is the same for all acknowledgeable messages All messages pseudo handshake The MessageView terminal supports a pseudo handshake for all messages not included in the above handshake types The pseudo handshake uses the Return Message Number tag defined in the Terminal Setup Control Tags dialog See Page 10 2
180. e with Display Variable Discrete 1 0 Integer Table Message with Display Variable Block Transfer Counters Timers Status Control etc Publication 2706 817 4 32 Planning an Application Assign a tag to any data type the PLC or SLC supports SLC File Types File Type Read Write Identifier File Number Element Integer Bit Number Sub Element Output Read 0 0 0 255 n a 0 15 Input Read l 1 0 255 n a 0 15 Status Read Write S 2 0 82 n a 0 15 Bit Binary Read Write B 3 9 255 0 255 n a 0 4094 Timer Read Write T 4 9 255 0 255 PRE ACC EN TT DN Counter Read Write 5 9 255 0 255 PRE ACC CU CD DN OV UN Control Read Write R 6 9 255 0 255 Len pos EN E Hi Integer Read Write N 7 9 255 0 255 n a 0 15 String Read ST 9 255 0 255 LEN DATA n a ASCII Read A 9 255 0 255 n a 0 15 PLC 5 File Types File Type Read Write Identifier File Number Element Integer Bit Number Sub Element Output Read 0 0 0 2770 n a 0 170 Input Read 1 0 2770 n a 0 170 Status Read Write 5 2 0 127 n a 0 15 Bit Binary Read Write B 3 999 0 999 n a 0 15999 Timer Read Write T 3 999 0 999 PRE ACC EN TT DN Counter Read Write C 3 999 0 99 PRE ACC CU CD DN OV UN Control Read Write R 3 999 0 999 Lenpos FMA o ER Integer Read Write N 3 999 0 999 n a 0 15 BCD Read Write D 3 999 0 999 n a 0 15 cor ReadiWrite BT 3 999 0 999 na nja Message
181. e with such a device A Numeric Variable Entry allows the terminal operator to change or enter a value stored at a controller address It may be used for this purpose in any application designed for a MessageView 421N or 421F terminal In addition this variable may be used with an ASCII Input device when the input is in numeric form It may be used for this purpose in an application designed for a terminal that has both a daughterboard Catalog No 2706 M1D1 M1N1 or M1F1 and firmware that can support ASCII Input To create the variable set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box where the variable will be placed e Click the Embedded Variable tool on the Message Edit toolbar and select Numeric Variable Entry on the dialog e Or select the Numeric Variable Entry command on the Format menu Publication 2706 817 7 28 Creating Messages Format Field width O E Decimal Point Fixed Position po B C Keypad Controlled Publication 2706 817 To edit the variable highlight the variable placeholder in the message Click the Embedded Variable tool e Or select the Edit Variable command on the Format menu When a variable is created or edited its dialog appears Numeric Yariable Entry Foma Data Tags Field Width O cance _ Decimal Point CTA Fixed el Position p pareten Ton _ el C Keypad Controlled Handshake Tag Format The Fiel
182. ed Variable tool to display a menu of choices Or select the Format menu to display a similar menu 3 Select ASCII Char to display the ASCII Characters dialog ASCII Control Character Select Embedded Control Character 04 Ctrl D 05 Ctrl E SOOM EF 07 Cus 07 Ctrl G 4 Select the number corresponding to the ASCII character you want See the ASCII Table on Page I 2 ASCII characters with decimal numbers 0 to 31 are reserved for control characters 5 Select OK A placeholder is added to the message at the insertion point Note ASCII characters with numbers 0 to 31 are reserved for control characters If 32 or higher is selected in this dialog it will be represented in the Message Edit box by a placeholder even though that number does not represent a control character Publication 2706 817 7 22 Creating Messages ina Size Miga B Nash kmanse Widen Humeiic Variable Deglirg ABC Variable Disglirp Hunmeric Vorinbic Entry ASL Yorinbic Entry 2220 Cral Ghar hirapibir Cat Variable Eeable Functlan Bey Publication 2706 817 Note An ASCII Control Character placeholder may be removed using the Backspace key or the Cut tool or command It can be pasted only when the entire message is copied and pasted as described on Page 7 8 Adding numeric and ASCII variables to a message A message may contain embedded numeric and ASCII variables They
183. edlcaters Prelerences Publication 2706 817 Special Messages give commands to the terminal They may be called up using either a value trigger the message number or a bit trigger just like other messages See Page 4 5 for a list of Special Messages The Special Messages dialog is used only when one or more Special Messages need to be defined as a bit trigger e the Special Messages Set Time Date or Set Brightness will be used and needs to have its read tags assigned the Special Messages Get Time Date or Test Battery will be used and needs to have its write tags assigned To assign a bit trigger to a Special Message 1 Select Special Messages on the Application menu to bring up the Special Messages dialog 2 Select the Bit Trigger Enable box for the special message 3 Use the Bit Number spin control to assign an address to the bit trigger 4 When all special messages are edited select OK to return to the Message Editor Table View Important Bit triggers cannot be used when the terminal is controlled by an ASCII Triggering Device Creating Messages 7 55 Write Tags If the Get Date Time or Test Battery Special Message is used its tags need to be defined Select the Write Tags tab This dialog appears Bing Mise Tags sita Die Tawa 1 For each variable choose an existing tag name from the List Box or create a new tag The only valid data type for e a Date or Time Write
184. effect Low Once a second 1 sec on off Med Twice a second 0 5 sec on off High Ten times a second 0 1 sec on off The terminal operator can use the Front Panel Editor to change the Flash Rate Note A Message View terminal as a slave device uses this parameter to flash messages transmitted to it from the master device with an embedded Ctrl F Local Language Local Language specifies the language in which the MessageView terminal s Front Panel Editor menus and internal warning and error messages from the firmware appear in the Message View terminal display Select a language from the list box The terminal operator can use the Front Panel Editor to change the Language selection Important Application messages will always use the language in which they were written even if the Local Language is different Brightness Brightness determines the terminal display light level Select a level from the list 12 25 38 50 60 75 87 or 100 Default is 75 The terminal operator can use the Front Panel Editor to change the Brightness selection See Page 4 6 for the ASCII Triggering device command for a Special Message that changes display brightness Publication 2706 817 10 16 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2706 817 Port Power Up This option determines how the RS 232 port is configured at Power Up e The MessageBuilder option configures the terminal to power up with the communication p
185. elect all the check boxes to return to the original Message List Validating messages MessageBuilder software validates applications and messages so that all attributes variables tags and devices are compatible with one another Appendix D contains a list of Validation error messages e MessageBuilder software automatically validates all applications before they are downloaded e You may validate an application at any time by selecting Validate on the Application menu e You can also set up MessageBuilder to validate each message individually when it is stored or updated See Page 7 15 Publication 2706 817 7 14 Creating Messages Set Preferences Aaplicetan Tag Eio Proje Management Ogeciption Walidate Oowninad Upload BTC Idewiload HE Staci Uphod Terminal grimp Special Meccepes Funthem Emit LEW biitiin Pteheremecers Message Optlins Publication 2706 817 Note Whenever you use the Paste command MessageBuilder validates the message to make sure the destination terminal can support all its attributes For instance if you try to paste a message containing the Enable Slave attribute into an application intended to run on a terminal whose firmware cannot support Slave Port you will be unable to do so Error messages If an error or warning message appears while you are e creating or editing an application see Appendix C e validating an application see App
186. en File Opens an existing application file Save File Saves an application file to disk Edit Text Tools Cut Cuts the selected text string or an entire message from the Edit box and places it on the clipboard Copy Copies the selected text string or an entire message from the Edit box to the clipboard Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the cursor position in the Edit box If text is highlighted the pasted text replaces it Undo Reverses the last edit operation in a message Redo Reverses an Undo Publication 2706 817 B 2 Tool Summary Publication 2706 817 Windows Tools Terminal View Displays the front face of the Message View terminal that the application is designed for Table View Displays the main MessageBuilder Table View dialog Application Tools Terminal Setup Opens the Terminal Setup dialog to configure the MessageView 421 terminal Download Opens the Download Application dialog View Tools Zoom In Increases the Terminal View to the next higher magnification May be repeated twice Zoom Out Reduces the Terminal View to the next lower magnification May be repeated twice Help Tools Help Contents Displays an index to Help topics Help Question Changes the cursor arrow to a question mark Click the question mark on an item to get context sensitive online help Message Editor Toolbar The time is 1 89 PH cc K fs B e
187. endix D e uploading or downloading an application see Appendix E These appendices list the error messages and what to do for each one When you set preferences they remain as you set them even when the computer is shut down and restarted Preferences include e validate individual messages e change the colors that distinguish Flash text and Embedded characters in the Message Edit box To set preferences 1 Select Preferences on the Application menu 2 Select one of the options on the Preferences submenu 3 Configure the option 4 Select OK to return to the Message Editor Table View Message Options This option allows you to decide whether MessageBuilder software should validate each message as it is created and stored Select Message Options to display the Application Preferences dialog Application Preferences Enable or disable the Automatic Message Validation option by clicking in the check box Default is to disable this option Creating Messages 7 15 Colors Flashing Text defaults to blue in the Message Edit box and Embedded Text to red Embedded text includes variables and graphics Inverse Video appears with black and white inverted so it does not need a special color to emphasize it When you select this option the Color Selection box is displayed Color Selection Flashing Text Embedded Text Restore Defaults 1 Select the type of text whose color you would like
188. ent Description GELD E IEA Download Uphaad ETE Dhirvkbkil HE Stack Upload Terminal Setup Special Messages Eunction Keya ED Indicalors Preferorece sd Creating Messages 7 13 To rename topics Rename any or all topics used in the application The new text can have up to 12 ASCH characters including spaces Select Topics on the Edit menu to open the Topics to View dialog a Fit lt i 2a fti s Eg fies Flinn Cara ri Ea a O Eii e one Ba M jien Mo COCO MOR foe FG tect PM fio Pi fier Pe fics Pq fies Feline 2 Select a text box and type an informative Topic name 3 Repeat for every topic used in the application if desired 4 Select OK to confirm the changes Every message that is assigned to a named topic will have that name shown in its Topic column in the Message List In addition the Topic dropdown list now has the new topic names To view only messages with the same Topic Messages assigned to the same topic may be scattered through the Message List You can filter messages so the Message List displays only certain selected topics to make editing more convenient 1 Select Topics on the Edit menu to open the Topics to View dialog 2 Deselect the check boxes beside topics that you don t want in the Message List at the moment 3 Select OK The Message List now displays only messages assigned to the selected topic s 4 S
189. error The printout is terminated settings and the printer Cannot print text string Failed to send a text string This may be a Check the Print Setup settings Print S pooler printer error The printout is terminated settings and the printer Cannot read the Terminal Catalog datafile The CATALOG DAT file is missing or corrupted This file stores the terminal type that is selected when creating a new application or changing the application to fita different terminal type Call A B technical support Data format unknown for tag tag name Internal error Check tag information If error persists call A B support Enter tag name before pressing Edit Tag button A tag must be named before it can be edited Enter tag name Environment variable ABIC_CONFIG not defined The DOS environment variable ABIC_CONFIG is required for the INTERCHANGE comm drivers to work properly Itis not defined Edit the AUTOEXEC BAT FILE to add the ABIC_CONFIG variable to specify the location of the INTERCHANGE comm drivers and the configuration utility or reinstall MessageBuilder software File Error Cannot find ISPCORE DLL MessageBuilder software would not start because the default path C AB BIN is missing from AUTOEXEC BAT file Check the AUTOEXEC BAT file for the path Firmware Version is the same no need to load new The firmware in the Terminal is the same as the firmware in the Terminal U
190. es the embedded entry variables enabled Function keys and unless Ctrl G is used embedded Graphic symbols before transmitting the message to the Slave Device s If the following are embedded in messages they are supported on both the Master and the Slave Device s e date and time e graphics if Ctrl G is used see Page 7 41 Numeric and ASCII Display variables Data variables are continuously updated in the slave display as long as the slave message is active Other features include e Numeric Display variable data may be scaled Messages with the Hidden and Slave Enable attributes set are not displayed by the master but are displayed by the slave device Planning an Application 4 17 Slave Packet A message intended for transmission to a slave device has the following format Optional Control Byte ASCII Text Optional Display Mode Byte Slave Address Byte Line Number Byte CR MessageBuilder software allows for the automatic or manual insertion of the Optional Control Byte and Optional Display Mode Byte If you choose to embed them manually the individual control codes are found on Page 7 42 The slave packet fields are Control Byte specifies text size or clears the slave display e ASCII Text the message itself including embedded variables and graphics The maximum length for any message is 100 characters in a slave packet the control codes are not counted e Display Mode Byte specif
191. essages Function Keys LED Indicators Preferences Publication 2706 817 Validating Applications and Transferring Files Note The terminal erases its current application to prepare for a new application to be downloaded If the download is cancelled after this erasure the terminal s powerup diagnostics will report that the terminal has no valid application Note Error messages may appear during this download See Appendix E for a list of error messages and how to correct the problems An application may be downloaded to a file in the DOS environment An application downloaded to a DOS file is translated from the MessageBuilder application file type MBA to the MessageView 421 terminal file type MVA 105 The MessageView File Transfer Utility may be used to transfer any MVA file between a computer and a Message View terminal See page 11 15 To download an application to a DOS file 1 Open the application to be downloaded 2 Select the Download tool to open the Application Download dialog Or choose Download from the Application menu Download Application Destination Operator Terminal Communication Drivers Currently loaded drivers DF1 File Name T Download only if different from current application 3 Under Destination select DOS File Downloading Date Time to Real Time Clock Application Tay Editor Project Management Description Validate D
192. evice may be an ASCII Input device such as an AdaptaScan reader or a Slave Device such as a Dataliner DLSO B Background Message A message that is displayed by a Message View terminal when no other message has been active for 2 seconds Baud The rate at which data transmission occurs One baud equals one Bit per second Bit The smallest unit of information in the binary numbering system A bit contains either 0 or 1 Bitmap A Graphic image stored as a pattern of dots or pixels Bit Trigger A Bit location that may be assigned to a Message When the Logic Controller sets its bit to 1 the corresponding message is triggered An ASCII Triggering application does not support bit triggers See also Value Trigger Block Transfer One of the two methods of data transfer used by a Remote I O port on a MessageView terminal See also Direct I O Byte A sequence of 8 consecutive Bits that are treated as a single value Glossary G 3 C Cascade A way of arranging open windows in the workspace so that they overlap each other with the title bar of each visible See also Tile Choose Highlight an item by using the mouse or a key combination A command such as the OK button in a dialog can then select or invoke that item Tools menu items and certain commands may be selected and chosen in a single mouse click See also Select Click Press and release the left mouse button quickly Command
193. evice specified in the address attribute If Enable is not selected the message is used by the slaving master terminal only Auto Format If Auto Format is enabled the MessageView terminal sends the entire message to a slave at once up to the maximum message length of 100 characters The terminal also embeds the optional Control byte ASCII Text Code bytes Optional Display Mode byte and Line Number byte automatically e Optional Control byte is set according to the Text Size attribute e Flashing Inverse Video and embedded Graphics have the proper control characters set according to the corresponding attributes e Optional Display Mode byte is set according to the Scroll and Center attributes e Line Number is set according to the Line attribute Note If you place an embedded Control Byte e at the beginning of the text portion of the message it will override an automatically placed Control Byte atthe end of the text portion of the message it will override an automatically placed Display Mode Control Byte If Auto Format is disabled the Message View terminal e sends the message to the slave device in package lengths corresponding to the value set in the Length attribute e does not embed the optional Control Byte ASCII Text Code Bytes or Display Mode Byte in the message packet In this case these optional bytes must be placed manually in the text portion of the message using the ASCII Control Characters dia
194. ew 71 Select OK Or press ENTER e Or select the Tag Editor button to move to the Table View To close the form without saving anything select the Cancel button To save tag definitions in Table View Double click in the Status Column for that tag e Or in the last column press ENTER e Or use the arrow keys to move the highlight to a different existing row e Or use the scroll bar or the Page Up or Page Down keys to move to a different row e Or insert a new tag in the table e Or change to the form view Different Views To display Do this only data types unsigned or signed integer BCD or character array if you are in the Table View choose BCD Integer from View menu all tags in the project if you are in the BCD Integer View choose Summary from View menu another copy of the current view click or choose New from the Windows menu Inserting and Deleting Tags To select a row a tag click the left mouse button in the Status Column for its row For this result Do this click or choose Insert from Edit menu inserta tag A blank line appears in the table on which to enter a new tag click or choose Delete from Edit menu delete a tag The tag is deleted from the application and cannot be retrieved click or choose Cut from Edit menu The tag is cut from the current cut a tag project It may be added to this or another application using the Paste command
195. ew Terminal Block Transfer Read Configuring a Block Transfer Configure Message View 421 block transfers using the Block Transfer dialog which is accessed from the Communication Setup dialog Demaj Stig reds ans O23 5 GF Orate C i Rn of ES r io a Ceen mi ana a Hz w Ea irs fe H a 1 W i Piu a A Fem Thema Wisi imi E E i Note When a block transfer starting address is assigned in the Block Transfer dialog the size of the block up to 64 words is also specified The terminal uses the block size length to identify the data segment being transferred Publication 2706 817 Communications Overview 5 19 Each block transfer must have certain information specified Enabled whether the block transfer enabled or disabled Address the starting address to read or write the block transfer Mode select R for a Read operation or W for a Write operation Length how many words are transferred 1 to 64 The Message View terminal uses the length to identify data blocks Each block transfer read must be a unique length and each block transfer write must be a unique length However a read block can be the same length as a write block A length of 63 is reserved for Pass Through Pass Through This option is not available at this time Block Transfer Timeout specifies a timeout value for transferring applications using Pass Through A value of 0 disables the timeout Each blo
196. ew of terminal setup Changing the terminal type Remote I O communications Block transfers RS 232 main port communications Setting advanced terminal options Setting format for time and date Defining control tags Defining status tags Auxiliary port setup The Terminal Setup tool or the Terminal Setup command on the Application menu opens the Terminal Setup dialog This dialog defines both operating parameters and runtime communication parameters larmis Sctep Mester io Setup Abecedi teeta cette Sentan mre Tamsa Hisa manaa a Terminal Name ee y a was defined Fie be when the application was created Publication 2706 817 10 2 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2706 817 The Terminal Setup dialog uses tabs to organize its tasks by function Tab Function Setup change terminal type of MessageView device define runtime communication parameters between the terminal and controlling device accessed via Comms Setup button Advanced set a variety of terminal options Time Date specify how the time and date will display in the terminal define tags for Message Trigger bit and value Return Message Number Control Tags Acknowledge Acknowledge Handshake Acknowledge Return Number Function Key Return Number Status Tags define tags for HE Stack Status Aux Port define Auxiliary Port RS 232 device parameters Note The control buttons at the bottom of this set of tabbe
197. ext or character sequence e For right justified text type amp l amp l before the text or character sequence For example if you want to print this Project 1 2 2 3 95 type amp P amp amp N amp amp D text after this text after this second character sequence character sequence is is centered right justified Important If alignment is specified in part of a header line make sure the text does not overlap For instance if left justified text runs to the center of the page it will overlap centered text Publication 2706 817 Tag Import Export Utility Lisi Editor Fem Eee meter Working with Tags 8 17 If the Status column or Tag Name column for a specific tag is selected the Tools menu gives a list of available tools From the list select the tool needed In some cases the Tools menu commands may depend on what software is installed the the computer system List Editor is the same as the Summary command on the View menu it brings up a new Tag Editor Table View Form Editor is the same as the Form command on the View menu it brings up the Tag Form dialog for the selected tag Import and Export access the Tag Import Export Utility Supported file formats The Tag Import Export utility copies SLC and PLC 5 tag information from a supported file format to a MessageBuilder software project and vice versa The supported ASCII file formats are File Format Description The ASCII documenta
198. ey combinations are available in the description field CTRL ENTER for a new line CTRL C for copy CTRL Y for paste CTRL X for cut This dialog gives the date and time of the last save and the current version Each time an application file is edited and saved the version number is automatically incremented Publication 2706 817 Working with Application Files 6 9 To enter or edit an application description Important The description is downloaded to the terminal with the application so it uses terminal memory 1 Select the Description box and type the description The text automatically wraps To change the location of the insertion point in the Description box move the I beam pointer or use the arrow keys The insertion point moves with the text when the scroll bar is used To start a new line press CTRL ENTER Note ENTER alone closes the Description dialog To delete text drag pointer over the text to highlight it then press BACKSPACE or DELETE To replace text drag pointer over the text to highlight it then type the new text To add text position the cursor where you want to insert text and then type the new text Use any of the standard Window editing functions to edit text 2 When done select OK to close the dialog To edit a description in a different application Change the application name in this dialog if you want to enter or revise a description in a different application than the o
199. f characters 2 to 33 Do notuse blanks tabs carriage returns or non printable Character Array characters in the AtoZ 1109 characters type only array Array size must be an integer Publication 2706 817 8 6 Field Description 2 Working with Tags Description A description of the tag Valid Characters Maximum characters 255 any printable character Use either of these methods Select the box and type or Use the Description Editor see below Notes Do not use blanks tabs carriage returns or non printable characters The node on the A node name cannot be the same as a tag name or a terminal name Maximum characters 32 The node name must match the controller name entered in the Communication Setup dialog See Page 10 6 If an invalid character is entered the Tag Editor beeps and does not display it network where Do notuse blanks tabs carriage returns or non printable Node Name the device is AtoZ atoz 0to9 _ 9 P incited characters ka underscore _ Node names cannot begin with 0 9 hyphen or percent ercent a P Node names are not case sensitive SLC Slc and slc are all the same to the Tag Editor The data table Maximum characters 32 Address address in the For more information on valid Do not use blanks tabs carriage returns or non printable S33 logic controller addresses refer to the controller s characters for the
200. f graphics that illustrate various types of manufacturing tools They are illustrated and named in the Select Graphics dialog box 113 Use them to help the operator visualize the operation controlled by specific messages 1 Horizontal Valve with Actuator 2 Horizontal Valve with Throttling Actuator 3 Horizontal Valve with Manual Actuator 4 Vertical Valve with Actuator 5 Vertical Valve with Throttling Actuator 6 Vertical Valve with Manual Actuator 7 Butterfly Valve 8 Check Valve 9 Relief Valve 10 Liquid Filter 11 Vacuum Filter 12 Motor 13 Transformer 14 Vessel 15 Reactor 16 Storage Bin 17 Distillation Tower 18 Pressure Storage Vessel 19 Weight Hopper ey BEBSR ERB eae 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Tool Summary B 7 Pump Turbine Blower Compressor Agitator Conveyor Screw Conveyor Inline Mixer Rotary Feeder Exchanger Furnace Rotary Kiln Cyclone Separator Publication 2706 817 Message AB Utilities error creating project Appendix C Configuration Software Error and Warning Messages This appendix lists messages that may appear while creating or editing an application Messages are listed alphabetically For messages that may appear during validation see Appendix D For messages that may appear during a download see Appendix E For messages that may appear during a tag import or export see Page 8 22 Meaning
201. f the tag address where the controller sets a bit to when a notification has been received Select these tags from their tag list boxes or enter new tag names The only valid data type for either Notification or Handshake tag is bit Note Use both Notification and Handshake Tag or neither See the section on handshaking on Page 4 26 If only one tag is entered the application will not pass Validation Note It is easier to create an application if all its tags are entered in the Tag Editor before you start to write messages If a new tag name is used its parameters must be edited when it is assigned Publication 2706 817 7 32 Creating Messages Publication 2706 817 If the tags are new or if a tag needs to have its parameters edited 1 Put the insertion pointer in the tag to be edited 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog Tag Hama Da Tp i OS Dee Leni gs ic titel HT H Hodin Ham Cow bratial Vober mrn fa f Taj fabh rei lkp Penga p Aray Ta fan fi 4 iz 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section starting on Page 8 2 Note Character array tags must have length in the range 2 to 33 4 Select OK Slave devices Slave devices do not support the display of ASCII Entry variables in messages ASCII Entry variables are removed from a message by the master Message View terminal before the message is slaved Although slave devices do not display ASCII Entry variables
202. fer Utility INTERCHANGE INTERCHANGE Device Config PCMK Startup Utility fossa e through the Workstation Setup command in the MessageBuilder File menu Publication 2706 817 Installing MessageBuilder Software Configured Devices To select and configure an INTERCHANGE driver on your computer 1 Double click the utility icon in the MessageBuilder group icon or choose Workstation Setup from the MessageBuilder File menu Note At the end of the MessageBuilder installation procedure the INTERCHANGE Device Configuration dialog opens automatically INTERAN GE Device Contigersiien NAME Refers to driver name DEVICE Refers to selected driver PORT Refers to unique number assigned to INTERCHANGE driver STATUS Shows whether driver is enabled or disabled ET on DMs FTE on DEMS ETH on Ds PEHE en DHe Ar 2 Select a driver from the Available Drivers list The selection Select DF1 on COM Port depends on the type of MessageView terminal and the communication card installed in your computer For MessageView Terminal 2706 M1D1 M1N1 M1F1 2706 M1D M1N M1F To terminal and a computer using DF 1 RS 232 Transfer applications between the RS 232 port of a MessageView communications 1784 KL on DH Transfer applications between a computer on the DH link using a 1784 KL communic ations card and the Remote 1 0 port of a MessageView Terminal on a Remote I O network
203. fer to the DOS user manual for information on this If you experience error messages during a system reboot they may indicate an incomplete or incorrect configuration of the INTERCHANGE drivers See Page 2 8 for instructions on configuring the drivers For more details on INTERCHANGE Software refer to the INTERCHANGE Software user manuals and the MessageBuilder online release notes Installing MessageBuilder Software 2 13 Possible conflicts in using communication ports If you plan to run other software on your computer that uses the same communication ports as MessageBuilder and INTERCHANGE Software such as APS software follow these steps 1 Exit from Windows if necessary Make sure that INTERCHANGE is not running 2 Type ABICSTOP at the DOS prompt For example type C gt ABICSTOP 3 If ABICSTOP is not successful comment out ABICRUN in the AUTOEXEC BAT file REM CALL ABICRUN BAT Reboot the computer and run ABICSTOP again 4 Run the other software Publication 2706 817 Chapter 3 MessageBuilder Basics This chapter covers the following topics e Windows environment MessageBuilder window Message Editor Table View e Opening and closing menus e Status bar and toolbars Message Editor Terminal View e Dialogs e Getting help Windows Environment MessageBuilder software runs in a Microsoft Windows environment It uses menus dialog boxes and tools and follows the same keyboard and mouse
204. for use with European languages To enter an ASCII character in a message 1 Place the insertion bar in the Edit Box where the ASCII character is to go 2 Hold down the ALT key while entering the number in the keypad The corresponding character appears at the insertion point To enter an ASCII Control Character in a message to be sent to a slave device 1 Place the insertion bar in the Edit Box where the ASCH Control Code should be embedded 2 Click the Embedded Variable icon or open the Format menu 3 Select ASCII Control Char to open the ASCII Control Character dialog 4 Use the scroll bar to locate the number you want 5 Highlight it and select OK A placeholder for the character appears in the Edit Box at the insertion point A Control Code character determines how the message is displayed by the slave device s Publication 2706 817 l 2 ASCII and Extended ASCII Characters ASCII Character Set With Control Codes Dec Oct Hex Char Conte Dec Code o fo 0 Nu cre 032 40 20 100 40 u 140 60 1 f J son cma 0o33 a 21 101 41 A 141 61 a 2 2 2 stx cms 034 n 22 102 42 B 142 62 b 3 f3 l3 eX cmc 035 e 23 103 a fc 143 163 fc 4 a 4 e0T cid 036 44 24 104 44 D 144 64 d 5 5 5 ENQ Cte 0
205. g Zero Specify that the day and month always have two digits f this option is enabled February 2 displays as 02 07 Default is leading zeros not displayed 2 7 QD Year Specify whether the year is displayed as two or four digits For example the year 1996 can be displayed as 96 or 1996 Use the Time Format area to set the options for the time format The Sample area lower right displays the format as it is selected Option Used to 12 Hour 24 Hour Display the time in numbers representing hours Select 12 Hour to reset time to 00 00 after 11 59 Select 24 Hour to reset time to 00 00 after 23 59 The text boxes to the right display editable suffixes Separator Specify a character to separate hours minutes and seconds Default is the colon Leading Zero Display the hours before ten with a leading zero If this option is enabled 3 15 displays as 03 15 Default is leading zero not displayed 3 15 Display Seconds Specify whether seconds are displayed Default is to display seconds Set the time and date in the MessageView terminal using the RTC Download command See Page 11 9 The terminal operator can use the Front Panel Editor to change the Time and Date in the Real Time Clock The format can be changed only by using MessageBuilder software See Page 4 6 for the ASCII Triggering device command for the Special Messages that get or set the Real Time Clock time Termin
206. g address or the Terminal Setup C omms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup Status Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Message nvalid Tag Minute R ead Tag name must be f type Unsigned Integer o nvalid Tag Minute Write Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer nvalid Tag Month Read Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer nvalid Tag Month Write Tag name must be f type Unsigned Integer o nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Notify Tag name must be of type Input or BTR nvalid Tag Msg number Bit Trigger Number number greater than 1023 nvalid Tag Msg number Embedded ASCII Display Read Tag name must be of type Output or BTW nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded ASC Display Tag name must be of type Character Array nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded ASC Display Tag name nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded ASC Display Tag used but not defined nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded ASC Display Tag name array size must be between 1 and 32 nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded ASC Display Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded ASCII Display Tag name overlaps Discrete 1 0 Rack Control
207. g is pasted it is inserted above the current row If a field is pasted it replaces the contents of the field that contains the insertion point Be careful to paste it in a field in the same Ted column Sear nem Nep ra Gace pe Publication 2706 817 8 10 Working with Tags To copy tags into another application 1 Copy the tag s and exit the Tag Editor 2 Open another application in the same or another project see Page 6 4 3 Open its Tag Editor Table View and paste the tags in it Duplicating tags Use this option when a number of tags have similar attributes but are assigned to different variables in the application Create one tag and duplicate it as many times as needed Then change the name and address on each new tag to suit the variable it will be assigned to To duplicate a tag once 73 1 Select the tag name that you want to duplicate 2 Click the Duplicate Once tool Or choose Duplicate Once from the Edit menu The Tag Editor duplicates the tag row and places it after the current row The tag name is incremented according to the options specified in the Duplication dialog Duplicate Several To duplicate a tag several times 1 Select the tag name you want to duplicate a 2 Click the Duplicate Several tool Or choose Duplicate Several from the Edit menu The Tag Editor duplicates the current row and increments the tag names according to options specified in the Duplication dialog O
208. ge Builder software uses to download the application but the port parameters may be different See Page 10 9 for the procedure to configure the RS 232 port to communicate with one of these devices e See Page 5 3 for an outline of the procedure the terminal operator uses to switch from one set of port parameters to the other Note Parameters for communication between the Message View terminal and the computer are built in to the terminal firmware and cannot be edited ASCII Triggering device An ASCII Triggering device is used to trigger messages on the Message View terminal using RS 232 ASCII protocol ASCII Triggering devices include e SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 Port 0 e SLC BASIC Module PLC 5 Port 0 e other logic controllers with serial ports e Allen Bradley Industrial Computers e any ASCII Transmitting device including a VT100 Dumb Terminal Publication 2706 817 5 8 Communications Overview ASCII Triggering Commands Publication 2706 817 To set up a terminal to communicate with an ASCII Triggering device see Page 10 9 For the format of commands to and from an ASCII Triggering device see the section starting on Page 5 8 Message View 421D Slave Device A MessageView 421D Slave Device Catalog No 2706 M1D is a Message View terminal with no daughterboard and no numeric or function keys It is shipped with an application loaded The application supplies the alphanumeric fonts and graphic character
209. ge of valid ASCII and Extended ASCH characters is 032 to 0255 Characters numbered 0 to 31 are reserved for control characters 3 Press ALT where is the decimal representation of the character preceded by a zero For instance e 065 represents the letter A e 055 represents the number 7 0160 represents the accented character 0248 represents the degree sign The character appears in the Message Edit box at the insertion point Cult Cher Ciel CHley Daksis Meccage Dales jesen Message w ee Bae Eri CHltF Rgplace Ciel het Regina er Topics Creating Messages 7 7 To cut a text string 1 Set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box at the start or end of the text to be cut 2 Drag the mouse pointer over the text to highlight it Or hold down the SHIFT key and use the left or right arrow keys 3 Click the Cut tool Or press CTRL X Or select Cut from the Edit menu The selected text is removed and is copied to the Windows clipboard It may be Pasted to the same or another message To copy a text string 1 Set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box at the start or end of the text to be copied 2 Drag the mouse pointer over the text to highlight it Or hold down the SHIFT key and use the left or right arrow keys 3 Click the Copy tool Or press CTRL C Or select Copy from the Edit menu The selected text remains highlighted and is copied to
210. geBuilder P Range 421 Terminals Software After a message is acknowledged the Ack Bit Hold Time Acknowledge bit is set high for 50 msec This 50 msec time cannot be changed When no message is triggered this message none BackGround Message displays 1 to 9900 e Whether the message should be centered in Center e the display Debug Mode Operation Messages are displayed in the terminal but Disable 5 not active Enable 75 Display Brightness How bright the display should be 12 25 38 50 60 87 e e 100 Flash Whether characters should be flashing Flash Rate What the flash rate should be e e How long the terminal should wait for a response from the logic controller before 4 sec Handshake Time Out notifying the operator that the logic controller e i 0 to 3 5 to 60 sec is not responding A timeout of 0 means that no response is required Inverse Whether characters should be in inverse video e English Language Which language the terminal should use German French Italian e e Spanish Should there be a Message Queue to store 1 Message Queue Enabled value triggered messages until they can be 64 displayed none Password Entry Enter a password any four digits e none Password Modify Create or change a password any four digits e To power communication parameters for the Aux Port Powerup computer with MessageBuilder software e e OLP OLP Publication 2706 817 F 2 Global Configuration
211. h the Hidden attribute set e Special Messages Note Any message that has its HE Stack or slave attribute set is sent to the Historic Event Stack or the slave device when it is triggered The message does not have to be displayed Publication 2706 817 4 10 Planning an Application Publication 2706 817 From a logic controller using Remote I O The MessageView terminal supports a Value Trigger tag in the PLC or other logic controller When a message is to be triggered the logic controller writes the message number to this tag address Only one message may be value triggered at a time The terminal scans the Value Trigger tag address at regular intervals A triggered message number must remain stable in the Value Trigger tag address for a minimum of 100 milliseconds to allow for the terminal scan times The message is not triggered again until the value in the Value Trigger tag address is changed to a different number and then changed back Thus the ladder logic application designer may use a message number of 0 zero to change the Value Trigger tag address without triggering a message From an ASCII Triggering Device using RS 232 The MessageView terminal supports the triggering of messages using the Value Trigger method The format of this method is Ctrl T Message Number MessageView Address CR e Ctrl T is the control code for a command to the terminal Message Number is the value trigger for the message Mes
212. he application e Last the Function key s state at startup is its last state before the power down or reset A Maintained Function Key does not have a definitive handshake tag ATTENTION If communication with the logic controller uses Remote I O protocol with block transfer the function key write tags must all be assigned to the same block as the Function Key Return Message Number tag Publication 2706 817 4 24 Planning an Application Publication 2706 817 Toggling a Maintained Function Keys The procedure for toggling a Maintained Function key depends on whether the initial message is in Jog or non Jog mode To return the Function key s associated bit to its former state e Ifthe message is in jog mode the operator may press and release the Function key a second time If the operator continues to press and release the Function key the associated bit will be toggled e Ifthe message is in non jog mode a second message that has the same Function key enabled must be triggered It tells the operator to press and release the Function key Latched Function Keys A Latched Function Key changes state 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 when pressed and remains in the changed state when released It does not unlatch if it is pressed again A Latched Function Key returns to its original state only when the logic controller sets the latch handshake bit For the procedure when the controller is an ASCII Triggering device see Page 4 22
213. he slave packet Field 3 Optional Display Mode Byte This optional field indicates how the message text is to be displayed The following characters are used Byte Decimal Value Definition Holding message non Auto Clear Default If the message is longer than the display width Wait Time between segments of the message is 1 second Holding message non Auto Clear Ctrl A 1 If the message is longer than the display width Wait Time is 3 seconds Scrolling message non Auto Clear Scroll Time 0 2 Ctrl C 3 ape ai seconds Wait Time is 1 second Center message message length must be less than Ctrl V 22 or equal to the number of characters in the display line for that text size Publication 2706 817 7 44 Creating Messages Publication 2706 817 If the Optional Display Mode Byte is omitted the message will remain displayed on the slave device unless it is cleared If the message is longer than the packet length the first segment of the message remains displayed for 1 second After 1 second the second packet is sent with the next portion of the message and so on until all packets have been sent The message will repeat this cycle unless it is cleared If Auto Format is enabled the Optional Display Byte defaults to the default status unless the Scroll or Center Message attribute is enabled The Optional Display Mode Byte may be manually placed in the message by embedding it as the last character in the text porti
214. hen there are more messages than the application window can display at once Note Make the Application window wider if necessary to display this scroll bar Publication 2706 817 7 4 Creating Messages Cul Cries Copy Enriet Pach Chrity Delete Message AneDebeic jener biecrage Kew binaga Find spiace tert Repaniber Tapica_ Final Tast Find Message Note 1 2l Find Bit Trigger Bit 0 Find Topic Slaved Msg Publication 2706 817 To select a message using the Find command 1 Press CTRL F to open the Find Message dialog box Or select the Find command in the Edit menu O UU Cae Search or Search ais ee ru Haai 7 ja Teg ia D ig biach Casa Under Search select Up or Down for the direction of search To specify the type of search select one of the options under the Search For command The Find box changes its title to suit the option Enter text or a value in the Find box as follows Text in the Find Text box type a text string which can be any part of a message s text Include spaces and punctuation Variables and graphics cannot be part of the search Note The Match Case option is active only when Text is selected Select it if capitalization is important in the search string otherwise Search is not case sensitive Message Number in the Find Message Number spin control type the message number use the spin control to display the
215. i All pi ties ee la rah k commer or bed ode Traveler Slated Note If the HE Stack file in the terminal is empty the message Terminal has no file available appears in the Status bar When the upload is complete you are returned to the Message Editor Table View Note Error messages may appear during this upload See Appendix E for a list of error messages and how to correct the problems Using the MessageView File Transfer Utility Validating Applications and Transferring Files 11 15 Use the Message View File Transfer Utility to transfer applications between a terminal and a computer running Windows This Utility was installed as part of the MessageBuilder software installation 110 Important Applications transferred using this utility must be in MVA format that is they must have MVA file extension To create an MVA file for downloading you must download the MBA application to a DOS file from the Application menu of MessageBuilder See Page 11 8 Applications uploaded from a terminal are already in MVA format Before using the Message View File Transfer Utility e DFI INTERCHANGE communication driver must be loaded and configured on the computer e Cable connections must be correct e The MessageView terminal must have its RS 232 port set to MessageBuilder communication parameters See Page 5 3 for an example of how to switch settings To start the MessageView File Transfer Utility e Double
216. ialogs provide different sets of options each on a separate tab Select the tab to work with a specific set of options A sample dialog Terrain Satep Meera 10 tlvemced Totes Comte fot re D Pise Mire Hmb i PE Ela Pak kerd Loe ralle Hes aae jure a a E i List Box E Ungi Tem of Pomm 1h T E nabiy inisg biai ike T prab Tidal Meds m al Yaims a Fear lir Hyrhhsir Tmerri Peed Veka D la Mika m H Jam Hre Hai praal Bee Erba l W Command Button To move around a dialog e move the mouse pointer to a field and click the left mouse button or press TAB to move forward through fields and SHIFT TAB to move backward through fields Use the arrow keys to select a radio button e or press the ALT key and the underlined letter of a field name simultaneously For example to move to the Return Message Number check box press ALT R 7 Publication 2706 817 3 12 MessageBuilder Basics Li Application Name Bigi ne is pe oa Vette al Ba i aatar O Publication 2706 817 Features of dialogs Command Buttons Short rectangles with text explaining their function Select a command button to invoke the command Text Boxes Long rectangles with instructions about what should be entered in them Sometimes these boxes contain a default value or text sometimes they are empty The mouse pointer changes to an I beam when it is on a text box e To add text place the cursor point where the new text goes
217. ic e Time and date when the message was triggered e Time and date when the message was acknowledged if the Ack Time attribute was enabled See Page 7 39 Historical Event Stack messages are stored in the terminal s memory in chronological order The terminal can alert the operator when the Historical Event Stack file is 85 95 and 100 full so that overflows can be avoided If the Stack file is full new messages overwrite messages in the file starting with the oldest Viewing the Historical Event Stack The Historical Event Stack may be viewed using either the terminal s Front Panel Editor the personal computer via the HE Stack Upload command When using the Front Panel Editor the terminal operator may view the Historical Event Stack in either of two formats e frequency of occurrence e chronological order The HE Stack Upload command on the Application menu uploads the HE Stack file to a computer file in CSV Comma Separated Variable format This format allows the user to import the file into a spreadsheet or database software package for analysis See Page 11 13 Publication 2706 817 4 20 Planning an Application Function Keys Publication 2706 817 A Message View 421F terminal supports 16 Function keys F1 to F16 and 16 LEDs on the front panel me 4 25 PM COT tor speed 24 Start F2 Stop TI Mo Fl A typical message with Function keys enabled informs the operator the intended function
218. ic Variable Entry in the application i aa i A bit that when set informs the controller that the Numeric Variable memene Ny wodngangn at Entry is changed and ready to be acquired by the controller Os Alphanumeric characters entered by an ASCII Input device An Depends on ASCII Entry Character Array ASCII Entry tag is required for every embedded ASCII Variable the ASCII Entry in the application Input device ae F A bit that when set informs the controller that the ASCII Variable PALEE Nouiaton et Entry is changed and ready to be acquired by the controller Oe HE Stack Status 85 Bit A bit that when set indicates that the HE Stack is 85 full 0 1 HE Stack Status 95 Bit A bit that when set indicates that the HE Stack is 95 full 0 1 HE Stack Status 100 Bit A bit that when set indicates that the HE Stack is 100 full 0 1 A value that indicates the year of the Real Time Clock in the Special Message 9906 Year Unsigned Integer terminal The value is available when Special Message 9906 Get 0 65535 Publication 2706 817 Time Date is triggered Tags and Data Types G 3 Tag Type Purpose Range A value that indicates the month of the Real Time Clock in the Special Message 9906 Month Unsigned Integer terminal The value is available when Special Message 9906 Get 0 12 Time Date is triggered A value that indicates the day of the Real Time Clock in the Special Message 9
219. idation If a message has a Function key or keys enabled the Jog Mode aspect of the Auto Clear attribute is used e Non jog mode if Auto Clear is enabled the Function key message is terminated as soon as a Function key operation is completed including Hold Time if any e Jog mode if Auto Clear is disabled the Function key message remains active until the the terminal operator presses the 0 and keys on the terminal at the same time the controller triggers Special Message 9901 Clear Display the controller triggers Special Message 9903 Reset Terminal the terminal operator resets the terminal manually Jog mode is discussed in detail on Page 4 21 Scrolling Use the Scroll check box to enable scrolling e The Scroll attribute is disabled to pop the message onto the display A message longer than the display is wide appears in segments each remaining for the Wait Time specified for the message e The Scroll attribute is enabled to scroll the message onto the display from the right side one character at a time A message too long for the display scrolls off the display at the left When the last character appears the message remains for its Wait Time before it is terminated If the Auto Clear attribute is not set the message will continue to scroll until another message is triggered or queued for the same line s When Scroll is enabled the Scroll Time list box is activated Use the Scroll Time
220. ies scrolling centering and hold message options e Slave Address Byte specifies the Slave Device node address an integer from 1 to 127 Addresses 1 126 specify an individual node where a Slave Device is connected Address 127 addresses all Slave Devices e Line Number Byte specifies a Display Line number An integer from 1 to 4 specifies a specific line 50 clears all lines if Control Byte was Ctrl C e CR acarriage return to signal the end of the message Note Non printable codes and characters are not included in the character count for slaved messages Slave device alarm relay The MessageView terminal supports a slave device alarm relay A message with the Relay attribute enabled will energize the slave device alarm relay when the slave device receives the relay packet The alarm will remain energized until a message with the Relay attribute disabled is slaved to that node and line number replacing the alarm message and de energizing the alarm The following slave device supports an alarm relay e DLS50 Publication 2706 817 4 18 Planning an Application Slave Device Publication 2706 817 A MessageView 421D terminal without a daughterboard Catalog No 2607 M1D only is a Slave Device MessageView 421D Slave Devices are shipped with an application downloaded The application provides the ASCII characters and graphics needed to display messages The MessageView 421D Slave Device terminal does not support a Sta
221. igned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag initial value is outside of the valid range The assigned tag maximum Data Entry Limit is invalid The assigned tag minimum Data Entry Limit is greater than the maximum Data Entry Limit The assigned tag maximum entry is greater than the maximum value allowed What to do Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Numeric Entry dialog to select or add an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Numeric Entry dialog to select or add an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup C omms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as W Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Communication Setup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer Use the tag editor to enter a different address for the tag or use the Terminal Setup Comms Setup Block Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Use the tag editor to define the tag Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup Status Tags dialog to select an appropriate
222. igning an application easier Tool or Menu Operation MessageBuilder software runs under Microsoft Windows Many functions can be performed using tools keystrokes or menu commands Use any or all whichever you find most convenient Selectable Preferences MessageBuilder lets you set features of the workspace window to those you prefer Options such as the Standard Toolbar and the Status Bar can be toggled on or off and remain in that state until you change them See Page 7 14 for other preferences When you create a new application or when you start a new session MessageBuilder uses the latest settings Status Bar Information The Status Bar at the bottom of the screen explains what is happening at the moment See Page 3 8 e Ifyou hold the left mouse button down while the cursor is over a tool the status bar explains what it does e Ifa process is going on the status bar reports on how it is doing The three spaces at the right end of the status bar give the status of the keyboard CAPS LOCK NUM LOCK and SCROLL LOCK keys Help The Help tools and commands provide a quick way to find information about any part of MessageBuilder software See Page 3 14 for a summary of the Help function To access Help e Click on the Help Question tool and then on an item or command to get context sensitive help e Press F1 to get specific help on a subject e The Help Contents tool displays an index to Help topics Select Conte
223. iguration Utility 00 2 7 Troubleshooting the Installation Procedure 1 cece eee eae 2 12 Chapter 3 Windows Environment si sveseteateveteadeaWeewdwebawe dd 3 1 MessageBuilder Window ccc a 3 2 Message Editor Table View 2 0 cece eee e eee 3 4 Opening and Closing Menus 0 e cece eee eee 3 7 Status Bar and Toolbars i visc eas dead eusdea ee tawea dates 3 8 Message Editor Terminal View ccc cece eee eee e ees 3 10 DiglO0S aa itsoe daa kas dvar dag werd es eS Gha as EAG EEG 3 11 Getting Help os psc sead ce ee bed Dae e be eee eee sad eeaews 3 14 Chapter 4 Desig Checklist 2 02 asia aia cat aiadie co amtera ire ra iaae owas 4 1 Safety Considerations de nadarSeuadieeuiaedeeeeskebes 4 2 Applications and Projects oauan aa 4 3 Messages a ccd tchtieu ete taiea i a E a E aa 4 4 Controlling DEVICES cy didnt i awe he eras edd S 4 7 Triggering a Message sivciveaiasave civdea ieee deat an eid 4 9 DG 2 used ies beni hes a ees 4 15 Slave Device asc stvas eva ed edweedeeav deans eedwane ears 4 18 Historical EventStack ascisactadesadesaw teed ewdwama cada 4 19 Function KEYS s c2s dace ccad toauded teed easdeedwawa seas 4 20 Function Key Types ic12cvcaceeavideets a 4 23 LED INGICQWIS oo eiiairerriitis verdes an Enri Vee wewadae x 4 25 Handshaking si 2 2 case saa se bee Rees aeRO eee Eee w eae 4 26 Publication 2706 817 toc ii Table of Contents Communications Overview Working with Applic
224. ile name already exists a dialog gives the option of overwriting it or entering another file name Select Cancel at any time to abort the printing 7 Select Close to return to the Message Editor Table View Transfer Utilities Application Tag Editor Project Management Validate Download Upload RTC Download HE Stack Upload Terminal Setup Special Messages Function Keys LED Indicators Preferences MessageView File Transfer Utility Validating Applications and Transferring Files 11 5 Use one of these methods to transfer applications to from a Message View terminal e MessageBuilder Application menu MessageView File Transfer utility MessageBuilder Application Menu Most application transfers are initiated from the Application menu of the MessageBuilder software Choose the Download or Upload command from the Application menu for application transfers Use the Download command to download an application to either a Message View terminal using the INTERCHANGE DF1 driver and an RS 232 serial connection e DOS file in MVA format the terminal uses MVA file type Use the Upload command to upload an application from a Message View terminal using the INTERCHANGE DFI driver and an RS 232 connection Other file transfer options available from the Application menu include e RTC Download for downloading the computer s time and date to the Real Time
225. ile watching the status bar e If the tool is correct release the mouse button e If the tool is not correct move the cursor off the icon before releasing the mouse button Note Appendix B lists all the available tools and briefly explains what each one does To toggle the Standard Toolbar on and off 1 Choose View from the menu bar 2 Choose Toolbar from the View menu A check mark appears next to the Toolbar command when it is active To disable the Toolbar command choose the command again Note The Message Edit toolbar cannot be turned off Publication 2706 817 3 10 MessageBuilder Basics Message Editor Terminal View MessageBuilder defaults MessageBuilder software keeps the most recent Standard Toolbar and Status Bar settings as its default settings Default settings are used e the next time MessageBuilder software is opened e when a new application is created In addition the Preferences command on the Application menu offers other selectable options See Page 7 14 The Terminal View displays messages approximately as they will appear on a MessageView 421 terminal This view represents the front face of the type of terminal the application is designed for LJ ea a SEN E 27 SY AS LEE Message Edit Box in the Table View Erel l eet S095 syed iB Line 1 Display area in the Terminal View _ gt Publication 2706 817 SMP Proj SMP DEMO MBA 1 Freeze T A A
226. ill display a numeric variable in the MessageView terminal ASCII Variable Display Enters a placeholder in the message that will display a variable that contains ASCII characters in the Message View terminal Numeric Variable Entry Enters a placeholder in the message that allows the terminal operator to input a numeric value Application Menu Application Tag Editor Project Management Description Validate Download Upload RTC Download HE Stack Upload Terminal Setup Special Messages Function Keys LED Indicators Preferences Menus and Commands Summary A 5 ASCII Variable Entry Enters a placeholder in the message that allows an ASCII Input device to send alphanumeric characters to the terminal Valid only in applications designed for terminals with a Remote I O daughterboard and firmware that supports ASCII Input ASCII Control Char Enters an ASCII Control Character in the message Graphic Enters an ISA graphical symbol in the message Edit Variable When a variable in the message is selected opens the dialog for that type of variable Enable Function Key When the application is designed for a Message View 421F terminal allows specific function keys to be enabled in the message Use commands on the Application menu to validate download and upload an application edit function key and special message attributes
227. in a message the master terminal does display them whenever it displays the message ASCII Triggering devices Tag Node Name and Address attributes are ignored by an ASCII Triggering device They may be omitted when creating applications for use with such a device Message Attributes Creating Messages 7 33 The message s attributes appear in the Attributes section of the Message Editor Table View eee E L E eare 2 Pee is i r Attributes ee i AUH Attributes for each message may be set using the Message Editor Table View at the time the message is created e at any later time when the message is selected highlighted in the Message List and displayed in the Message Edit box Click the Store Message tool to store the current text and attribute settings for the selected message Note A message is stored automatically when another message is selected for editing Click the Cancel Changes tool to restore the message as it was before editing All changes whether adding deleting or editing attributes revert to their condition when the message was last stored To edit related messages together use the Topics command on the Edit menu See Page 7 12 In the Topics dialog deselect all topics but the one s needed at the moment The Message List now contains only messages assigned to the selected topic s To view the original Message List simply bring up the Topics dialog and select all the topics Publi
228. in the Message Edit box and that text in the Message Edit box is not selected If text is highlighted in the Message Edit box and then copied the Message Paste dialog will have just the Text Only option active In other words if you highlight and copy part or all of the message in the Message Edit box the text is pasted into the destination message but its variables and attributes are not 3 Create a destination message see Page 7 2 Or highlight an existing message in the Message List which will be replaced by the copied message Important Make sure that the insertion pointer is not in the Message Edit box and that text in the Message Edit box is not selected When the insertion pointer is in the Message Edit box the Paste command simply copies the text string into the destination message The Message Paste dialog does not appear 4 Click the Paste tool and the Message Paste dialog appears Or select Paste from the Edit menu tne irii cu Cire Comey Corie Parie cri Fleis bes eage He Dedate heen Message His Mead age Fog pilin Chil Hert Fee Qn bee e__ Creating Messages 7 9 The dialog displays the destination message number and the text string copied in the Windows clipboard 5 Select one of these options Embedded Option Message Text Variables Attributes Text Only Copied n a n a Text with Embedded A 3 Variables Copied Copied n a Attributes
229. ined for the current project 3 Perform a task as defined on the next page 4 Select the Done button to close the dialog Note An application does not have to be open when devices in its project are manipulated Publication 2706 817 9 6 Managing Projects Publication 2706 817 To delete a device 1 Highlight a name or names in the Existing Devices box 2 Select the Delete button 3 A dialog with the name of the device asks for confirmation that it should be deleted Select Yes to delete it or No to retain it If more than one device is to be deleted choose either the Yes button for each device or the Yes to All button Conlin Device Dele Bride bewer pis The device is permanently removed from the project and all occurrences of the device name are removed from the application s in the project To copy a device 1 Select the New Device Name box and type a unique name up to 32 characters long It cannot start with a number or contain spaces 2 Highlight in the Existing Devices box the name of the device to be copied 3 Select the Copy button 4 A dialog asks for confirmation of the copy Select Yes to copy the device or No to cancel the copy The Existing Devices box now has two copies of the same device under different names To rename a device 1 Select the New Device Name box and type a unique name up to 32 characters long It cannot start with a number or contain spaces 2 Highlight the
230. information transferred between the MessageView terminal and its controller Each message has a unique number which is used to identify it in the application Numbers in the range e 1 to 9900 are used for application messages 9901 to 9999 are reserved for Special Messages e greater than 9999 are not supported by the Message View terminal A message s number is its value trigger A message may also have a bit trigger assigned to it To trigger a specific message in the terminal display assert its corresponding bit or value trigger at the proper location in controller memory See the section on Triggering on Page 4 9 Planning an Application 4 5 A message may be up to 100 characters long and can include any combination of text graphics and variables It can have e up to one date variable up to one time variable e up to 10 entry or display data variables in any combination provided the total message length is 100 characters or fewer e up to 50 graphics symbols provided the total message length is 100 characters or fewer Variable and Graphic display characteristics in the Message Editor Message Component Table View Terminal View Time Sample Time Sample Time Date Sample Date Sample Date Numeric Data Entry Placeholder Placeholder Numeric Data Display Placeholder Placeholder 4 ASCII Data Entry Placeholder EEE Placeholder EEE ASCII Data Display Placeholder AAA
231. ing on Page 8 2 4 Select OK Note In an ASCII Trigger application only a tag name is required for Function key tags Node name and address may be left blank Defining Status Tags The HE Stack Status tags provide an indication to the logic controller when the stack is nearly or completely full The Historical Event Stack holds about 4000 alphanumeric text messages See Page 4 19 for a discussion of the Historical Event Stack 1 Select the Status Tags tab from the Terminal Setup dialog tinal Setep 50 210 Publication 2706 817 10 26 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2706 817 2 Select the name of a tag from the list box for one or all of these tags e 100 is the address where the terminal writes a 1 when the stack is full e 95 is the address where the terminal writes a 1 when the stack is 95 full e 85 is the address where the terminal writes a 1 when the stack is 85 full The only valid data type for these tags is bit Once set these status bits remain On until the condition has been cleared Warning messages are displayed on the terminal for the corresponding conditions The 100 warning message requires the operator to acknowledge the condition Note An ASCII Trigger application supports the HE Stack Status tags However the terminal returns the actual status number 85 95 or 100 to the controlling device as part of the Ctrl H command See Page 5 12 for the HE Stack report the terminal sen
232. ion file or the Historical Event Stack file from a terminal download the time and date to the terminal s Real Time Clock set up the terminal s communications control and status tags and global attributes assign bit triggers and date time tags for special messages for Message View 421F terminals set global attributes and assign tags for all the function keys and LEDs used in the application allow the user to set preferences Window menu has commands that open and arrange application windows and arrange their icons open the list of problems in the application Exceptions that were identified after a Validate or Download command open the Terminal View and toggle it with the Table View list the windows currently open for easy access with the active one checked Help menu has commands that access topics in the MessageBuilder Help utility identify the versions of MessageBuilder and AB Utilities software and the registration serial number Opening and Closing Menus MessageBuilder Basics 3 7 Each name on the menu bar opens a menu with a set of commands To open a menu point to a name on the menu bar and click the left mouse button e or press ALT and the underlined letter in the menu name simultaneously For example to open the File menu press ALT F MessageBuilder menus look like this Crit Cried Workstation Setup Upgrade Te
233. is displayed as 09 03 Enable e Time Format Seconds Whether seconds should be displayed Enable Included default Disable 0 ime Hour The current hour 1 to 12 0 to 24 e e an 12 ime Hour Format 12 hour or 24 hour format z4 e The suffix to be displayed after the time e g AM ke Hour Notation PM CST this is only selection not entry of 10 PM e Selection characters any 10 characters Time Minutes The current minutes after the hour 0 e e 1 to 59 Time Seconds The current seconds after the minute 1 ae e Publication 2706 817 Tag Acknowledge Handshake Appendix G Tags and Data Types Read tags are controlled by the PLC For Remote I O read tags are Output or BTW Type Bit Purpose A bit that when set informs the terminal that the Acknowledge bit and Acknowledge Return Number have been acquired by the controller Use of the Acknowledge Handshake is optional Range 0 1 ASCII Display Character Array A string of ASCII characters that is scanned whenever a message with an embedded ASCII Variable Display is triggered An ASCII Display tag is required for every embedded ASCII Variable Display in the application An array of characters ASCII Entry Handshake Bit A bit that when set informs the terminal that the ASCII Variable Entry and Message Return Number have been acquired by the controller Use of the Numeric Entry Handshake is optional 0 1 Bit trigger Unsigned Integer
234. is set the terminal releases the Latched Function Key and it returns to its initial state Indicator Tag The indicator tag is a read only tag in the Function Keys dialog It is discussed in the section on LED attributes on Page 7 52 To edit the Write or Handshake tag attributes 1 Put the insertion pointer in the tag box 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog Lag Hawa Daa Te rera Deta iranis tiair bamer Tam jetid Vakie ELE5 H P Fang tute ee Uplate Freapecerp ju ET fi E 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section starting on Page 8 2 4 Select OK ASCII Triggering devices Tag Node Name and Address attributes are ignored by an ASCII Triggering device They may be omitted when creating applications for use with such a device Creating Messages 7 51 Tet Siga F Aiga b Fash beerse Widen Time Haplery ate Des play Humci Valoble Dipli ASC Vatable Dipl Supectic Vatinbic Entry 45001 Cento Chee Graphic Diii Yardsile Enable Function Keys Any or all of the Function keys may be enabled for any message To enable Function keys for the current message 1 Select the Enable Function Keys tool to bring up the Enable Function Keys dialog Or select Enable Function Key on the Format menu Message 1 RA Te F2 M F10 C F3 C F11 C F5 F13 F6 F14 LF D F15 l F8 l F6 The dialog displays the message number 2 Select the che
235. isplay mode e two messages in Half Display mode When messages require action by the operator consider the following e Only one message may be displayed at a time that requires the operator to use either numeric keys although one message can have up to 10 Numeric Entry variables MessageView 421N or 421F terminals the ACK key all terminal types e In MessageView 421F terminals only one message may be displayed at a time that requires the operator to press a Function key However another message can be displayed that contains either Numeric Entry variables or the Ack attribute Clearing messages from the terminal display Wait Time Select the Wait Time list box to specify the minimum time the message will be displayed Wait time may be 0 to 31 seconds default is 1 second Note If Scroll is disabled and Auto Clear is enabled Wait Time cannot be 0 If it is 0 the application will not pass Validation Publication 2706 817 7 36 Creating Messages Publication 2706 817 IX Auto Clear IX Scroll Scroll Time 0 2 secs Auto Clear Use the Auto Clear check box to clear the message from the display after its Wait Time has expired Disable Auto Clear to display the message until another message is triggered or comes to the top of the queue that is assigned to the same line s Note If Wait Time is 0 and Scroll is disabled Auto Clear must be disabled If it is enabled the application will not pass Val
236. isplay variables Duplicate Message Number within Application Duplicate RTC Date Variables within message Duplicate RTC Time Variables within message Display variable storage size is greater than Appendix D Validation Error Messages This appendix lists messages that may appear while validating an application whether on command or automatically before downloading Messages are listed alphabetically For messages that may appear during creation or editing of an application see Appendix C For messages that may appear during a download see Appendix E For messages that may appear during a tag import or export see Page 8 22 The selected catalog number does not match that of the application The assigned Background message is not defined The bit trigger numbers for all messages in an application are not unique Bit triggering is assigned priority over Value triggering yet there are no Bit Trigger enabled messages in the Application The application has one or more messages that has bit triggers enabled however the Bit Trigger Tag is undefined for the Application The message is chained to a non existent message The combined tag array sizes for the embedded ASCII Variable Display variables in the message exceed 100 characters The message number for all messages in an Application are not unique The message has more than one embedded Date variable One is permitted per message The message has mo
237. ith F1 enabled may be jog mode and Message 25 with F1 enabled may be non jog in the same application Terminating Function Key messages A Function key message in Jog mode remains displayed until it is specifically terminated Another message triggered to be displayed on the same line will not clear it Function key enabled messages are terminated by e pressing the Function key if the Auto Clear attribute is set non jog e pressing the 0 and keys on the terminal at the same time e triggering Special Message 9901 Clear Display e performing a terminal reset When the controller is an ASCII Triggering device Each time a Function key is pressed the Message View terminal sends a Ctrl F command to the ASCII Triggering device Ctrl F Message F Key F Key Action CR Message is the number of the displayed message e F Key is the function key being pressed e F Key Action is the resulting state O OFF and 1 ON If the Function key is of Latched type the ASCII Triggering device sends a Ctrl U command to the terminal to unlatch it Ctrl U Function Key MessageView Address CR e Function Key is the Function key being unlatched and the MessageView Address is the node address of the terminal in the ASCII network Function Key Types Planning an Application 4 23 Momentary Function Keys A Momentary Function Key remains in a changed state as long as the key is pressed When it is released af
238. ither time or date to a message 1 Set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box where the time or date display should be placed 2 Click on the Embedded Variable tool to display a menu of choices Or select the Format menu to display a similar menu 3 Select Time Display or Date Display A placeholder for Time or Date is added to the message at the insertion point The placeholder value is an arbitrary time or date which does not change When a message containing a Time or Date variable is displayed by a MessageView terminal the terminal continually updates the Time or Date variable according to its Real Time Clock You can change the format in which time or date are displayed on the terminal Use the Time Date tab on the Terminal Setup dialog see Page 10 18 Note A Time or Date placeholder may be removed using the Backspace key or the Cut tool or command It can be pasted only when the entire message is copied and pasted as described on Page 7 8 Slave devices Slave devices support the display of Time and Date variables in messages The time and date are updated while the slave message is actively displayed Publication 2706 817 7 20 to ee Alig t Flash Frama V s ooo Drs Dispis a Deter Conghry Herecric York Din pier BCI Verkade CA ploy Hamare Mariaka Enirg ESCH yeiai F airg EdE Yariabir Enable Ponchos Ery Publication 2706 817 Creating Messages
239. itial value must be an The assigned tag is the wrong data type integer nvalid Tag Msg Hnumber Embedded Entry Write Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Write Tag name Max value not valid or notin The assigned tag maximum value is invalid range Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Write Tag name Min value not valid or notin The assigned tag minimum value is invalid range The tag scaling factors are outside the valid range Use the tag editor to change the tag scale ag is undefined in the project database Use the tag editor to define the tag Tag is undefined in the project database Use the tag editor to define the tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of he assigned tag is the wrong data type the tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag e tag address is notin the discrete 1 0 Use the tag editor to change the tag address image of the rack or in the block transfer s or the Communication Setup Block Transfer configured for the Terminal dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer Use the tag editor to change the Maximum entry value Use the tag editor to change the Minimum entry value Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog t
240. ject database Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial essages Read Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial essages Write Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial essages Read Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial essages Write Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup B lock Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as R Change the bit trigger number Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as W Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup Control Tag dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to correct the PLC address for the tag Use the tag editor to define the tag Use the tag editor to change the tag array size Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Communication Setup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Se
241. l Any Full all 4 display lines 7 1 Select All to use the whole display for the message This may be useful for complex messages After it is triggered a message with Starting Line All must wait until e all lines on the display are available or e Special message 9901 Clear Display is triggered Select Any to display the message on the first available line starting from the top of the display Note Graphics may be used only in Half Text Display mode messages Each graphic is as wide as two characters If graphics are used in a Quarter or Full Display mode message the application will not pass Validation Wait Time 2 secs Creating Messages 7 35 Example of priorities in displaying a message The terminal display has a quarter display mode message on Line 2 A half display mode message is value triggered If it is assigned to e Line 3 it is displayed at once e Any it is displayed at once on Line 3 e Line 1 or 2 it is put in the Message Queue until the first message is terminated e All it is put in the Message Queue until the first message is terminated e Line 4 it cannot be displayed this discrepancy is caught during Validation of the application To display more than one message Assign messages to different lines if they are to be displayed at the same time The terminal can display e four different messages in Quarter Display mode two messages in Quarter Display mode and one in Half D
242. l display lines are available and the messages are assigned to the same line Message A Display Line 1 Message B Display Line 1 Bit 2 Word 0 set Bit 0 Word 1 set 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Wordo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Wordi Result Message A is displayed at once After Message A is terminated Message B will be displayed if its corresponding bit is still set If its bit is no longer set Message B will not be displayed unless it is triggered again Example 3 Three messages are bit triggered at the same time Assume all display lines are available and two of the messages are assigned to the same line Message A Display Line 1 Message B Display Line 2 Message C Display Line 1 Bit 2 Word 0 set Bit 0 Word 1 set Bit 14 Word 1 set 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Wordo 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Word Result Messages A and B are displayed at once After Message A is terminated Message C will be displayed if its corresponding bit is still set Bit and Value trigger priority A bit triggered message and a value triggered message may be triggered at the same time e Ifthe messages are assigned to different display lines both messages will be displayed e Ifthe messages are assigned to the same display line priority is determined by the Trigger Priorit
243. laced at the bottom of the Message Queue Stack Messages are processed from the Queue Stack in a top to bottom First In First Out FIFO priority e The topmost message is displayed when its assigned display line is available The terminal continues to queue additional triggered messages while it waits to display the topmost message Note Messages in the Queue are not displayed until they reach the top of the Queue even if their line is available e Ifthe Queue reaches Full status the next message that is queued will be entered at the top of the Queue overwriting a pre existing queued message Note The Message Queue is not cleared when the terminal operator enters the Front Panel Editor FPE When the operator closes the FPE Run mode resumes and the queued messages are displayed as if there was no interruption The Message Queue is cleared if e the terminal has processed all queued messages the terminal is reset the controller triggers a Clear Queue 9902 Special Message the controller triggers a Terminal Reset 9903 Special Message Publication 2706 817 4 12 Planning an Application Bit triggering This method uses bits within a designated word of memory the Bit Trigger tag address to trigger messages The Bit Trigger tag is defined in the Terminal Setup dialog see Page 10 21 Starting with this tag address you may reserve up to 64 words 1024 bits in sequence for all the bit triggers in the applic
244. late projects 1 Choose Project Management from the Application menu to open the Project Management dialog Project Management Devices Current Project Existing Projects projl New Project Name Select the Projects tab The Projects tab shows the project that is currently used by the opened application and a list of existing projects If no application is open the Current Project field is blank Perform a task as defined on the next page Select the Done button to close the dialog and return to the Message Editor Table View if an application is open or the MessageBuilder window if no application is open Managing Projects 9 3 To change the project associated with an application 78 Note If an application s project must be changed the application must be open Any other task on this dialog does not require an open application 1 Select a project name from the Current Project list box 2 Select the Done button 3 A dialog asks for confirmation of the change Select Yes to change the project or No to keep the current project EE SL 7 Chaage preped itan nine paa ia ATT Laie Lm To rename a project 1 Select the New Project Name box and type a unique name up to 32 characters long It cannot start with a number or contain spaces 2 Highlight the name to be changed in the Existing Projects box 3 Select the Rename button 4 A dialog asks for confirmation
245. lds are sorted in the order in which they are added to the Sort Order box To change the order 1 Highlight a field or fields in the Sort Order box 2 Select Remove to delete them 3 Highlight a field or fields in the Column box 4 Select Add to append them at the end of the list in the Sort Order box Or select Cancel and start over Printing Tags FEE Table View only latched speed Sian Prupria Priat Working with Tags 8 13 Tags may be printed if the personal computer is connected to a printer and the correct drivers are installed See the manual for the printer and the Windows manual 74 ATTENTION Make sure your printer is connected and online Important If a row is being edited signalled by a pencil in the Status Column the first column on the left the Print command is not active Select a different row which stores the edited row before calling up the Print dialog To print tags 1 Click the Print tool to open the Print dialog Or choose Print from the Project menu es Selected Rows Print The Cover Page Printer Setup Opens Print Setup dialog Current Printer Page Setup Opens Page Setup dialog Name of current printer Note The name of the current printer is displayed To change to a different printer see the next section The printer used in this session will be the default printer next time this dialog is opened 2 Under Print What specify whethe
246. le Blocks Multiple block transfers use a single channel single Module Control and Status Bytes defined Each block transfer read or block transfer write must be a unique length since the Message View terminal uses the block size to determine the starting location of the read or write The following is an example of a block transfer write of two blocks The PLC ladder logic program initiates multiple block transfers of 2 data blocks 7 words and 60 words BTW __ BLOCK TRANSFER WRITE EN Rack 03 Group 0 Module 0 The MessageView terminal receives the first data Control Block N16 1 ge i Data Fil N7 0 lt Data From block and determines the starting address N7 0 L a h G 9 PLC where the data is written by matching the block size Cant i with the address entered in the Communication Setup ontnuous utility BTW The MessageView handles the second block in the BLOCK TRANSFER WRITE EN a Rac 03 pEhbW EE Nea F He Fi bE a aa Control Bloc N16 6 e HTI W i Data File N90 10 lt Data From 0 ooo Continuous N The MessageView carries a copy of the logic controller data tables N7 0 to N7 6 a A The MessageView carries a copy of the N72 logic controller data tables N90 10 to N90 69 N7 3 Block 1 Transfer 90 8 N7 4 90 9 N7 5 90 10 A N7 6 90 11 Block 2 Transfer N7 7 N90 12 ve 90 67 N90 68 90 69 y
247. list box to set the time interval between one character appearing and the next Range is 0 1 to 5 seconds default is 0 2 seconds lai Size Mash kmene dea Tie apir Daie Dita play Humeile Variable Displary ADC Variable Dinglary fumeric Variable Entry A200 Yoriabic Estr ASO Caml Car Loraphir Cali Wanable Enshi Cancion Ley IX Hidden Creating Messages 7 37 Note A long message may be checked in the Terminal View if you e set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box at different points along the message the message in the Terminal View starts with the insertion point e ifthe All Line attribute is set use the Return Enter key to break up the message into segments Note If Auto Clear is enabled and Wait Time is 0 Scroll must be enabled If it is disabled the application will not pass Validation If All is selected in the Line attribute Scroll must be disabled Hidden A Hidden message is triggered like any other message but not displayed When the Hidden attribute is enabled its message never appears on the terminal display Since a Hidden message is not displayed it cannot support any type of operator action Note Set the HE Stack attribute for a Hidden message to log a Display Variable into the stack without displaying it Note Set the Slave Enable attribute for a Hidden message to have a slave device display a message that does not appear on the master device s displa
248. load Specify a valid MVA file Application matches file in terminal no download is necessary The CRC of the MVA file is identical to the CRC or the application in the terminal No action is necessary Application type does not match terminal type Re configure in Terminal Setup The application is configured for a communication protocol that does not match the terminal port From the Setup tab in Terminal Setup select a terminal type that matches the application Or convert the application to match the terminal type then update the tags appropriately Block Transfer Channel Number Num Length is invalid The block transfer length is defined as 0 or exceeds the maximum of 64 In the Block Transfer dialog correct the invalid length of a block transfer Cannot continue terminal is BUSY astray fae as OR Seena a nt Cannot continue terminal is notin RUN mode The terminal is in a mode that will not support file transfers Wait until the terminal is in RUN mode then retry the file transfer Cannot continue terminal is in PROGRAM mode The terminal is transferring a file to or from another computer Wait until the terminal completes the other transfer then retry the operation Cannot perform file transfer operation no NTERCHANGE communication drivers are currently running INTERCHANGE drivers are not loaded on the computer Exit Windows Configu
249. lock transfer maximum of 10 Note If the application requires block transfer be sure to mark off the Status and Control bytes on the Discrete I O worksheet s See Page5 17 In the Worksheet Each row represents one word of memory A signed or unsigned integer or a BCD type variable must be assigned to one word Bits may be assigned to any available bit address Publication 2706 817 Tag Address Worksheet Decimal 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 SS Octal 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 Tag Name J cs Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 K Octal 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 Tag Name J a Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Octal 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 Tag Name J Decimal 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 aa Octal 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 Tag Name J Publication 2706 817 Appendix ASCII and Extended ASCII Characters This appendix includes all the ASCII and Extended ASCII characters you can enter in a message e The first 31 characters are used as ASCII Control Code characters They are used to embed control codes in messages sent to slaves e Characters numbered 032 to 0127 are usually typed in from the computer keyboard e Characters numbered 0128 to 0255 are Extended ASCII characters The 850 version of the Extended ASCII character list is designed
250. log accessed through the Format menu See Page 7 21 Publication 2706 817 7 46 Creating Messages Publication 2706 817 Example Placeholders for Ctrl F ASCII Text Code Byte for Flash y This Message is half height f i Placeholder for Ctrl S Placeholder for Ctrl C optional Control Byte for Half Text Size optional Display Mode Byte for Scroll Note If the slave device is a Message View 421D Slave Device terminal Catalog No 2706 M1D it is recommended that you enable Auto Format Address Use the Address spin control to specify the Node Address to which the message is to be slaved Each slave device has its own node address See Page 4 15 for a diagram of a possible network The address for an individual slave device is a number from 1 to 126 Address 127 sends the message to all slave devices on the network Length The Length attribute is enabled if Auto Format is disabled so a packet length may be selected Use the up down arrow keys to select a number from 7 to 100 in the Length spin control If the message is larger than the selected Length the Message View terminal will divide it up into packets The last packet will have spaces inserted after the last character in the message if necessary to meet the Length requirements For instance a message 28 characters long with a Length of 10 is sent in three packets The last packet contains 8 characters and 2 spaces to fill it Note If Auto Fo
251. lpful hints Validating applications Transfer utilities Downloading an application to a terminal Downloading to a DOS file Downloading time date to Real Time Clock Uploading an application from a terminal Uploading the Historical Event Stack Using the Message View File Transfer Utility Terminal upgrade MessageBuilder applications are normally saved to MBA files The MBA file is translated and saved as an MVA file during the download process whether to a MessageView terminal or to a DOS file Applications are validated checked for errors during the download process It is also helpful to validate applications as part of the creation process and correct any errors before trying to download An application can be downloaded only to a terminal it is designed for However MessageBuilder software can reconfigure an application for another type of terminal See Page 10 3 Transferring applications between a computer and Message View Terminal using an RS 232 connection requires the INTERCHANGE DF driver This driver was installed as part of the MessageBuilder software installation See the Message View Operator Terminals user manual on how to connect the computer and with a MessageView 421 terminal s RS 232 port Publication 2706 817 11 2 Validating Applications and Transferring Files Validating Applications MessageBuilder automatically validates an application before Application downloading it When it has been downloade
252. lue 5 CR C trl 1 9906 Second Value 6 CR Fo ey racer Use telco mre 1y E gt passeri kto we oae to terminal Ctr T 9907 MV Addr CR 9907 Battery Test status bit If the Battery Test fails a 0 is sent from terminal Ctrl 119907 1 or 0 1 CR Valid only if the tag is defined in the S pecial i Messages dialog Adjusts the brightness of the display according to the value input in the Special Use the Ctrl V command DisnlavBriihtness Message to terminal Ctrl T 9905 MV Addr CR 9908 Meme If an incorrect value is input for the brightness to terminal Ctrl V 0 to 7 1 MV Addr CR level the terminal will ignore the command Valid only if the tag is defined in the Special Messages dialog Publication 2706 817 Controlling Devices Planning an Application 4 7 1 This table shows the brightness level corresponding to each value in Special Message 9908 s Ctrl V command Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Levels 12 25 38 50 60 75 87 100 A MessageView terminal can accept commands from one of these two types of controlling devices e a logic controller such as an Allen Bradley PLC or SLC A logic controller communicates with a MessageView terminal through the Remote I O port on the daughterboard card Terminals with daughterboard cards are Catalog Nos 2706 M1D1 M1N1 and M1F1 e an ASCII Triggering device such as an Allen Bradley computer product or SLC BASIC Module See Page 5 7 for a list An
253. med MOTOR Managing Projects 9 9 For each discrepancy MessageBuilder must be told what to do The options are Select To Replace the project device or tag with the application device or tag Ignore the device or tag do not replace it to the database ETTI Replace all project devices or tags with the j application devices or tags Ficpiace mase Ignore all unresolved devices or tags and open the application Cancel Open Close the application If Yes or No was chosen the dialog reappears with the next different application tag or device If No or Replace None is selected a dialog warns that the application may not validate because of the differences Restoring a Project If a project is deleted accidentally an application associated with it may be used to recreate the project 82 1 Open the application This dialog appears aT Beep doe ma eel foe ppi niinn big fone Paje sect papal l cE ems 2 Select Yes The project is recreated with all the device and tag data required by the application Publication 2706 817 Overview of Terminal Setup Applitedos Tag Edho Project Management Dig cote pote Yaslidair hreanlnsd Uphad ATC Dowaload HE Stack Upload lcnmimal Sttup sparia Mrene undian Eey LED ladicatars Pielerenced Chapter 10 Terminal and Communication Setup This chapter covers the following topics Overvi
254. menu then type the underlined letter of the command Appendix A describes all commands in all the menus For example to open an application from the initial MessageBuilder screen do one of the following click on the Open File tool or press CTRL O or type ALT F then type O to select Open from the File menu and the File Open dialog appears Contents of the Manual Related Publications Preface P 3 This manual is organized as follows Chapter Title Description Describes the purpose and contents of the Preface Ne manual and its intended audience 1 Introducing Describes MessageBuilder Configuration MessageBuilder Software Software and some of its features ipetalllna MessageBuild r Explains how to install MessageBuilder and 2 9 9 INTERCHANGE software on a personal Software computer Explains how to use MessageBuilder 3 MessageBuilder Basics software s menus tools and dialogs Also how to use the Help system a Gives guidelines for designing an application j Planning an Appligatinn including safety considerations 5 Communications Gives guidelines for setting up MessageView Overview terminal communications os ct a Explains how to open and close 6 working pe MessageBuilder software and how to open close and save application files Shows how to create messages and set their f attributes Also how to embed variables and 7 Creating Messages fey i graphics in a
255. message in the Message List then e click the Delete Message tool e press ALT DEL e select Delete Message on the Edit menu To restore a deleted message e click the Undo tool e press CTRL Z e select Undo on the Edit menu Selecting Messages Creating Messages 7 3 When a message is selected in the Message List the message text appears in the Message Edit box and its attributes are displayed in the Attribute Controls section of the Message Editor Table View LEH Cite LERA FLIRGH AISHI HOT HENI Selecting a message for editing Select highlight a message in the Message List e manually e by using the Find command in the Edit menu Important The attribute box labelled Message changes the message number of the selected message It does not select a message in the Message List To select a message manually If the message is visible highlight it A highlighted message is selected and its message text appears automatically in the Message Edit box To highlight select a message e click on the message e select the Message List and use the up or down arrow keys Note Double click a message to highlight the message s text in the Message Edit box If the message is not visible select the Message List and scroll it up or down through the list until the message is visible using e arrow keys e Page Up or Page Down keys e the vertical scroll bar The Message List vertical scroll bar appears w
256. message number A chained message has exactly the same attributes as if it were not chained When the first message in a chain is triggered it is displayed or queued After it is terminated if the next message in the chain has the same display line as the previous message it has priority over messages in the queue and is displayed has a different display line assigned and that line is free the message is displayed has a different display line assigned and that line is occupied the message is appended to the Message Queue e Select the Enable check box then select the chained Message Number from the To spin control e Or highlight the current number and type the chained Message Number Any message in the application may be chained to another A chain may even be circular with the last message triggering the first message A circular chain can be useful in certain cases To break the chain e tell the terminal operator to do a Powerup Reset or trigger Special message 9901 Clear Display ASCII Triggering devices ASCII Triggering devices do not support embedded display variables in chained messages A MessageView terminal with a Remote I O daughterboard Catalog Nos 2706 M1D1 M1N1 or M1F1 and firmware that supports a Slave Port can act as a master device with up to 126 slave devices Each Slave device at a specific Node Address displays the messages sent to its Node Address Slaved messages may c
257. mote I O port of a Message View terminal Also supports Block Transfer of data that is moved using block transfer ladder instructions S Save The process of transferring data stored in RAM memory to a disk file Scaling Mathematically manipulating data so it may be stored in one form in a Controller and displayed in another form in the Message View terminal Select Select an action to activate a chosen highlighted item In some cases a mouse click can Choose and select an item in one step Slave Device A device that receives and displays messages from a Master Device but does not initiate communication Slave Devices include the Message View 421D Slave Device terminal Catalog 2706 M1D and several of the Allen Bradley Dataliner family Slaving A system in which a Master Device controls one or more Slave Devices remotely A MessageView terminal with a daughterboard and firmware that supports Slave Port can act as a master device for up to 127 Slave Devices SLC Allen Bradley trademarked name for Small Logic Controller Special Messages Messages that affect the Message View terminal They are not displayed or sent to the HE Stack but may be triggered as part of the application Publication 2706 817 G 10 Glossary Publication 2706 817 Startup Message The message displayed when the Message View terminal powers up Status Bar The horizontal bar at the bottom of the Message Editor window
258. ms Setup nvalid Tag Msg number Undefined Embedded Numeric Display Tag nvalid Tag Msg Anumber with Embedded Entry Handshake Tag name nvalid Tag Msg Anumber with Embedded Entry Notify Tag name nvalid name Tag Return Number for Ack Tag must be of type Unsigned Integer nvalid Tag Return Number for FKey Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer Invalid Tag Second Read Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer Invalid Tag Second Write Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer Invalid Tag Tag name Bit address specified but tag isn t Bit data type Publication 2706 817 Validation Error Messages Meaning Scale value of zero is not allowed The tag is controlled by the PLC and is read by the Terminal The tag must be in the Output image or be in a BTW Block Transfer Write The tag address is not in the discrete 1 0 image of the rack or in the block transfer s configured for the Terminal The tag is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack The Minimum Data Entry Limit assigned to he tag will not fit within the Numeric Variable Entry Field Width he assigned tag is the wrong data type The Node Name assigned to this tag used in this message does not match the assigned PLC Scanner Name There is no Node Name assigned to the tag used in this message ag is undefined in
259. n MVA file that you want to verify Or select Browse to search for an existing MVA file 4 Select OK to open the Application Verification dialog SWEDA with arr boomer TOLL Vere Lied eee a Wien da aade TLE Serves Cammi MS Aler rieg DC ommpenep Ir fb phi omer Tlak Aie to nri abiak Comer een on lca raah riaa Appir ation Til When done the dialog shows whether the applications match or not Publication 2706 817 11 18 Validating Applications and Transferring Files Terminal Upgrade nee Soave fim Workstation Sctop Upgrade Terminal 1 ACTTAHEHA 2 TEST MEA 3 BACT 4 LIME 1 JET Exit Publication 2706 817 Allen Bradley may send a new version of Message View terminal firmware to registered users For most efficient terminal operation upgrade the firmware in each of your terminals as soon as possible Before upgrading the terminal 111 e DFI INTERCHANGE communication driver must be installed and loaded on the computer see Page 2 3 e Driver communication parameters must be checked using the Workstation Setup command on the File menu See Page 2 7 e Cable connections must be correct See the Message View Terminal User Manual Publication 2706 816 for details e The MessageView terminal must have its RS 232 port set to MessageBuilder communication parameters See Page 5 3 for an example of how to switch settings To install a firmware upgrade in a MessageView terminal 1 Choo
260. n a None n a Yes Date Sample date 10 n a None n a Yes Signed or Unsigned eee vane 12 ten Read Integer BCD ves pay 9 Scaled if required ASCII Vanable A 32 n a Read Character Array Yes Display Write Signed or Unsigned Fixed Integer BCD No Numeric Variable A Scaled if required 12 Keyboard Entry Controlled Optional Notification and Bit Handshake Bit Write Character Array No ASCII Variable Optional Entry i a na otification and Bit Handshake Bit ASCII Control Character n a n a None n a No Only if Ctrl G is Graphics Gr n a n a None n a inserted before Gr Placeholders Publication 2706 817 The number of symbols in the placeholder for a variable represents the field width specified in its dialog Placeholders for all the variables in this table are displayed in the Message Edit box in a different color from the rest of the text You can change this color using the Preferences dialog See Page 7 15 A placeholder may be removed using the Backspace key or the Cut tool or command It can be pasted only when the entire message is copied and pasted as described on Page 7 8 jem Whe Darts Dis pey Bomtcric Feeenble Wis pier ARCH Vani siis Disp Maumere ectoble etry ASCH Varieties Eniri ARCH Conkal Chor Graphi Eat Variste Enable fuscia Ef Creating Messages 7 19 Adding Time or Date to a message Time and Date displays may be included in messages but not more than one of each per message To add e
261. n each menu when no application file is open File menu has commands that e create and open application files e configure the computer workstation for file transfer e download new firmware to a MessageView 421 terminal e list the last four applications that were opened for easy reopening e exit MessageBuilder software View menu has commands that toggle the Standard Toolbar on and off e toggle the Status Bar on and off Application menu has commands that e manage projects and their devices e upload an application file or the Historical Event Stack file from a Message View 421 terminal e download the time and date to the terminal s Real Time Clock e allow the user to set preferences Help menu has commands that e identify the versions of MessageBuilder and AB Utilities software and the registration serial number e access topics in the MessageBuilder Help utility Four tools are active e New File e Open File e both Help tools Publication 2706 817 3 4 MessageBuilder Basics Message Editor Table View When an application is opened the Message Editor Table View Title Bar Menu Bar Standard Toolbar Message Edit Toolbar Attribute Controls Message List Status Bar Publication 2706 817 appears Messages are created and edited in this View and have their attributes set The Message Edit box displays the highlighted message from among those in the Message Lis
262. ncluding INTERCHANGE utility 1A B Utilities disk e This manual MessageBuilder Configuration Software manual Publication No 2706 817 MessageView 421 Display Terminal user manual Publication No 2706 816 This manual uses the following conventions e Software or MessageBuilder software refers to the MessageBuilder Configuration Software e Terminal refers to a Message View 421 terminal e Windows with a capital W refers to Microsoft Windows or to the Window menu in MessageBuilder MessageBuilder windows are written with a small w e Keys on the keyboard appear in boldface small capital letters the Shift key on the computer appears as SHIFT in the text the Acknowledge key on the terminal appears as ACK e A hand with italicized text in the left margin gives helpful hints MessageBuilder software often gives a choice of methods for selecting a command Use the most convenient one e Select a tool on the toolbar A toolbar is displayed along the top of the screen specific to what you are doing Simply click on the appropriate tool and it is activated Appendix B illustrates all tools in all the toolbars e Use a key combination Certain commands in the File and Edit menus have a key combination Use it instead of selecting the command e Select a menu command Click the menu name and then the command name Or press the ALT key and the underlined letter of the menu name to drop the
263. nd Date of printout vale a Page Number Consecutive page numbers Title page is 1 User Defined Text Up to 80 characters including spaces 3 When done select the OK button The next page shows where each option appears in the page header and title page of a report Publication 2706 817 12 4 Creating Reports The title page is the first page printed in a report MessageBuilder Application Report ACTT4 ACTT4 MBA lt Project Application Name Application Version 9 Last Saved 11 20 95 08 51 54 Version and Save Information 11 20 95 12 03 15 _____ User Defined Title Text a Date and Time when Report was Generated User Defined text Header information appears on every page of a report except the title page 10 09 95 12 03 15 ACTT4 Page 2 lt Page Number User Defined Page Tex Application Name User Defined text Date and Time when Report was Generated Publication 2706 817 Previewing a Report Preview Creating Reports 12 5 The Preview option lets you view a report before printing it or sending it to a file You can then make the necessary adjustments before printing it To preview a report 1 Select the Preview button in the Report Setup dialog The Preview workspace opens showing the title page of the report kiri dap Ral ie Peta Pose ge ATTA Td a 2 Select one of the following buttons at the top of the worksp
264. nfiguration Software C RSI IC READMEKT TXT INTERCHANGE Software C AB README TXT AB Utilities Software The same MessageBuilder and INTERCHANGE software text files are available through the MessageBuilder Group icon The RELEASE TXT file or icon contains e last minute updates to the manual e installation notes e a list of any known problems involving MessageBuilder software e alist of all files installed in the default directories Or if you chose not to use the default directories during installation a list of all files installed in the directories you selected The READMEKT TXT file or icon contains e information on software and hardware compatibility with INTERCHANGE software e new and changed features in Release 1 00 and later e alist of all files installed in C RSINIC directory e a list of problems and of problems in previous releases that have been fixed e application notes Installing with Windows 95 The installation procedure is the same when the operating system is Windows 95 Note The version of INTERCHANGE must be 6 1 or later to allow you to perform application uploads and downloads Registering Your Copy of MessageBuilder software Please take time to complete and send in the registration card you received with MessageBuilder Configuration Software packet Registration entitles you to e automatic notification of upgrades and revisions to MessageBuilder Configuration Software e technical
265. nfiguration before proper communications can be established See the discussion on Page 5 3 Terminal and Communication Setup 10 11 Message View terminal as a slave device When a MessageView terminal is set up as a slave device it is considered to be a slave in a master slave relationship The slave device terminal receives commands from a slaving master device but does not initiate communications itself See Page 4 18 for a discussion of slave devices Because of the architecture of the Message View 421D Slave Device terminal Catalog No 2706 M1D an application with the communication parameters and a blank message needs to reside in the terminal s memory All Message View 421D terminals Catalog No 2706 M1D are shipped with an application residing in memory for this purpose Consult the Slave Device section of the MessageView terminal user manual for more details Auxiliary Device port The MessageView terminal configured with a daughterboard communications card Remote I O can use the RS 232 port as an auxiliary port for communications to e an ASCII Input device e a slave device the MessageView terminal is a master device The Auxiliary port parameters are configured under the Aux Port tab in the Terminal Setup dialog See the section starting on Page 10 27 to configure the auxiliary port Note Since the same RS 232 port on the terminal is used for communications with an ASCII Triggering device or a slave devic
266. nication Publication 2706 817 Return message number with Ctrl N Certain types of messages have their message number returned to the ASCII Triggering device using Ctrl K Ctrl I or Ctrl F The terminal uses the Ctrl N command to report all other types of messages when they are triggered Format Ctrl N Message CR Message range 1 to 9999 limited to the subset used in the application Example Ctrl N 637 CR e The terminal reports that message 637 was triggered Report the HE Stack status with Ctrl H Used by the terminal to report to the ASCII Triggering device that the Historical Event Stack is 85 95 or 100 full Format Ctrl H HE Stack Status CR e HE Stack Status range 85 95 or 100 Example Ctrl H 85 CR e The Historical Event Stack is 85 full On a remote I O network the MessageView 421 terminal appears like any other Remote I O rack Configure the terminal to occupy all or part of a single rack up to 128 I O Two types of addresses can be assigned to application variables on a Remote I O network e discrete a single input or output bit address block transfer a series of contiguous word addresses transferred as a unit Important Plan the addresses before starting to create the application for most efficient use of memory The direction of data transfer over a remote I O link is from the point of view of the logic controller e entry variables are BTR block transfer read
267. nly on FILE Orientation Paper Portrait Size Letter 8 172 x 11 in Landscape Source l El 2 Select Generic Text Only on FILE from the list of Specific Printers If it is not listed it must be installed first 3 Select OK to exit the Printer Setup dialog 4 Select the Print button in the Report Setup dialog to open the Print to File dialog Print To File Output File Name 5 Enter the name of the file in which to save the report The default directory is C AB MBWIN 6 Select OK to print the report to a file If the file name already exists a dialog gives the option of overwriting it or of entering another file name Select Cancel at any time to abort the printing 7 Select Close to return to the Message Editor Table View Publication 2706 817 File Menu File New Ctrl N Open Ctrl 0 Close Save Ctrl S Save As Reports Workstation Setup Upgrade Terminal 1 SMP DEMO MBA 2 SMP SD MBA 3 FKTRYS MBA AFKTRY MBA Appendix A Menus and Commands Summary Use commands on the File menu to handle application files New Opens a dialog for creating a new application file for a specific Message View terminal Open Opens an existing application file and displays a list of all messages in the application Close Closes the current application file Save Saves the application file and replaces the previous version store
268. ns deletions or edits to attributes embedded variables and text Undoing and Redoing editing changes Undo reverses all editing changes including changes in the message s attributes to the currently selected message It can even restore a deleted message To Undo changes e Click on the Undo tool Or press CTRL Z e Or select Undo on the Edit menu Until the message has been stored once the Undo tool or command is greyed out After it has been stored additions or cuts to the message are reversed one at a time until the Undo tool or command is greyed out again Redo reverses the effects of an Undo restoring the editing and attribute changes to the message To Redo the changes e Click on the Redo tool e Or press CTRL Y e Or select Redo on the Edit menu The message s Undo changes are restored one item at a time until the Redo tool or command is greyed out again Even if another message is highlighted the last message that had changes undone is returned to the Message Edit box Creating Messages 7 11 Sorting messages 1 Select Sort on the Edit menu to open the Sort Messages dialog Delene Measage AbeDeicic janci Meerane Kat binaga Fod Rigpe Ba penher Tapie Sort Messaages Sort On j Trigger C Text Topic Master List To specify which attribute of the messages in the Message List to sort on select one of the radio buttons under the Sort
269. nts Search For Help On or How To Use Help on the Help menu depending on what you need to know Select About MessageBuilder to find the copyright date and version number of MessageBuilder software if you need to call Allen Bradley for assistance Introducing MessageBuilder Configuration Software 1 3 Message Editor Table View Use this dialog to create and edit messages and their attributes used in the application program The Message Editor Table View contains the menu commands and tools needed to bring up all other dialogs the Terminal View and the Tag Editor Message Editor Terminal View Use this view to view the current message approximately as it will appear in the MessageView terminal An application is designed for a certain type of terminal The Terminal View displays the face of that terminal type Tag Editor Use the Tag Editor to enter update print and import export application tags See Chapter 8 Each variable requires a tag which defines how the variable interacts with a controller address Enter all the tags at once in the Tag Editor Table View before starting to create any messages If a tag needs further editing when it is assigned to a variable use the Tag Editor Form View PLC Controller MessageView 421 Terminal Terminal and Communication Setup rill ii Access all operating and runtime communication parameters for the TAA Message View 421 terminal from the Terminal Setup
270. nts of the columns The number of characters that fit in a column may be different from the printed output depending on the fonts available Set up Header Lines 1 and 2 as required Each line can be up to 255 characters long See Header shortcuts below Select OK then select OK in the Print dialog Publication 2706 817 8 16 Working with Tags Entering Header Information Do this to enter Header text For example To print this Most text prints as typed This is the header type This is the header Type one of the following character sequences to save time 12 amp D current date 3 To print this 2 2 95 Project 1 amp N page number 3 type sD amp P amp T current time sv view name To print a blank line type amp B amp P project name To print an amp type as amp B space use this to print a blank line A character sequence that is not defined sa product name is printed as is For example if you enter Allen Bradley Tag Editor 22 then amp Z is printed 1 Character sequences are not case sensitive 2 Ifthe expanded textis larger than 255 characters the printed output may be distorted or cut off 3 These values are based on the computer s Control Panel settings See the Microsoft Windows user manual for information about the Control P anel Aligning the Headers Left justified text is the default alignment e For centered text type amp l before the t
271. numbers Terminal Setup Lists runtime communications and setup parameters for MessageView terminals Tag Attributes Lists all tag definitions in the application Function Keys Lists all function keys used in the application and their attributes LED Indicators Lists all function key LEDs used in the application and their attributes Publication 2706 817 12 2 Creating Reports Creating and Printing a Report Woebsigign Saip Upgrade Tenniaal 1 ACTTA WEA 7 TEST WEA 7 LIME RAHA 4 MAN TEST MIA Publication 2706 817 Use the Reports command to create a customized report documenting all or specific aspects of an application Reports are useful for tracking application updates and changes 112 To set up a report 1 Choose Reports from the File menu to open the Report Setup dialog Report Setup l Description I Terminal Setup I Messages Tag Attributes Message Attributes Function Keys LED Indicators Messages an So m Include AI Topics Select the application components to include in the report by selecting the appropriate check boxes under Application To remove a component clear the box Indicate which messages will be included in the report Select All to include all messages Select From to include a range of messages Enter the range of message numbers in the From and To boxes Select the Graphic Images che
272. o PLC following loss of f nee l Disable Send Values at Power Up communications and at powerup Enable e e RIO has this always enabled Allow a demonstration using a MessageView Disable Simulate Mode terminal not connected to a logic controller or Enable e e any devices Startup Msg The message to be displayed at powerup mole e e 1 to 9900 a Whether a bit trigger or a value trigger has bit Trigger Priority higher priority value y Values at Power Up Send data type as Preset or as in the Last Preset active communications state Last Publication 2706 817 The time and date are also set globally Global Configuration Parameters F 3 Parameter nanie Description Default MessageView MessageBuilder P Range 421 Terminals Software 1 Date Day The current day of the month 2031 e e MDN Date Format Order Setting the order of items in the date D MIY Y MID e 1995 Date Format Year Display How to display the year 95 e Date Format Lead Zero Whether February 2 should be 2 2 default or Disable 3 02 02 Enable Date Format Separators The symbol to separate day month and year e any single character 1 Date Month The current month of the year 2012 e e 1995 Date Year The current year 1996 to 2094 e Time Format Format separators for time display e any single character nm Disable ime Format Lead Zero Whether 9 03 default
273. o a MessageView terminal APS Software Acronym for Advanced Programming Software The APS Import Export Utility uses this software which works with the SLC logic controller only ASCII A code defining all the alphanumeric characters including punctuation so they may be used by a computer A number of Enhanced ASCII codes are available which have accented characters mathematical and graphical symbols and so forth Publication 2706 817 G 2 Glossary Publication 2706 817 ASCII Input Device A bar code scanner or other device that sends alphanumeric data to a Message View terminal A terminal with two ports and firmware that supports ASCII Input may have its RS 232 port connected to an ASCII Input device Data input by such a device is stored as alphanumeric characters in an ASCII entry or display variable ASCII Triggering Device A device that can trigger messages in a Message View terminal via a serial communications link It reads and writes data through the terminal s RS 232 port Attribute In MessageBuilder software information that determines how a Message will appear on the Message View terminal e g text size how it interacts with other messages e g chained and how it is used by the terminal e g logged in the HE Stack Auxiliary Device A device connected to the RS 232 port of a Message View terminal that is being controlled through its Remote T O port by a Logic Controller An auxiliary d
274. o put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as R Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry The tag is controlled by the Terminal and is Write Tag name must be of type Input or read by the PLC The tag must be in the Input BTR mage or be in a BTR Block Transfer Read Invalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded Entry The tag offset value is outside the range of Write Tag name offset not in range 32768 and 32767 pee eg eilibria change tie ay Olet Use the tag editor to enter a different address Invalid Tag Msg Hnumber Embedded Entry The tag is assigned the same address as the for the tag or use the Terminal Setup Comms Write Tag name overlaps Discrete I O Rack Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest S etup Block Transfer dialog to disable block Control S tatus byte byte in the discrete I O rack transfers if they are not being used vel ag sg Minumber embedded Tag is undefined in the project database Use the tag editor to define the tag Numeric Display Tag name Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or select the embedded variable in the message and select the appropriate tag using the Format Edit Variable dialog Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer The Embedded Numeric Display Tag must be a Signed integer unsigned integer or bit data type nvalid
275. o this address Allen Bradley Global Technical Support 6680 Beta Drive Mayfield Village Ohio 44143 Or fax the card to 216 646 6770 This manual is a resource to help you design message display applications that will run in a Message View 421 terminal Since there are many options designed to give a smooth running operation under any circumstances you should become familiar with the choices to be made MessageBuilder Configuration Software runs under Microsoft Windows You should know how to use a mouse choose commands and work with windows and dialog boxes To learn basic windows techniques read the User s Guide that came with your Microsoft Windows package PLC and SLC logic controllers and ASCII Triggering devices are an important part of the systems that MessageBuilder applications control You should understand how controllers work especially the program and data files See the user manuals for the controllers used in your operation Publication 2706 817 P 2 Preface Software Package Conventions t The Release txt and Readmekt txt files contain the most recent installation information Diad DN Key combinations Wokiimiun Seip Upgrade Teominal 1 ADTT Wilii E DAACTTA MEA 2 MEI HEA j DEFAULT MEA Ext Publication 2706 817 The MessageBuilder Configuration Software package Catalog No 2706 MB1 comes with e 4 3 5 inch installation disks 3 MessageBuilder Software disks i
276. oes Decimal Point Fixed Point Position C Floating Point Publication 2706 817 Digits The Field Width spin control specifies the maximum number of characters 0 to 9 and that can appear in the display If the value from the logic controller exceeds the specified field width the field on the terminal display fills with gt gt gt symbols Default is 12 To change the field width select or enter a value in the spin control To fill empty data positions with zeros rather than leaving them blank enable the Fill With Zeros check box Default is disabled Value to Display 65 932 f N 00065932 65932 8 Digit Field Width 8 Digit Field Width Zero Fill No Zero Fill Decimal Point A logic controller can store only integer values so the value sent to a display variable is always an integer However if the value is scaled it may be displayed as a decimal See the section on scaling beginning on Page 4 37 The Decimal Point area specifies whether a scaled value displays with a fixed or floating point decimal Value from C ll tele alue from Controller Scale 0001 aer6r Offset 94 32767 x 0001 94 gt Displayed Value 97 2767 e Select Fixed Point to position the decimal point 0 to 4 places to the left of the rightmost character Select or enter the number of decimal places in the Position spin control The decimal position must be less than the field wi
277. oes 3 7 95 7 3 1995 14 56 02 56 Year Month Day With User With Seconds With User 95 7 3 Defined Separator 14 56 29 Defined Separator 7 3 95 14 56 29 Terminal and Communication Setup 10 19 To select the time or date format used by the terminal 1 Select the Time Date tab from the Terminal Setup dialog erminal hei leas feiup Adeirced Timas Cota Sista Togs tum Pai Daie Fomm hie upr C phr O yuD ETTER e Sample PP Lesig Senn 07 ee T pang Tan O A a pee lima ama G Phad pa o D how SO 5 55 jar Tapii ei ret Pi Leg Zen 07 ea Foo are aaa I Dipisp Sacoredc 2 Set the Date Format and the Time Format as required 3 Select the OK button to save all the settings from the Terminal Setup dialog and return to the main Message Editor Table View Or select another tab and continue setting up the terminal for the application Or select the Cancel button to return to the Message Editor Table View without saving any Terminal Setup settings Publication 2706 817 10 20 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2706 817 Use the Date Format area to set the options for the date format The Sample area lower right displays the format as it is selected Option Used to Order Select the order of the month M day D and year Y Default is MDY Specify the symbol to separate the month day and year Any Separator character may be used Default is the slash w Leadin
278. oewnioed Upload _ ATC Doel oad HE Steck Upland Teminal petip Special Messages function Keys LED indicare Validating Applications and Transferring Files 11 9 4 In the File Name box enter the path and name of an MVA file in which to save the file on disk Or select Browse to search for a specific MVA file that will be overwritten with this new application 5 Select OK from the Download Application dialog The application is validated translated and saved to a DOS file Note If errors or warnings are detected the Exceptions dialog opens and displays them e Errors must be corrected before the download can proceed e Warnings should be corrected but the download will proceed even if they are not corrected 6 A dialog appears when the application has been successfully translated Select OK to return to the Message Editor Table View Note Error messages may appear during this download See Appendix E for a list of error messages and how to correct the problems The computer s date and time may be downloaded to the Real Time Clock RTC in the Message View terminal Before downloading the RTC file 106 e DFI INTERCHANGE communication driver must be installed and loaded on the computer See Page 2 3 e Driver communication parameters must be checked using the Workstation Setup command on the File menu See Page 2 7 e Cable connections must be correct See the Message View Terminal User Manu
279. of each enabled function key For instance F1 Start F2 Stop Pump Pressing a Function key sets or clears a bit value assigned to the Function key s write tag address The controller logic program can use the write tag address for a variety of control operations such as a machine s start and stop functions ATTENTION Do not use a Message View terminal for emergency stops or other controls critical for the safety of personnel or equipment Use separate hard wired operator interface devices Global attributes Individual Function key attributes are globally defined For instance if F1 is defined as momentary every time it is enabled for a message it is a Momentary Function Key If a Latched Function Key is needed you must enable a different key The Message View terminal supports three types of Function key operations as global attributes e momentary e maintained e latched See the section on each type starting on Page 4 23 Other global attributes are discussed in these sections Planning an Application 4 21 Enabling and disabling function keys Function keys are enabled only when a message assigned Function key operations is displayed activated For example PRESS F1 Start Pump F1 F2 and F3 are enabled F2 Stop Pump F4 through F 16 are disabled F3 Sound Warning Note Unless a Function key is specifically enabled for the active message it is disabled on the terminal ATTENTION Asa safety precauti
280. of the rename Select Yes to rename the project or No to cancel the rename The Existing Projects box now contains the new name not the old one To delete a project 1 Highlight a name or names in the Existing Projects box 2 Select the Delete button 3 A dialog with the name of the project asks for confirmation that it should be deleted Select Yes to delete it or No to retain it If more than one project is to be deleted choose either the Yes button for each project or the Yes to All button The deleted project and all its tags are removed permanently ATTENTION Do not use DOS or Windows delete commands to delete projects Important Ifa project is deleted accidentally see the section on Restoring a Project on Page 9 9 Publication 2706 817 9 4 Managing Projects Publication 2706 817 To create a new project 79 1 2 Select the New Project Name box and type a unique name up to 32 characters long It cannot start with a number or contain spaces Select the New button The Existing Projects box now lists the new name To copy a project 1 Select the New Project Name box and type a unique name up to 32 characters long It cannot start with a number or contain spaces Highlight the name of the project to be copied in the Existing Projects box Select the Copy button If the project has an application open it cannot be copied A dialog appears i i Premier CTT Con A di
281. olled by the PLC and is read by the Terminal The tag must be in the Output image or be in a BTW Block Transfer Write The assigned tag is the wrong data type The tag address is notin the discrete 1 0 image of the rack or in the block transfer s configured for the Terminal The tag is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Status Byte the lowest byte in the discrete I O rack The assigned tag is the wrong data type Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as W Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Redefine the block transfer address or reduce the total number of bit triggered messages Use the Communication Setup Block Transfer dialog to define the proper address Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a BTW Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Communication Setup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Tran
282. olve the conflicting attributes Disable the Scroll Message attribute for messages that are only Historical Event Stacked Use the tag editor to change the Node Name for this tag or change the PLC Scanner Name in Terminal Setup Comms Setup dialog Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms Setup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup Control Tag dialog to select an appropriate tag Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup C omms Setup Block Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer that has its mode assigned as R Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Use the tag editor to correct the PLC address for the Ack tag Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Terminal Setup Control Tag dialog to select an appropriate tag Message Invalid Tag Acknowledge Handshake Tag name isn ta valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels Invalid Tag Acknowledge Handshake Tag name must be of type Output or BTW Invalid Tag Acknowledge Handshake Tag name overlaps Discrete 1 0 Rack Control S tatus byte name nvalid Tag Bit Trigger Tag
283. ommends EMM386 Driver Self Test When enabled this option requires KT devices to run self diagnostics before loading driver configuration MessageBuilder recommends Perform the tests RNA Parameters Use upper memory for packet buffers when enabled places packet buffer space in upper MS DOS memory MessageBuilder recommends Use upper memory Number of solicited buffers allocates the number of packet buffers 1 to 200 Each buffer uses 300 bytes of memory The default is 20 MessageBuilder recommends 20 buffers Number of unsolicited data items allocates space for unsolicited messages 0 to 200 MessageBuilder recommends 0 data items which allocates no space PCMK Enabler Selection Specifies the Enabler to use for the 1784 PCMK on the DH Device Driver Specific Enabler uses PCMKINIT or RSIPCMK This Enabler requires you to enter the socket number containing the card in the driver dialog The INTERCHANGE socket numbers are 0 to 7 In Windows 95 the sockets are numbered 0 to 8 Generic Enabler uses PCENABLE This Enabler requires that you enter a Memory address and IRQ Interrupt MessageBuilder recommends Ignores Publication 2706 817 2 12 Installing MessageBuilder Software Troubleshooting the Installation Procedure Publication 2706 817 Possible difficulties with installation If you used the default installation procedure the Path in your AUTOEXEC BAT file now includes the AB BIN an
284. ommunications Terminal and Communication Setup 10 9 A MessageView terminal s RS 232 port may be used as e A MessageBuilder communications link port all terminals e an ASCII Trigger controlling port Catalog Nos 2706 M1D MIN MIF e a slave device port Catalog No 2706 M1D e an Auxiliary Device port Catalog Nos 2706 M1D1 M1N1 M1F1 MessageBuilder communications link port The RS 232 port on all MessageView 421 terminals is used in one of its configurations as the link between the terminal and MessageBuilder Configuration software The RS 232 port parameters for this link are fixed not user configurable See Page 5 2 for the DF1 parameters The section starting on Page 11 6 explains uploading to and downloading from the MessageBuilder software You can configure the terminal to default to MessageBuilder configuration parameters on power up see Page 10 16 ASCII Trigger controlling port or Slave Device port This section shows how to define runtime parameters for a terminal controlled by an ASCII Triggering device and a terminal as a slave device Both devices communicate via an ASCII serial port the main RS 232 port To configure the RS 232 communications for ASCII Triggering and Slave Device 1 In the Terminal Setup dialog verify the terminal type selected in the Catalog and Version field Publication 2706 817 10 10 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2706 817 2 Select the Comms Set
285. omputer using DF1 point to point communication protocol e DFI parameters in the Message View terminal used in point to point communications with a computer containing MessageBuilder software are predefined and non configurable e DFI parameters in the computer were defined when the INTERCHANGE Configuration Utility was installed See Page 2 7 DF1 parameters are given here for reference only Parameter DF1 Settings Baud Rate 19 2K Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Hardware Handshaking None Error Type CRC RS 232 port Auxiliary Device configuration If the terminal is to communicate with an Auxiliary Device one of those listed on Page 5 3 you must configure the RS 232 port communication parameters for that device Configuration options will be discussed starting on Page 5 3 and configuration procedures starting on Page 10 9 RS 232 Port Communication Communications Overview 5 3 The RS 232 port of the MessageView terminal may be used to communicate with e a personal computer running MessageBuilder see Page 11 6 or the File Transfer Utility see Page 11 15 e an ASCII Triggering Device see the list on Page 5 7 e an ASCII Input Device see the list on Page 5 6 e one or more slave devices see the list on Page 5 6 e a master device see the list on Page 5 8 Switching RS 232 settings in the Message View terminal The MessageView terminal shares its RS 232 port between communicati
286. on enable only the function keys that are used in the message Unused function keys should remain disabled since adverse effects could result All 16 Function keys may be enabled for a single message if required However only one message assigned to Function key operation can be displayed at a time Jog and non jog modes Messages with momentary maintained or latched function keys enabled may be defined as either jog or non jog Messages are defined as non jog if their Auto Clear attribute is enabled Non jog messages are terminated at the completion of a Function key operation including Hold Time For example PRESS The message is terminated after any of F1 F1 Start Pump F2 or F3 is pressed and released and the Hold Time if any expires F2 Stop Pump F3 Sound Warning Messages are defined as jog if their Auto Clear attribute is disabled Jog messages including their associated Function keys remain displayed active even after a function key is pressed and its Wait Time has expired For example PRESS The message remains active after any of F1 Start Pump F1 F2 or F3 is pressed and released and F2 Stop Pump ime i i F3 Sound Waming the Hold Time if any expires Publication 2706 817 4 22 Planning an Application Publication 2706 817 Jog mode is an aspect of the Auto Clear attribute which becomes apparent in messages that have Function keys enabled It is non global For example Message 5 w
287. on key remains in its changed state until the controller unlatches it but it is not active after its message is terminated Publication 2706 817 System Requirements Chapter 2 Installing MessageBuilder Software This chapter covers the following topics e System requirements e Installing MessageBuilder software e INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility e Troubleshooting the installation procedure The minimum hardware requirements for installing and running MessageBuilder software are e a personal computer using Intel 386 or 486 processor or equivalent e aminimum 4 MB of memory 8 MB recommended with minimum of 10 MB permanent swap under virtual memory e a hard disk with 12 MB of free space e a3 5 inch high density 1 44 MB disk drive e a VGA or better monitor that is supported by Windows e an RS 232 communications port e acable for downloading uploading applications between the computer and the RS 232 port of a MessageView 421 terminal Order Catalog No 2706 NC13 Also highly recommended are e a mouse compatible with Windows e aprinter that supports graphics compatible with Windows The minimum software requirements for installing and running MessageBuilder software are e MS DOS operating system version 3 31 or later MS DOS version 5 0 or later recommended e Microsoft Windows version 3 1 or later or Windows for Workgroups version 3 11 or later Note MessageBuilder software utilizing IN
288. on of the message It overrides a character embedded by Auto Format Field 4 Slave Address The Slave Address Byte is a single byte field that specifies the Node Address of the receiving slave device Valid slave node addresses are integers from to 127 except for 13 Note If a Slave Device has a Node Address of 127 it will respond to all messages regardless of the slave packet address If a message packet has a Node Address of 127 it will be received by all slave devices on the network Field 5 Line Number Byte The Line Number Byte indicates the display line on which the message will appear The Line Number Byte is automatically embedded in the slave packet based on the message s Line attribute Line Attribute Selected Line Number Embedded 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 to 4 depending on the line where the Master a device displays the message All 50 The All Line attribute 50 is used with the Ctrl C Optional Control Byte to clear all lines on the slave device The Line Number Byte function depends on the slave device and its functions Consult the slave device s user manual for the line configurations it supports Creating Messages 7 45 Field 6 Carriage Return The Carriage Return decimal 13 indicates the end of a message packet It is embedded at the end of the Slave Packet automatically Slaving attributes Enable Select Enable to send this message out the RS 232 port to the slave d
289. ons with a computer that has MessageBuilder software installed and communications with an Auxiliary Device The terminal s RS 232 port must be switched configured to the proper setting before communications can be established Example The terminal s RS 232 port s last communication was from a bar code reader an ASCII Input device Next the HE Stack file has to be uploaded to a personal computer that has MessageBuilder software running The terminal operator must configure the RS 232 port as a MessageBuilder port to establish communication with the computer To do this the operator enters the terminal s Front Panel Editor The first menu item Change Port To MessageBuilder allows the operator to switch to the MessageBuilder port settings in one quick step without entering half a dozen communication parameters After the HE Stack file has been uploaded the terminal operator switches the Change Port To menu item to ASCII Input and returns the terminal to Run Mode Important If you find your computer cannot communicate with the MessageView terminal verify that the RS 232 port is set to the correct communication device Publication 2706 817 5 4 Communications Overview Publication 2706 817 If the Front Panel Editor Change Port To menu item reads e Change Port To MessageBuilder the RS 232 port is currently set to communicate with the Auxiliary Device the application is designed for e
290. ontain variables graphics and message attributes set up by the MessageBuilder software with the following cautions e A graphic must be preceded by a Ctrl G or the terminal will replace the graphic with two spaces before sending the message to the slave e The terminal removes embedded data entry variables from a message before sending the message to the slave Publication 2706 817 7 42 Creating Messages Slave Packet format The MessageView terminal supports transmission of messages to a slave device using Simplex protocol The Simplex protocol consists of a data packet with 6 data fields Optional ASCII Text Optional Carriage and special Slave Line Contents Control Display Return Bye Control Mode Byte Address Number CR Y Characters y pe 0to100 1 1 1 1 of Bytes Note Simplex protocol is compatible with Allen Bradley DL20 DL40 DL50 and MessageView 421D slave devices Field 1 Optional Control Byte This is an optional field which indicates the text size of the slaved message as it is transmitted The following characters are used Byte Decimal Value Definition Default Quarter height text Ctrl S 19 Half height text Ctrl W 23 Full height text Ctrl C 3 Clear Display line based on Line Number Byte Used with Line Number Byte to specify line The optional Control Byte may be omitted If omitted the default size will be Quarter height text If the Auto Format
291. or ASCII data e Variable Position range 1 to 10 Note Variable position is the position of the variable in the message counting from left to right If the message contains only one display variable the position is 1 e MV Address range 1 to 127 for a single node 127 to address all devices Data enclosed in quotation marks is interpreted as ASCII data even if it consists of numbers Example Ctrl V Press ACK 1 2 CR e The terminal at node 2 displays Press ACK in the first display variable in the currently active message Activate Deactivate an LED with Ctrl L Used by the ASCII Triggering device to toggle a specific LED in the terminal e Format Ctrl L LED LED State MV Address CR e LED range 1 to 16 e LED State range 0 or 1 0 represents the LED Off state 1 represents the LED On state e MV Address range 1 to 127 for a single node 127 to address all devices Example Ctrl L 4 1 22 CR e The terminal at node 22 turns LED 4 On Publication 2706 817 5 10 Communications Overview Publication 2706 817 Unlatch a latched function key with Ctrl U Used by the ASCII Triggering device to unlatch a specific latched function key in the terminal Format Ctrl U F key MV Address CR e F key range to 16 e MV Address range 1 to 127 for a single node 127 to address all devices Example Ctrl U 7 22 CR e The terminal at node 22 unlatches function key 7 The terminal then
292. or Entered Field Width 6 Entered Value Scale ae 122 9 E me Rounded x E Feles Offset 32 51 Displayed Value on Scale 1 8 a S 123 8 lt P Controller The decimal point is positioned to provide a display appropriate to the scaled value The terminal stores the full precision value and the controller stores the rounded value Note The value stored in the terminal may be different than the value sent to the controller because of rounding that occurs during pre scaling Publication 2706 817 MessageView 421 Terminal Ports Chapter 5 Communications Overview This chapter covers the following topics MessageView 421 terminal ports e RS 232 Port communication e ASCII Triggering commands Remote I O communication e Discrete I O e Block transfer Each Message View 421 terminal has a standard RS 232 port on the Main Logic Board It may also include an optional Remote I O RIO Communications daughterboard card The Message View terminal s two available ports are used as follows e The Remote I O Port optional connects to a logic controller on a Remote I O network e The RS 232 Port connects to the RS 232 port of a personal computer other devices set up in the application to be used when the terminal is in Run Mode which are listed on Page 5 3 Remote 1 0 Port Certain Message View terminals have a Remote I O Port installed Catalog Nos 2706 M1D1 M1N1 and M1F1 The RIO
293. orm View e Or select Summary from the View menu e Or choose List Editor from the Tools menu Note If you enter data in the Form View it will not appear in the Table View when you switch views Choose Refresh from the Window menu to display the new data Publication 2706 817 8 4 Working with Tags Broje ci Print Page Setup Exil Validating Tag Addresses Table View only ce M Publication 2706 817 To exit the Tag Editor Double click the Control menu box at the top left of the window e Or in Table View choose Exit from the Project menu to return to the Message Editor Table View e Or in Form View select OK or Cancel to return to the Table View then exit from the Table View Before starting to create tags set up the Tag Editor to validate tag addresses Address Validation checks only tags that are entered or modified while it is active Important Addresses for existing tags are not validated To activate address validation Choose Address Validation from the Options menu A check mark next to the command indicates that the option is activated The Tag Editor checks each address against the type of device specified in the Node Name field If the address is not valid for that device the Tag Editor displays the following warning HMRC Wamilng The sddregs tee Tile tag ba iiiki Da au wal fo edit the invalid miim Select To Return to the invalid address in the Table Vie
294. ow When you start MessageBuilder software the MessageBuilder window opens Maximize Button Control menu Box Title Bar Minimize Button See cw tt sia ZOE ee Aaplceion Hep Menu Bar al cone el Sep ted eee Standard Toolbar Command Woekstalion Betup Upgrade Teeminal Menu LOREAL lM 2 MENE TI RAL J D4K_TEST MBA 4 TODS MBA Arrow to Resize Window Border Mouse Pointer Caps Lock off Num Lock on Scroll Lock Status Bar off Feature How to use it Click to open the Control menu Contolmeny Box Or double click to close the current window Title Bar Drag to move a window Click a name on the menu bar to open the menu and display its commands Publication 2706 817 Senu Bar Or press ALT X where X is the underlined letter in the menu name Click a tool to carry outa command anuai Toolbar Can be toggled onoff using the View menu Click a command to choose it or to carry out its Command action Or type the underlined letter in the command name Status Bar Shows what the software is doing at the moment Can be toggled on off using the View menu Border Drag to enlarge or shrink the window Mouse Pointer Use to select an item or object Minimize Button Click to reduce the window to an icon Maximize Button Click to enlarge the window to the full size of the screen MessageBuilder Basics 3 3 Here are the commands available o
295. ow A 7 Table View 7 17 A 7 Terminal View 7 16 A 7 Tile 6 5 A 7 Window menu Tag Editor active views A 11 Arrange Icons A 11 Cascade A 11 Close All A 11 New 8 8 A 10 Refresh 8 3 A 10 Tile A 11 Windows dialog boxes See Dialogs menus See Menus MessageBuilder features 3 4 tools See Toolbars window diagram 3 2 Workstation See Computer Write tag ASCII Variable Entry 7 31 function keys 7 50 Numeric Variable Entry 7 29 Z Zoom tools 7 17 B 2 ON Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley a Rockwell Automation Business has been helping its customers improve productivity and quality for more than 90 years We design manufacture and support a broad Allen Bradley range of automation products worldwide They include logic processors power and motion control devices operator interfaces sensors and a variety of software Rockwell is one of the world s leading technology companies LSS Worldwide representation l Argentina e Australia e Austria e Bahrain e Belgium e Brazil e Bulgaria e Canada e Chile e China PRC e Colombia e Costa Rica e Croatia e Cyprus e Czech Republic e Denmark e Ecuador e Egypt El Salvador e Finland e France e Germany e Greece e Guatemala e Honduras e Hong Kong Hungary e Iceland e India e Indonesia e Ireland e Israel e Italy e Jamaica e J apan e J ordan e Korea e Kuwait e Lebanon e Malaysia e Me
296. owledgement or e contain entry variables Note On a MessageView 421F terminal a message with function keys enabled may be displayed at the same time as a message requiring acknowledgement ATTENTION When using Remote I O if the Acknowledge Message Return number global attribute is enabled assign the bit for the ACK key to the same Block transfer block as the Acknowledge Message Return number Bit Trigger A Bit Trigger is optional since a message can be triggered using its Message Number A Bit Trigger address must be unique and a bit address can be used to trigger only one message in the application Select the Enable check box to enable the Bit spin control To edit the number of the bit trigger e select a value on the Bit spin control or e highlight the current number then type the correct bit address An application can have up to 1024 bit triggers if Block Transfers are used but the maximum number of bit triggers is much smaller if only discrete I O is used Note In an application designed for use with an ASCII Triggering device bit triggers are not supported Triggering is discussed in the section starting on Page 4 9 Slaving Slave IX Enable X Auto Format Address 1 Chain IX Enable Length 20 nz g Relay Energize De energize Creating Messages 7 41 Chain A message may be chained to another That is a message can trigger another message by invoking its
297. p Edit menu has commands that e copy cut and paste text strings undo and restore changes in a message insert append and delete whole messages e find sort and renumber messages in the Message List e replace text strings in one or many messages e assign names to topics View menu has commands that e toggle the Standard Toolbar and the Status Bar on and off e zoom the Terminal View in or out Format menu has commands that specify what size the message text will be in the terminal display e align text in the display e display selected text in a message with Flash and Inverse Video insert and edit Time and Date Displays Numeric and ASCII Display Variables in a message e for Message View 421N and 421F terminals insert and edit Numeric Entry variables in a message e for terminals whose firmware can support these variables insert and edit Numeric Entry and ASCII Entry variables in a message e insert graphic symbols and ASCII characters in a message e for MessageView 421F terminals enable function keys for a message Publication 2706 817 3 6 MessageBuilder Basics Publication 2706 817 Application menu has commands that create tags and their attributes that will be assigned to variables when messages are created manage projects and their devices enter a description of the application validate and download an application to a Message View 421 terminal or to a DOS file upload an applicat
298. p text 2 If it will narrow the search select one or more of the check boxes below the Enter box 3 Select the Find button The Select a Topic box fills with all the Help topics that contain the term The topic that has the most examples of the term is listed first and highlighted 4 The first instance of the term in the highlighted topic appears in the Topic text box To move from one instance of the term to another e use the Term up down arrows at the bottom of the screen use the scroll bars if they are present to display more of the text Publication 2706 817 3 18 MessageBuilder Basics 5 To select another topic do one of the following e click on a topic to highlight it e use the Topic up down arrows at the bottom of the screen to move the highlight e use the scroll bars if they are present to display more of the list 6 When you find a subject about which you want to read more click the Display button A full screen appears with the Help text About MessageBuilder If you must call Allen Bradley for assistance you will have to CONT provide the release date and version number of MessageBuilder Search For Help On software Choose About MessageBuilder from the Help menu to get How To Use Help this dialog About MessageBuilder Allae Hivaflep Meanagell odes AD Riia Vernon 1450 0 Aetece Dade IDFA Copemght 86 1908 Alber Bariin Compere Tihi briha ji Bernical ter aE p SO
299. pen one This change does not affect the open application 1 Select the Application Name box Highlight the text then type a new name 2 Create or edit the dialog for this application file 3 Select OK to close the dialog Publication 2706 817 6 10 Working with Application Files Closing an Application Exiting MessageBuilder Cle Cul cave Eit a ficports Wierkstrtan Sechep Upgrade Tenniaal L TEST MEL 2 ACTA J Bei aia 4 LONE 1 Aaa Publication 2706 817 To close an application file e double click the control menu box on the Application dialog or e choose Close from the File menu If you made changes to the application since the last save MessageBuilder gives you the option of saving the file before closing it When you exit MessageBuilder to the Windows desktop all open applications are closed Note Always exit MessageBuilder software before turning off the computer To quit MessageBuilder e double click the Control menu box on the MessageBuilder window or choose Exit from the File menu If any applications are open and unmodified they are closed automatically If any or all were modified since the last save a dialog for each application asks if it should be saved before closing MessageBuilder Application Q Save Changes to C AB MBWIN NEWONE MBA Select Yes to save the application and exit No to exit without saving and Cancel to return to MessageB
300. pgrade database No action is necessary Font file name not found in MBWIN INI Corrupt or missing INI file Essential MessageBuilder startup information cannot be acquired The MBWIN INI is corrupt or missing Check the windows system directory for a valid MBWIN INI file Reinstall MessageBuilder software Incompatible AB Utilities version MessageBuilder software detected an incorrect version of the Utilities software on startup Reinstall the AB Utilities disk or call Allen Bradley for support Insufficient available Windows resources to run this application Try closing some other applications and try again Too many applications are running Close all running applications and try again INTERCHANGE Configuration Utility not found at DOS path Check ABIC_CONFIG environment variable The InterChange Configuration Utility can not be found at the DOS path location that is specified by the variable ABIC_CONFIG Check that CFGIC EXE exists at a location that is consistent with the path specified by ABIC_CONFIG Reinstall MessageBuilder software Low resource memory Low memory error Close other applications and try again If error persists exit Windows reboot the computer try again Low resource memory Unable to open additional windows Low memory error Close other applications and try again If error persists exit Windows reboot the computer try again essage
301. plication even if a match exists Select the Setup button to specify which port to use if more than one of the computer s COM ports is configured with a DF1 driver The DF1 Setup dialog lists the available INTERCHANGE ports Select the appropriate port and close the dialog Select OK from the Download Application dialog The application is validated and translated to an MVA file If errors or warnings are detected the Exceptions dialog opens and displays them Errors must be corrected before the download can proceed a es sapetlalces iain T Cookin masia Application Fie abject Cos Warnings should be corrected but the download will proceed if they are not corrected The download begins The terminal enters Programming mode and erases the current application MessageBuilder software displays the progress of the download Irmie SPS to Opmer Terri WTO Verse 100 08 as rekrea File Daa OLE Serem Cia Coppia 154 1376 Aller Bradiey Company linc A TTD er Braces Company Ci Bii empieg boo rshsbiph comer sheng nr inr al eriamh T aiba Siard Tiesiai When the download is complete the terminal resets runs its self tests verifies and starts the application Publication 2706 817 11 8 Downloading to a DOS file Application Tag Editor Project Management Description Validate Download Upload RTC Download HE Stack Upload Terminal Setup Special M
302. pllens Duplication To set the number of duplicates 1 Select Duplication on the Options menu to open the Duplication dialog Number of Duplicates B Separator _ E Number of Digits 3 E Publication 2706 817 Working with Tags 8 11 Duplications 3 Finding Tags Duplicate rene Ouplicane Several 2 Select the Increment Name check box to choose whether or not to distinguish names of duplicated tags by adding a number to the name Default is to add a number 3 Select a separator from the Separator list box that will go between the name and number of duplicated tags 4 Select a number from 1 to 4 from the Number of Digits list box This sets the number of characters to the right of the separator 5 Highlight the value in the Number of Duplicates text box and type a number The number of duplicates is also displayed in a Duplications text box on the toolbar The value in the Duplications text box may be highlighted and changed without entering the Duplication dialog Use this tool or command to locate any tag or tags in the Tag Editor by name Other tag attributes cannot be used in the Find dialog Important If the active View is BCD Integer the Find command cannot locate tags with bit addresses 1 Click the Find tool to open the Find dialog Or choose Find on the Edit menu TagName o o Erst Previous Choa Chest Her 2 Type the name of the tag and press ENTER The Find command lo
303. r communication parameters must be checked using the Workstation Setup command on the File menu See Page 2 7 Cable connections must be correct See the Message View Terminal User Manual Publication 2706 816 for details The MessageView terminal must have its RS 232 port set to MessageBuilder communication parameters See Page 5 3 for an example of how to switch settings To download an application to a Message View terminal 1 2 3 Open the application to be downloaded Select the Download tool to open the Download Application dialog Or choose Download from the Application menu Download Application Destination OK Appears only if DF1 INTERCHANGE driver installed Communication Drivers Currently loaded drivers DF1 lt _ ____ _ Shows drivers currently loaded File Name SMP DEMO mva T Download only if different from current application Under Destination select Operator Terminal Validating Applications and Transferring Files 11 7 In the File Name box enter the name of an MVA file in which to save the translated application The MVA file is downloaded to the terminal Default is the first 8 characters of the application name and the MVA extension Select the Download only if different from current application check box to download the application only if it does not match the application currently loaded in the terminal The default is to download the ap
304. r lost power If the Send Values at Power Up option is disabled the terminal does not send any data to the controller at power up The terminal operator can use the Front Panel Editor to change the Values at Power Up selection Note The Send Values at Power Up and Values at Power Up features are not supported in ASCII Trigger applications Enable Debug Mode Debug Mode is used to check the application in a Message View terminal In Debug Mode as each message is triggered its message number is displayed on the terminal instead of message text If this option is enabled then the application will run in Debug Mode The terminal operator can use the Front Panel Editor to enable disable the Debug Mode Enable Simulate feature The Simulate feature may be used to test an application in a MessageView terminal In this mode the terminal displays messages but has no input from a controlling device No communications error messages appear on the display The terminal operator can use the Front Panel Editor to enable disable the Simulate feature When both Debug Mode and the Simulate feature are disabled the terminal runs the application in normal Run Mode Terminal and Communication Setup 10 15 Flash Rate Flash Rate determines the speed at which a character word or message flashes on the terminal display The rates are Rate Selected Speed Approximate Even if the Flash attribute is used it will not None have any
305. r mode Creating Messages 7 53 Defining LED tags 1 Select LED Indicators on the Application menu to open the LED Indicator Tags dialog Aap pdi c ati cen Teg Eihar Faje baragenenl Validate Dieanlnad pind E fien a i El MIE ranami HE Statt pine zf ES B i n pm LED indicator Taga T kial Getip Eo n OO i Speedie EPEA E zi E Function Kept _ 6 Ct t E E 1 H y El ai 2 For each LED that needs an indicator tag choose an existing tag name from the list box or create a new tag The only valid data type for an LED Indicator tag is bit 3 Select OK to return to the Message Editor Table View To edit the LED tag attributes 1 Put the insertion pointer in the LED Tag box 2 Select the Edit Tag button to bring up the Tag Form dialog Lag Hami Daa lypi n pen Hei Mama Tap pria Vaka pisa Bp Tag Abbmr iaa Frecuence he a 3 Edit the tag s attributes see the section starting on Page 8 2 4 Select OK ASCII Triggering devices Tag Node Name and Address attributes are ignored by an ASCII Triggering device They may be omitted when creating applications for use with such a device Publication 2706 817 7 54 Creating Messages Special Messages Apalicatan Tag Eatnr Project Management Validate_ pred ni ned Upload ETE Dirien al HE Shick Uplaid hptcia Memagee Tonciien Keys LED p
306. r ports and both ports must have the correct software communication Parameters set A Message View terminal has an RS 232 port and may also have a Remote I O port Preset Value A value that is loaded into a PLC or SLC controller data table when an Application starts up in a Message View terminal Project A database of Tag definitions and device information associated with an Application A project may be assigned to more than one application Q Queue A memory location in the Message View terminal where a Value triggered message may be stored if it cannot be displayed immediately when it is triggered Glossary G 9 R Real Time Clock The Message View terminal has its own battery operated clock also referred to as RTC It provides values for time or date variables in displayed messages The terminal s clock may be set using the RTC Download command from MessageBuilder software or the terminal operator may set it RS 232 A serial link for transmitting data to and from the RS 232 port of a MessageView terminal Communication with a personal computer requires a DF1 connection whose parameters are set up in the terminal s Firmware Communication with any other device requires that the RS 232 port Parameters are set up in the Application Communication with a Slave Device requires a RS 232 Simplex connection Remote I O A serial link for transmitting data to and from a PLC or SLC processor scanner and the Re
307. r to print All Rows in the current tag view or only selected rows See Page 8 9 for details on how to select contiguous or noncontiguous rows 3 Select the Print The Cover Page box to print the cover page Information for the cover page is entered automatically it includes product project and view name date and time The product is Allen Bradley Tag Editor 4 If the Current Printer default printer should be changed select the Printer Setup button to open the Print Setup dialog 5 If the setup should be checked or edited select the Page Setup button to open the Page Setup dialog 6 Select OK Publication 2706 817 8 14 Working with Tags Publication 2706 817 Other information e The column width of the printed output is based on the column width in the Tag Editor e The Tag Editor prints as many columns as fit on the width of the page minus the margins If a column does not fit it is printed on the next page The Tag Editor does not print a column that is less than one character wide that is an empty column e Ifarow does not fit on the page it is printed on the next page each row is one text line high To set up the printer 1 Select the Printer Setup button in the Print dialog to open the standard Windows Print Setup dialog The dialog entries are based on the computer s system configuration and installation options C pani panis cuendiy Hi Dadda SEDE jiria on ai Iiia LE ijj i Specific Preven
308. r tools are the same as in the Message Editor dialog Certain tools cannot be applied in some fields of the dialog the icons are greyed out when those fields are selected Print Opens the Print dialog with Printer and Page Setup dialogs available Cut Cuts the selected field or row and places it on the clipboard Copy Copies the selected field or row to the clipboard Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the cursor position Insert Tag Inserts a blank tag above the cursor position no matter what field the cursor is in Delete Tag Removes the highlighted tag If only a field is selected the icon is greyed out Find Tag Opens a dialog from which each tag of a specified name can be found Duplicate Tag Once Duplicates the selected tag once and places the new tag above the selected tag Duplicate Tag Several Times Duplicates the selected tag several times and places the new tags above the selected tag The number of duplicates is set using the Duplications box in the tool bar Duplications ho Tool Summary B 5 Form View Opens the Form View dialog for the selected tag Table View Opens a copy of the Tag Editor Table View Duplications A text box which displays the number of duplicate tags the Duplicate Several command or icon will create Publication 2706 817 B 6 Tool Summary ISA Symbols Publication 2706 817 BEEE bA E EAE A K H H Be ISA symbols are a standard set o
309. rameter Range Default Rack Number 0 to 76octal 0 to 62 decimal 02 octal 4decimal Rack Size 174 1 2 3 4 Full Full Last Chassis Yes No Yes Starting Module Group 0 2 4 6 0 Pass Through This option is not available Block Transfer Enabled Disabled Disabled Baud Rate 57 6K 115 2K 230 4K 57 2K Number of Files in Block 1 Transfer Number of Bytes in 128 Use Block Transfer Block Transfer Length Number of Bytes of 16 Discrete 1 0 Discrete I O addresses communicate directly with the PLC or other logic controller Discrete I O is recommended for any critical values that you want updated immediately The number of I O points in the PLC rack is limited to 16 bytes 128 bits In planning a large application assign tag addresses of variables that are less time sensitive to block transfer Use copies of the Tag Address worksheet in Appendix H to help design the application Publication 2706 817 5 16 Communications Overview Example Discrete I O The MessageView 421 terminal occupies rack 3 in which its starting module group is 0 The F1 key is addressed as I 030 03 and the bit trigger for the next message as O 031 01 The MessageView monitors the status of the 8 input words in its rack assignment Rack 8 MessageView I O The PLC ladder program monitors address 1 030 03 030 031 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 o 03
310. re than one embedded Time variable One is permitted per message What to do Change the catalog number using the Terminal Setup dialog to change the MV Type and Catalog and Version controls to match that of the application or press OK to the Terminal Setup dialog to convert the application to match the selected terminal type Define the Background message or disable background message with the Terminal Setup Advanced dialog Use the Bit Trigger control on the Message Editor Table View to change the bit number or delete the offending message to insure that bit trigger numbers are unique Use the Trigger Priority control on the Terminal Setup Advanced dialog to change the priority to Value Change all message to value triggers or use the Terminal S etup C ontrol Tags dialog to define a Bit Trigger for the Application Use Chain control on the Message Editor Table View to disable the chain or alter the To message number to select a different existing message Use the tag editor to reduce the array size of the tags assigned to the embedded ASCII Variable Display variables in the message Renumber or delete the offending message to insure that message numbers are unique Remove all but one Date variable Remove all but one Time variable Publication 2706 817 Message Embedded ASCII Character 13 is not allowed Embedded ASCII Entry Tag array size must be greater than ASCII Entry variable field width
311. re the appropriate INTERCHANGE drivers and load them as described in Chapter 2 Data file CRC is incorrect The CRC of the historical event data file did not match the CRC sent by the MessageView terminal Retry the historical event stack upload operation Data file length is incorrect The historical event data file did not match the length sent by the MessageView terminal Retry the historical event stack upload operation Error while scanning for application file CRC MessageBuilder software could not read the MVA file to verify the CRC Specify a valid MVA file Note CRC is Cyclic Redundancy Check a check for errors in files Publication 2706 817 Error Message Error while scanning for data file CRC Upload Download Error Messages Meaning The historical event data file could not be read to verify its data What to do Retry the historical event stack upload operation INTERCHANGE command failure Remote station did not acknowledge command MessageBuilder software aborted the transfer because it did not receive a response to a command Verify that the MessageView terminal is connected to the computer and startup self tests are normal Retry operation RNA Error COOA placing device n online INTERCHANGE could not start the driver associated with port n of the computer Check the driver configuration in CFG KT INI It may be set for a different baud rate than
312. required graphic symbol 5 Double click on the symbol Or highlight the symbol and select OK A placeholder Gr is added to the message at the insertion point Note A Graphic placeholder may be removed using the Backspace key or the Cut tool or command It can be pasted only when the entire message is copied and pasted as described on Page 7 8 wl Tes Size Miga b Mash biyere Wied De apy Drie sta piry Humeiic Varabie Dinglirg AC Varta Displery Hummerit Varinblc Entry Cialt Variable Cesbls Cancin Ley Creating Messages 7 21 Slave devices Slave devices support and display graphics embedded in messages only if a Ctrl G is inserted before each graphic If this control character is not inserted the terminal replaces the graphic with two spaces before sending the message to the slave Adding ASCII Control Characters to a message This option is used to embed ASCII control characters in a message ASCII control characters are used to embed Control Mode and Display Mode Control Bytes in a message to be slaved Slaving is discussed in the section starting on Page 7 41 Important This option is not used to embed ASCII and Extended ASCII characters which include the accented characters used in European languages See Page 7 6 To add an ASCII Control Character to a message 1 Set the insertion pointer in the Message Edit box where the Control Character should be placed 2 Click on the Embedd
313. ribute for a message with Function message with Acknowledge attribute requir essage Keys enabled nvalid Enable Function keys attribute for Not more than one operator action PESE ihe oneng annigutes MADE ue Ack Time attribute for a message with message with Ack Time attribute required per message Function Keys enabled Resolve the conflicting attributes Disable the nvalid Enable Function keys attribute for message with Hidden Message attribute Hidden Message attribute for a message with assignment Function Keys enabled nvalid hidden attribute without slave or HE A hidden message must be slaved and or Resolve the conflicting attributes Enable the stack Historical Event Stacked HE Stack or Slave Enable message attribute Resolve the conflicting attributes Disable the Hidden Message attribute for a message with Embedded Entry variables A hidden message can not support any operator actions nvalid Hidden Message attribute with A hidden message can not support any Embedded Entries operator actions Publication 2706 817 Message nvalid Line attribute for Full Text Size attribute assignment nvalid Line attribute for Half Text Size attribute assignment nvalid Line attribute for message with Embedded Graphics nvalid message character length nvalid Message length must be greater than zero nvalid Message Number nvalid Scroll attrib
314. rint and sets up the page and the printer Page Setup Sets up the format for printing tags Exit Exits the Tag Editor Use commands on the Edit menu to edit tags and their attributes fields Cut Removes a selected field or fields from the tag or removes a selected tag or tags from the Tag Editor Anything cut is put on the clipboard Copy Copies a selected field from a tag or copies a selected tag from the Tag Editor Anything copied is put on the clipboard View Menu Tag Editor Tool bar 1 BCDjinteger Menus and Commands Summary A 9 Paste Row Paste Field Places a field from the clipboard at the cursor position or places a tag at the position above the cursor Whatever is on the clipboard may be pasted as often as needed Delete Removes the selected tag s from the Tag Editor Insert Creates a new blank tag above the currently selected tag Find Locates a tag or tags with a specified name Duplicate Once Duplicates the selected tag once and places the new tag above the selected tag Duplicate Several Duplicates the selected tag several times and places the new tags above the selected tag The number of duplicates is set in the Duplications box on the Toolbar or using the Duplication command on the Options menu E Use commands on the View menu to rearrange the tags and toggle the tool and status bars Tool Bar Toggles the Tag Editor tool bar on or off Status B
315. ritten by the logic controller to a portion of the data block being transferred The PLC receives and stores data from an input device in this example a flow sensor X Flow Rate Beu gt Transducer N7 5 Fer sail Tag Name Flow_Rate The MessageView terminal receives the data and determines the starting address where the data is written by matching the block size with the address entered in the Communication Setup utility a ee E h k aq H B ie En w fe 1A D FE The MessageView updates the Numeric Variable Display using the data from the controller D dl ea a Display variable with Tag Name Flow_Rate from Address N7 5 The PLC ladder logic program initiates a block transfer of a data block 10 words containing the display data BTW _____ BLOCK TRANSFER WRITE EN Rack 03 Group 0 Module 0 Control Block N16 1 Data File N7 0 lt Data From Length 10 PLC Continuous N The MessageView now carries a copy of that segment of the logic controllers data table 10 WORDS N7 0 N7 1 N7 2 N7 3 N7 4 N7 5 Flow Rate Data N7 6 N7 7 N7 8 N7 9 Publication 2706 817 5 22 Communications Overview Example Transferring Multip
316. rmat is disabled and the Line attribute is All only the number of characters in the Length attribute will be sent even if each line portion of the message is longer For example if Text Size attribute is Quarter 21 characters per line and the Length attribute is set at 10 the last eleven characters of each line will never be sent to the slave if each line contains 21 characters Creating Messages 7 47 Relay Enable the Relay Energize attribute to trigger enable an alarm relay in a DLSO slave device The message with the Relay attribute set is displayed at the same time as the alarm is triggered and should explain why the alarm was triggered If the message is divided into packets the MessageView terminal sends the packets in this order Message Packet 1 Relay Packet Message Packet 2 Message Packet 3 Important The alarm relay will not de energize until another message is slaved to that Alarm Relay disabling it ATTENTION Use the alarm relay as a warning only Do not use it for control Slave Packet transmission rate Slave Packets are sent to the slave at a user defined rate called the Inter Packet Delay This delay is the time allowed between successive packets sent from the master to the slave device Inter Packet Delay is set in the Aux Port tab of the Terminal Setup dialog see Page 10 28 Publication 2706 817 7 48 Creating Messages Function Keys Apulicetiue Tag Edho Projeni M
317. rminal E CT ao 3 TEST NMA 4 LINED MBA Ew Beicic ceeage Aliicicic npari Message New Message Note Appendix A lists the commands on each menu and briefly explains what each one does To choose a menu command e click the command name or type the underlined letter in the command name e or use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to choose an item then press ENTER to select it Menu conventions are listed in this table Menu convention Greyed command name What it means The command is not available at this time A check mark 1 before the name The command is active Select the command to inactivate the command the check mark disappears Select it again to activate it A key combination after the name A shortcut for the command Use the shortcut keys if you prefer instead of the menu command or tool An ellipsis after the command The command opens a dialog box that contains options that must be selected before MessageBuilder software can carry out the command A triangle gt to the right of a menu command The command opens a submenu Publication 2706 817 3 8 MessageBuilder Basics To close a menu gt Status Bar and Publication 2706 817 click the menu name or anywhere outside the menu or press ALT or F10 to close the menu and move back to the workspace or press ESC to close the menu and remain on the menu bar
318. rs may be changed in two ways e To change the number of a message select the Message attribute Use the up down arrow to display a new number for the highlighted message or enter a value in the spin control then click the Store Message tool e To change the numbers of all messages in the Message List select Renumber on the Edit menu to bring up a dialog Renumber Messages Starting Number f 8 In the Renumber Messages dialog 1 Type the number the Message List should start with Or use the spin control to display the correct number 2 Select OK to return to the Message Editor Table View All messages in the Message List are renumbered in order following the initial number Note This command simply renumbers messages it does not change their order in the Message List However it may be used after a Sort command to get the numbers back in sequence Topic The Topic attribute allows messages in an application to be organized or grouped by subject matter or function Use the Topic list box to assign a topic to each message default is Topic 1 Assign all messages concerned with one aspect of the application to the same topic You can Sort messages by topic See the Sort option on Page 7 11 rine rir cu CNEX Comey Coriec Pasie Corley lets Meseage AHsDelete lhe ide eaage Kew Heitia Chile F Rapleca Cirih Boi Req ber_ lapics Ag et ur Tag Edie Project Masagem
319. rt 2 and Interrupt 3 dialog for the selected driver For example if you select DF1 on COM Port this dialog opens DFI an COM Post Device Conf guentian a ea Default Driver Name ot ORS sete ies orc E can be edited Tire ata Peo oslo our raa SHE fe lear mo WH Ene Draci pe sd ba O E Disables driver configuration without removing it from Configured Drivers list Note Consult your personal computer s user manual for COM Port Interrupt settings Edit parameters and select OK when done The parameters are specific to the communications card installed in your computer or to the type of connection you will be using to transfer files The configured driver appears under the Configured Devices list in the Driver Configuration dialog Important Do not configure more than one driver for the same communication port 5 Reboot your computer to load the driver and its configuration INTERCHANGE Device Contiquintion Hemember bo ash windoere smi 7 tebed io changes m take aliet Exit program Lies e Important You must reboot your computer any time you add or remove a driver or change configuration parameters of a driver Exiting Windows and re entering will not load the driver Publication 2706 817 2 10 Installing MessageBuilder Software Publication 2706 817 To configure an existing INTERCHANGE driver 1 2 3 4 Select the driver from the Configured Devices list
320. rtup or Background message It acts as a dumb terminal which can receive data but not transmit it It can accept commands from a variety of slaving master devices A list of master devices is given on Page 5 8 A message is displayed as soon as it is received from the master device There is no buffering or Message Queue If a message is received that is slated for a line which has another message displayed the old message is terminated at once and the new message is displayed Embedded variables are treated as follows e Display time and date variables in slaved messages are displayed by the 421D Slave Device They are updated by the Master Device as long as they are displayed e ASCII Characters are displayed e Graphics may be displayed if the Ctrl G control code is inserted The slave packet format and control codes are given on Page 7 42 Historical Event Stack Planning an Application 4 19 The Message View terminal features a Historical Event HE Stack The HE Stack file supports up to 4000 messages each 21 alphanumeric characters long Messages with the HE Stack attribute enabled are recorded in the Historical Event Stack each time they are triggered The Historical Event Stack file includes for each message e Message number Message text which includes data display variables at the time of triggering placeholders for data entry variables placeholders for graphic symbols Message top
321. s needed to display the messages sent from the master device The slave terminal may receive commands from any one of the following slaving devices masters e Allen Bradley Dataliner DL20 e Allen Bradley Dataliner DL40 e MessageView 421D terminal whose firmware supports slaving MessageView 421N terminal whose firmware supports slaving MessageView 421F terminal whose firmware supports slaving e Allen Bradley Industrial Computers To set up a terminal as a Slave Device see Page 10 9 For the format of commands to a slave device see the section starting on Page 7 42 Messages to the MessageView terminal Trigger a message with Ctrl T Used by the ASCII Triggering device to trigger a specific message in the terminal Format Ctrl T Message MV Address CR Message range 1 to 9999 limited to the subset used in the application e MV Address range 1 to 127 for a single node 127 to address all devices Example Ctrl T 24 6 CR e The terminal at node 6 displays message 24 in the downloaded application Communications Overview 5 9 Send data to a display variable with Ctrl V Used by the ASCII Triggering device to send data to a specific display variable in the terminal Each variable must be addressed individually Numeric data may be scaled Format Ctrl V Variable Data Variable Position MV Address CR e Variable Data range 32768 to 65535 for numeric data any ASCII character f
322. s MessageBuilder files to the hard disk under the target drive and directory C AB or the location specified during installation copies the AB Utilities files to disk under the target drive and directory C AB or the location specified during installation copies INTERCHANGE files to disk under the target drive and directory C RSIMC or the location specified during installation adds SHARE EXE to AUTOEXEC BAT file Windows 3 1x only adds C AB BIN and C RSINIC BIN to path adds ABIC_CONFIG C RSINIC BIN to AUTOEXEC BAT which defines the location of the INTERCHANGE file CFG_KT INI adds MBWIN INI and ISP INI to the Windows directory creates a MessageBuilder group in the Program Manager containing icons for MessageBuilder Software the Message View File Transfer Utility INTERCHANGE Device Config Utility and the release notes MessageBuilder FEFA a AF MessageBuilder MessageView File Transfer Utility INTERCHANGE INTERCHANGE Device Config PCMK Startup Utility readmekt txt Online Release Notes Online release notes are available for the MessageBuilder Configuration Software These files contain the most recent information on software and new functionality proper configuration and work arounds and the organization of MessageBuilder files Publication 2706 817 2 6 Installing MessageBuilder Software Publication 2706 817 Refer to For C AB MBWIN RELEASE TXT MessageBuilder Co
323. s in a message the change affects all data entry variables in that message Publication 2706 817 4 28 Planning an Application When data entry handshaking is used the controller logic is required to set the handshake tag bit before the user defined handshake timeout occurs If the terminal does not receive the handshake bit before time expires it will display a handshake timeout message The terminal operator must acknowledge the timeout message before the application can resume See page 10 16 to adjust the timeout time Example of handshaking with Entry Variables Message contains an Entry Variable Terminal clears notification tag Controller program then clears handshake tag Hesh T invest Notification Tag 0 Handshake Tag 0 Controller ladder logic program Verifies that notification address is set to 1 Sets handshake address to 1 Notification Tag Handshake Tag B3 B3 3 oy 1 1 Notification Tag 1 Controller Sets Handshake Tag 1 HASH Tints Operator enters Notification Tag 0 Sp value Handshake Tag 0 o Notification Tag 0 Handshake Tag 0 Operator presses Enter key Terminal Sets Notification Tag 1 Handshake Tag 0 WHEN THE TERMINAL SETS THE NOTIFICATION TAG IT WAITS FOR THE CONTROLLER TO SET THE HANDSHAKE TAG IF THE HANDSHAKE TAG IS NOT SET BEFORE THE SPECIFIED TIMEOUT TIME THE TERMINAL NOTIFIES THE OPERATOR THAT THERE IS A COMMUNICATIONS PROBL
324. s this document together before the application is run ATTENTION Documentation is often neglected but is very important The operator can make better decisions if the designer explains what is going on 2 The designer creates an application the basic design unit of MessageBuilder software It is designed to be loaded in a specific type of Message View terminal run using a specific type of controller and direct a specific operation It includes messages with their attributes triggers embedded graphics and embedded display and entry variables configuration parameters for communications port s of a specific Message View terminal global attributes that apply to all messages in the application tags which are named references to data addresses in a specific logic controller ASCII Triggering devices use the tags as memory references function keys and LEDs Message View 421F terminals only 3 The designer associates the application with a project which is assigned or created when an application is created A project can support more than one application provided that all of them are designed for the same type of terminal and the same type of logic controller It links the application s to the tag database the specific devices the Message View terminal and the PLC SLC or ASCII Triggering device that the application will interact with 4 Values associated with variables are stored in
325. sage Message number number duplicated number times Msg number Slave message enabled without Slave Device selected in Aux Port terminal setup Msg number ASCII Variable Entry is not supported by terminal type Msg number Numeric Variable Entry is not supported by terminal type PLC Scanner not assigned RIO rack information not defined Slave message address is greater than the maximum allowed address Slave message address is less than the minimum allowed address Slave message address of 13 is not allowed Startup Message number doesn t exist Tag not assigned or data type mismatch Unable to create RIO Block Array Validation Tags Device not found in project database Publication 2706 817 Meaning What to do Reduce the total number of embedded The message has more than ten embedded variables variables to 10 or less Use Chain control on the Message Editor The message is chained to a non existent Table view to disable the chain or alter the message To message number to select a different existing message Use Chain control on the Message Editor The message is chained to a non existent Table view to disable the chain or alter the message To message number to select a different existing message Use Chain control on the Message Editor Table view to disable the chain or alter the To message number to select a different existing message Define a Valu
326. sage View terminals and logic controllers Tags and devices are specific to the type of communications so a project must be equally specific Different applications can share a project as long as they all use the same type of communications For example a remote I O application requires a Message View terminal with a Remote I O port and either e a valid PLC controller and tags with PLC formatted addresses or e a SLC with SN scanner and tags with SLC formatted addresses Each project is created as a separate subdirectory in the C AB PROJECTS directory The project stores tag definitions and device information for an application or applications Use the Project Management dialog to e change the project associated with an application e copy rename or delete projects and devices Publication 2706 817 9 2 Managing Projects Managing Projects Pinja Melbpancpepe er nd Descsiption Validate Ooenload Upload ETE Dspyetiecnal HE Stack Upload Termine Setup Eyeccial Meaaages Eunctes Rey LED jiktan The New Project box is used when creating renaming or copying a project Publication 2706 817 Use the Project tab in the Project Management dialog to work with projects You can 77 view the current project for an open application change the current project for an application create a new project rename a project make a copy of an existing project delete a project To manipu
327. sageView Address is the node in the network where the terminal is located e CR is the carriage return that ends a packet Note The delimiter in ASCII triggering packets uses the backslash In order to trigger a message the ASCII Triggering Device transmits a Ctrl T packet sequence When the terminal receives this packet it displays or queues the message Note A Message View terminal in an ASCII network that has an address from 1 to 126 will respond to messages addressed to it and also to messages addressed to 127 A terminal with an address of 127 will respond to messages addressed to 127 only Planning an Application 4 11 The Message Queue Queuing is important in situations where multiple message triggers are likely to occur Value triggered messages that are triggered but cannot be displayed at once are stored in the terminal s Message Queue if the Queue is enabled Note A bit triggered message is not queued The bit remains set until the controller resets it The Message View terminal supports two fixed Message Queue lengths set in the Terminal Setup Advanced dialog See Page 10 13 The length may be 64 messages deep the Queue is enabled e 1 message deep in effect the Queue is disabled The MessageView terminal processes messages according to the following criteria e A triggered message is displayed at once if possible e Ifthe specified line for a value triggered message is not free it is p
328. screte I O These bytes always occupy the low byte of the lowest module group in the terminal rack assignment For example if the starting module group is 0 MessageView I O y rN 0 1 2 3 1415 6 7 l Nes a i T T 0 lt Status Byte gt Output Word 17 16 15 14 13 12 1 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 T T T T T 0 lt Module Control Byte gt Input Word No matter how many block transfers are assigned 1 to 10 one byte is reserved in the input and and one in the output rack Note Two copies of the worksheet in Appendix H are used for Discrete I O input and output Be sure to block off the status byte and module control byte in these worksheets if the application uses block transfer Block transfer directions are in reference to the PLC e Block Transfer Reads BTR are inputs to the PLC They are used to transfer data from data entry variables on the Message View terminal e Block Transfer Writes BTW are outputs from the PLC They are used to transfer data to data display variables on the Message View terminal Publication 2706 817 5 18 Communications Overview Block Transfer Write BEE e PLC MessageVi
329. se Upgrade Terminal on the File menu A dialog warns that the current application will be erased from the terminal ipseage Mallia Applicata Vip geediog the teemtrea Amrane wll aras thas Cleats loaded application Candnmes t Cie ue 2 Select Yes Downloading begins MessageBuilder software displays the progress of the download Testina Liperi Trarster Fiberi te Mrsag tiles Tonka ipaya hannal Ce j Cerrahi 190170 teni anier Commer tee Cem Sima Note The application resident in the terminal was erased as soon as the Firmware Download started Even if the download is cancelled the application is gone If the terminal is switched to Run mode its startup self tests will report that there is no valid application 3 Download an application see Page 11 6 Types of Reports Chapter 12 Creating Reports This chapter covers the following topics e Types of reports e Creating and printing a report e Changing the report setup e Previewing a report e Setting up a printer e Sending a report to a file MessageBuilder lets you specify the types of information to include in a report Report Options Description rar ncludes the first page of the application description Peschiplon as entered in the Application Description dialog Messages Lists all messages in the application Lists attributes of all messages in the application Message Attributes essages are listed in order of their message
330. sends a Ctrl F message when the message is received and acted upon Messages from the MessageView terminal Send data from entry variables Ctrl I Used by the terminal to send input data to the ASCII device Format Ctrl I Message Variable Data Variable Position CR Message range 1 to 9999 limited to the subset used in the application e Variable Data range 32768 to 65535 for numeric data any ASCII character for ASCII data e Variable Position range 1 to 10 Note Variable position is the position of the variable in the message counting from left to right If the message contains only one entry variable the position is 1 e MV Address range 1 to 127 for a single node 127 to address all devices Example Ctrl I 64 44232 3 CR e The terminal sends the value 44232 which was input in the third variable in message 64 Note If users are entering data Ctrl I at the same time at different terminals in the network they may cause data collisions The MessageView node address was intentionally left off the Data Entry Ctrl I response message to discourage this situation ATTENTION If the ASCII network has more than one terminal data should not be sent from any terminal to the ASCII device Data collisions may result if the ASCII device has data coming from more than one source Communications Overview 5 11 Acknowledge an alarm message with Ctrl K Used by the terminal to inform the ASCII Triggering device
331. sfer Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag or use the Application S pecial Messages Read Tags dialog to select an appropriate tag Publication 2706 817 Message Invalid Tag Day Write Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer nvalid Tag Function Key F number Handshake Tag name must be of type Bit nvalid Tag Function Key F number Handshake Tag name not defined nvalid Tag Function Key F number Write Tag name must be of type Bit nvalid Tag Function Key F number Write Tag name not defined nvalid Tag HE100 Full Tag name must be of type Bit nvalid Tag HE80 Full Tag name must be of type Bit nvalid Tag HE95 Full Tag name must be of type Bit Invalid Tag Hour Read Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer Invalid Tag Hour Write Tag name must be of type Unsigned Integer Invalid Tag LED 4number Tag name must be of type Bit Invalid Tag LED 4number Tag name must be of type Output or BTW Invalid Tag LED number Tag name overlaps Discrete I O Rack Control S tatus byte nvalid Tag LED number Tag name nvalid Tag LED number Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels nv
332. so the state on powerup does not need to be the same as the Contact Open Closed state Contacts Select either Normally Open or Normally Closed depending on how the Function key is to be used Hold Time If a Momentary Function Key was selected under Type select a Hold Time This option is greyed out when another type is selected Hold Time can be 0 50 250 500 750 or 1000 milliseconds default is 500 ms The terminal holds the Function Key bit set cleared for the Hold Time even if the key is physically released at once The Hold Time should be longer than the scan time of the controller to ensure that the bit is read at least once Publication 2706 817 7 50 Creating Messages Publication 2706 817 Function key tags Write Tag Select a write tag from the list box or type in a new Write Tag name A write tag is required for each enabled Function key The only valid data type for a Function key Write tag is bit type The write tag is the address location used by both the Message View terminal and the logic controller to reflect the On or Off state of the Function key Handshake Tag If a Latched Function Key was selected under Type select a handshake tag from the list box or type in a new Handshake Tag name This option is greyed out for Momentary and Maintained Function Keys The only valid data type for a Function key Handshake tag is bit type The value at this tag address is set reset by the controller When the bit
333. t Use the standard Windows resizing arrows as needed Message Edit Box MedsageBuilder Sk4F Peoj SFHDE MA MEA Fa aD wes Farm ore i u lee oo fail oe ee EMP Proj S4iP OEMO MBA Arrow to Si Resize Window Feature How to use it Select a name on the menu bar to open a menu and Menu Bar display its commands Click a tool to edit message text or carry out other Standard Toolbar functions Toggle it on off using the View menu Message Edit Toolbar Click a tool to edit messages and their variables Message Edit Box Edit the message highlighted in the Message List Attribute Controls Define attributes for the selected message Messages appear here as they are created Message List The selected one is highlighted and appears in the Message Edit box Shows what the software is doing at the moment Status Bar Toggle it on off using the View menu Note If the application file name in the title bar has an asterisk the application has been edited but not saved to disk MessageBuilder Basics 3 5 Here are the commands available on each menu when an application file is open File menu has commands that e create open close and save application files e generate reports e configure the computer workstation for file transfer e download new firmware to a MessageView 421 terminal e list the last four applications that were opened for easy reopening e exit to the Windows deskto
334. t listed on the File menu 1 Click the File Open tool on the Standard Toolbar to display the File Open dialog Or choose Open from the File menu File Open File Name Directories l actt4 mba actt4 mba c ab mbwin dan_test mba dan2 mba default mba mb08_11 mba test mba today mba List Files of Type MessageView OLP Files The File Name list box shows all MessageBuilder application MBA files in the current drive and directory e To locate a file on another drive select the drive name in the Drives list box e To locate a file in another directory use the scroll bars if needed to locate the correct directory in the Directories list box or find it through its parent directory Select the directory name Average Towns Mee aie das Eseepte Table Wira Tarainal yaw AE Hip Paj gP En i Working with Application Files 6 5 2 Double click the name of a file in the File Name list box to select and open the file e Or highlight the name and select OK e Or enter the path name and name of the file in the File Name box and select OK Multiple applications open MessageBuilder supports multiple open applications Create new application files or open existing files as needed When you open a second application it is cascaded over the first Use the commands on the Window menu to toggle between Cascade and Tile The active application in the Window menu is checked To acti
335. t open 3 3 application open 3 5 conventions 3 7 Message attribute 7 34 Message Edit box 3 9 B 3 Message Editor Table View See Table View Message Editor Terminal View See Terminal View Message List 7 2 find message number 7 4 find text string 7 4 renumbering See Renumbering selecting a message 7 3 sorting 7 11 Message queue 4 11 enabling 10 13 MessageBuilder software See also INTERCHANGE installation 2 2 2 4 installation problems 2 12 2 13 program group 2 5 registration 2 6 requirements 2 1 startup 6 1 version P 4 Messages 4 4 See also Edit menu Message List cancelling changes 7 10 copying 7 8 creating 7 2 Index I 5 display lines 7 34 7 35 editing 7 5 7 8 Embedded variables See Variables examples 1 5 Master List 7 11 return number to PLC 10 12 setting attributes See Attributes Special See Special Messages storing 7 10 Message View terminal See also Terminal setup hot key 5 4 MFT See File Transfer Utility Momentary function keys See Function keys Mouse conventions 3 1 MVA file 11 1 N New File tool 6 2 B 1 Notification tag See Handshaking Numeric Variable Display 7 23 7 25 Numeric Variable Entry 7 27 7 29 O Offset See Scaling data Open File tool 6 4 B 1 Options menu Tag Editor Address Validation 8 4 A 10 Duplication
336. tag editor to define the tag Remove or change the value of the embedded Graphic number 13 by selecting the embedded Graphic in the message and pressing the Delete key or selecting the Format E dit Variable Dialog Use the Message Editor Table view to change the Line attribute to ALL or remove the embedded Carriage Return from the message Remove Numeric Entry variables from the messages listed Or if practical change the application to a different terminal type Remove the Return Message Number to PLC option in the Terminal S etup Advanced dialog or define a return message number tag in the Terminal S etup Control Tags dialog Reduce the embedded Variable Entry Field width or increase the display width by making the message Text Size Half or Quarter Use the Function Key dialog to define a Write Tag for each Function Key that is enabled in the Application Reformat the message by deleting characters or enable the scrolling attribute Validation Error Messages D 3 Message Meaning What to do Disable the Enable Message Queue option in the Terminal Setup Advanced dialog or define a value trigger tag in the Terminal S etup Control Tags dialog Resolve the conflicting attributes Disable the Ack attribute for a message with entry variables valid Ack attribute with Hidden Message A hidden message can not support any Resolve the conflicting attributes Disable the ttribute assignment Ack attribute for a hidden messag
337. te I O devices See Logic controllers Copy tool 7 7 7 8 B 1 Copy tool Tag Editor 8 9 B 4 Copying attributes 7 8 message 7 8 tags 8 9 text string 7 7 variables 7 8 CSV format HE Stack file 4 19 importing exporting tags 8 17 8 21 Cut tool 7 7 B 1 Cut tool Tag Editor 8 8 B 4 D Data formats 4 33 BCD 4 34 Bit 4 33 Character array 4 34 Signed Unsigned integers 4 34 Data types 4 33 G 1 Date formatting 10 18 setting terminal clock 11 9 Date Display 7 19 Date Special Messages setup 7 55 Debug Mode 10 14 Decimal position Numeric Variable Display 7 24 Numeric Variable Entry 7 28 Delete Message tool 7 2 B 3 Delete Tag tool 8 8 B 4 Description application 6 8 tags 8 6 Devices See also ASCII Triggering devices Logic controllers Terminal setup conflict in project 9 8 managing 9 5 DF1 communications 5 2 See also RS 232 configuring 2 7 transferring applications 11 1 Dialogs conventions 3 11 Help 3 14 Discrete I O 5 15 5 16 block transfer bytes 5 17 Download tool 11 6 B 2 Downloading date amp time 11 9 error messages in E 1 terminal firmware 11 18 to a DOS file 11 8 to a terminal 11 6 using Application menu 11 6 using File Transfer Utility 11 16 Drivers See INTERCHANGE Duplicate Tag tools 8 10 B 4 Duplications box Tag Editor 8
338. tem for context sensitive help e Click the Help Contents tool to display an index to Help topics i Weccaqalaldor Holp Ca C MessapeBullder Help Contents E ie Ow Ow Ge Bt Gi ul a L 4 T i e we ok a f we Hep pee F1 e Choose a command from the Help menu The Contents command Help brings up the same index as the Help Contents tool Contents Search For Help On Select a dialog s Help button to get help about the its topic How To Use Helps e Press the F1 key at any time to get context sensitive help About Abon Ne 68 OD EIU fe Using Help This is a very brief overview of the Help features For further information on using Help select How To Use Help or see the Microsoft Windows manual All of the methods of finding information on a topic produce the same textual information Choose the method most convenient for you among those listed here Helpful hints e Ifaterm is underlined you may select it to bring up a new screen defining or describing that subject e Ifscroll bars appear you may use them to see more items on the list or more information on the subject e To return to a previous screen use either the Back button which steps through each screen you have called up or the History button which lists all the screens you have called up so you can double click on the one you want to return to To see text on a related subject use the Previous lt lt or
339. ter a preset Hold Time has expired the key changes back to its original state The Hold Time value represents a brief delay in which the control function remains active after the operator releases the Function key This Hold time is set in the Function Keys dialog which is accessed through a command on the Application menu The Message View terminal supports Hold Times of 0 50 250 500 750 or 1000 milliseconds A Momentary Function Key does not have a definitive handshake tag ATTENTION If communication with the logic controller uses Remote I O protocol with block transfer the Function key write tags must all be assigned to the same block as the Function Key Return Message Number tag Maintained Function Keys A Maintained Function Key changes state 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 when pressed and remains in the changed state when released It returns to its original state when the function key is pressed and released again A Maintained Function Key retains its current state after the message is terminated Since a Maintained Function Key toggles between two states its Initial state 0 or 1 must be specified independently of its Contact Normally Open Normally Closed state The initial state of a Maintained Function Key after a powerup or terminal reset depends on the Values At Startup attribute which is set in the Terminal Setup Advanced Dialog e Preset the Function key s state at startup is the same as its initial state set in t
340. th undefined Value Triggered Messages The All Line message contains more displayable characters than the display can show Reformat the message with fewer characters or change the text size With line attribute All message won t fit on display Publication 2706 817 Error Message Address overlaps Block Transfer Control Byte Appendix E Upload Download Error Messages This appendix lists error messages that may appear during a download or upload operation Messages are listed alphabetically For messages that may appear during creation or editing of an application see Appendix C For messages that may appear during validation see Appendix D For messages that may appear during a tag import or export see Page 8 22 Meaning A tag is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Byte the lowest accessible byte in the discrete I O rack What to do Enter a different address for the tag in the Tag Editor Or if BTs are not used disable block transfers in the Block Transfer dialog Application Data file CRC is incorrect The computed CRC of the MVA file does not match the CRC stored in the program The file is corrupted Specify a valid MVA file Application file length does not match file header record The MVA file has a different file length ecorded than the length of the file This typically occurs when a file is being downloaded which was truncated by an aborted up
341. that the operator has pressed the ACK key in response to an alarm message Format Ctrl K Message CR Message range 1 to 9999 limited to the subset used in the application Example Ctrl K 75 CR e The terminal displayed message 75 which was defined as an acknowledgeable message The operator pressed the ACK key and this response message was sent to the ASCII Triggering device Report a function key press with Ctrl F Used by the terminal to inform the ASCII Triggering device that the operator has pressed a function key Format Ctrl F Message F key F key action CR Message range 1 to 9999 limited to the subset used in the application e F key range to 16 e F key action range 0 or 1 the application defined the function key as Normally Open or Normally Closed this Normal state is defined as 0 Example Ctrl F 33 5 1 CR e When the terminal operator pressed function key 5 which was enabled in Message 33 the terminal informs the ASCII Triggering device that the function key has changed to the altered state Note If the operator presses a momentary function key the terminal will automatically send another Ctrl F message when its Hold Time is up Ctrl F 33 5 O CR Note If a latched function key is unlatched after the terminal receives a Ctrl U message the Message parameter in the Ctrl F message is 0 Publication 2706 817 5 12 Communications Overview Remote I O Commu
342. the HE Stack check box to enable this attribute The message will be logged into the Historical Event Stack file each time it is triggered The logged message includes the time and date when the message is triggered and the value in each display variable at the moment it is triggered See Page 4 19 for a discussion of the Historical Event Stack Acknowledge Time X Ack Time The Ack Time attribute may be used to log into the HE stack with the message the time and date when the message was acknowledged if both the following apply e the message requires the operator to press the ACK key on the terminal and e the HE Stack attribute is enabled Acknowledgeable Message Messages may be defined as acknowledgeable messages which require operator intervention Acknowledgeable messages remain displayed active until the terminal operator presses the ACK key and the preset acknowledge hold time 50 ms has expired The bit at the global Acknowledge tag address is set The controller program checks this bit to make sure the terminal operator has pressed the key before triggering another message IX Ack Use the Ack check box to define a message as acknowledgeable e When Ack is enabled Wait Time is overridden Publication 2706 817 7 40 Creating Messages Publication 2706 817 X Enable Bit o 6 While a message requiring acknowledgement is displayed other messages may not be displayed if they e require an ackn
343. the jog feature is disabled the message is terminated after one of its function keys is pressed If the jog feature is enabled the message remains active until the terminal display is cleared or the terminal is reset K Keypad A set of keys on the MessageView terminal that the terminal operator uses to input data acknowledge messages and access the Front Panel Editor See also Numeric Keypad and Function Keys L LED Acronym for Light Emitting Diode A Message View 421F terminal has a red LED beside each of the 16 Function Keys These LEDs may or may not reflect the condition of the function key depending on how they are set up in the Application Logic Controller A device used to replace relay logic used for sequencing timing and counting Instead of physical wiring devices such as relays push buttons and limit switches a logic controller tests the state of inputs and sets outputs according to stored programs Also called programmable controller See also SLC PLC M Master Device A device which controls one or more Slave Devices It sends Messages to be displayed by its slaves and controls the appearance of the message in the slave display A Message View terminal with a Daughterboard and Firmware that supports Slave Port can address up to 127 slave devices through its RS 232 port MBA Format See Application File Glossary G 7 Menu A list of related commands in MessageBuilder software Menu names
344. the project database ag is undefined in the project database ag is undefined in the project database The Acknowledge Return Number tag in Terminal Setup Control Tags is the wrong data type The Function Key Return Number tag in Terminal Setup C ontrol Tags is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type The assigned tag is the wrong data type What to do Use the tag editor to change the tag Scale to be non zero Use th or the Trans Transfer that has its mode assigned as W Use the tag editor to change the tag address or the Terminal Setup Comms S etup B lock Transfer dialog to put the tag into a Block Transfer Use the tag editor to enter a different address for the tag or use the Terminal Setup Comms Setup Block Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Use the tag editor to change the Minimum Data Entry or select the embedded variable in the message and change the Field Width using the Format E dit Variable dialog e tag editor to change the tag address Terminal Setup Comms S etup Block er dialog to put the tag into a Block S Use the tag editor to change the data type of the tag Use the tag editor to change the Node name for this tag or change the PLC Scanner Name in the Terminal Setup Comms Setup dialog Use the tag editor to change the Node Name for this tag
345. their message number The 1 9900 terminal continuously scans for a new changed trigger value Write tags are controlled by the terminal For Remote I O write tags are Input or BTR Tag Type Purpose Range A value that indicates the message number of the last triggered Message Return number Unsigned Integer message on display when the message does not require 1 9900 Acknowledge nor have Function Keys enabled A bit that when set informs the logic controller that the Ack key is Acknowledge Bit pressed for a message that requires Acknowledgement by the 0 1 operator A value that indicates the message number of the last triggered Acknowledge Return Number Unsigned Integer message on display when the message requires 1 9900 Acknowledgement by the operator A bit that when set indicates that a Function Key has been Function Key Bit pressed The behavior of this bit is determined by the type of 0 1 Function Key and how itis configured A value that indicates the message Number of the last triggered Function Key Return Number Unsigned Integer message on display when the message has one or more Function 1 9900 Keys enabled A numeric value that indicates the operator entered value Signed Integer i Numeric Entry Unsigned whenever a message with an embedded Numeric Variable Entry is Depends on Integer or BCD on display A Numeric Entry tag is required for every embedded the type Numer
346. ther tags to special messages used in the application Function Keys If the application is designed for a Message View 421F terminal sets the function key attributes LED Indicators If the application is designed for a Message View 421F terminal assigns the LED indicator tags Preferences Allows the user to specify whether messages should be validated individually when they are created or edited and what colors should be used in the Message Edit box to distinguish Flashing Text and Embedded Text Window Menu Window Cascade Tile Arrange Icons New Window Exceptions Table View Terminal View v 1 SMP Proj SMP DEMO MBA Menus and Commands Summary A 7 Use commands on the Window menu to arrange application message tables and icons to suit and to toggle between table and terminal view of messages The bottom of the Window menu displays a list of open views of the current application file A check mark next to a window name means the window is active Cascade Arranges open windows in the workspace so that they overlap each other with the title bar of each screen remaining visible Tile Arranges open windows in a vertical row in the workspace Arrange Icons When some of the open windows are minimized to icons spaces them evenly along the bottom of the workspace so they do not overlap New Window Opens a new Message Editor Table View dialog Exceptions Opens the
347. ting terminal the dialog displays defined terminal information 4 Working with Application Files 6 3 In the Application Name box enter a name up to 32 characters long This name cannot start with a number or contain spaces When MessageBuilder software saves the application the default file name is the first 8 characters of the application name with the extension MBA Page 6 6 explains how to save under a different file name In the Project Name box select or enter a name up to 32 characters long This name cannot start with a number or contain spaces The Project Name List box gives all existing project names Select one of these if the new application will use the same tag definitions and devices as a previous application The Project Name links the application with a database of tag definitions and device terminal and controller information ATTENTION If a project name must be changed in MessageBuilder software or a project deleted from the software DO NOT use a DOS or Windows command Use the Project Management command on the Application menu Define the specific Message View 421 terminal that will run the application If the terminal device with its catalog information is not already associated with the project add it now e Inthe Terminal Name box select or enter a name up to 32 characters long for the terminal e In the Filter by MV Type list box select the correct Message View terminal type for th
348. tion 2706 817 Validating Applications and Transferring Files 11 3 Printing Validation Messages To send validation messages to a printer e A printer must be connected to your computer e The computer must recognize the printer as a valid printer See your Microsoft Windows User s Guide for details on installing printers To set up the printer Printer Setup 1 Select the Printer Setup button in the Exceptions dialog to open the standard Windows Print Setup dialog Print Setup Specific Printer Options HP LaserJet IIISi on LPT1 Orientation Paper n Portrait Size Letter 8172 x11 in Landscape Source Upper Tray 2 If the default printer is not the one in use select a printer from the Specific Printer list box If it is not listed see below 3 Set appropriate attributes for the printer 4 Select the Options button to enter options specific to the printer The Options dialog is different for each type of printer 5 When done select the OK button 6 Select the Print button from the Exceptions dialog to print the validation messages 7 Select Close to return to the Message Editor Table View If the printer connected to the computer is not listed 1 Check for hardware compatibility between the printer and one of the printers listed 2 Check if the printer has an emulation mode that is compatible with one of the printers listed
349. tion file produced by the Advanced Programming Software APSIE utility for the SLC processor only APS See the APS Import Export Utility user manual publication 1747 NM006 This format is used by certain software packages such as Excel See the user manual for the software Comma Separated Value CSV format Advanced Interface Al series The WINtelligent series version of the CSV format software Publication 2706 817 8 18 Working with Tags Publication 2706 817 Importing tags Note The Import function does not import 1 files created without keywords files created with annotations Choose Import from the Tools menu to open the Import Tags dialog Import Tags Project E Device cd Select an input format APS ASCII AI or CSV When you import from APS ASCII format The Import function automatically translates special characters in address comments AC used by APS software backslash is changed to carriage return lt cr gt e double quotation marks are changed to single C e tilde preceding a backslash is changed to a backslash Type a source file in the File box Or select Browse to search for a source file Under Destination select a project and the logic controller used by the project Select OK The Reading Source File dialog opens followed by the Importing Tags to Project dialog Each of these dialogs displays th
350. tions in progress Use the Ctr T command 9903 a a Resets the terminal which then goes through to terminal C trl T 9903 MV Address CR its Power On Self Test POST Tests every pixel in the terminal display During the test the terminal suspends all Use the Ctrl T command 9904 Display Test message activity When the testis completed to terminal Ctrl T 9904 MV Address CR the terminal resumes normal Run Mode operation Use six Ctrl V commands year month day hour minute second to terminal Ctrl T 9905 MV Addr CR ns updates the Real Time Clock in the to terminal Ctrl V Year Value 1 MV Addr CR Set Clock Time terminal from addresses in the logic 9905 h er Ctrl V Month Value 2 MV Addr CR Date controller Valid only if the tags are defined in a the Special Messages diilo Ctrl V Day Value 3 MV Addr CR P 9 9 Ctrl VHour Value 4 MV Addr CR Ctrl V Minute Value 5 MV Addr CR Ctrl V JS econd Value 6 MV Addr CR Use six Ctrl I responses year month day hour minute second Sends the terminal Real Time Clock time and E terminal Ctri T 9906 MV Addr CR f from terminal Ctrl 1 9906 Year Value 1 CR Get RealTime Clock date to addresses in the logic controller 9906 na C trl 1 9906 Month Value 2 CR Time Date Valid only if the tags are defined in the Special Messages dialog Ctrl 1 9906 Day Value 3 CR Ctrl 1 9906 Hour Value 4 CR C trl 1 9906 Minute Va
351. to the controller ASCII Triggering Device limitations If the ASCII network has more than one device the terminal operator must not send data such as Entry variables embedded in a message from the MessageView terminal to the ASCII Triggering device This could cause data collisions Consider this when creating an application for such a network Data is sent from a terminal when the ACK key is pressed all terminals numeric keys are used 421N and 421F terminals an enabled Function key is pressed 421F terminals The MessageView terminal supports an output buffer to process outgoing data responses The buffer is designed to handle at least two of the largest responses such as 20 Ctrl I responses or 2 messages that contain the maximum of 10 Entry Variables If the output buffer becomes full for instance if someone repeatedly presses a Momentary Function Key before the data can be sent any new outgoing data is lost until the output buffer is available again ASCII Trigger applications require a value trigger tag name to be defined See Page 10 21 Only the tag name is used the node address and node name may be left blank The tag name is used internally by the Message View terminal as a reference Communication setup In MessageBuilder software a logic controller is specified by its PLC SLC Scanner type An ASCII Triggering device is a single device that does not require a device type Triggering a Message
352. tor to change the Startup and Background Messages Publication 2706 817 10 18 Terminal and Communication Setup Setting Format for Time and Date Publication 2706 817 Password A password for the MessageView terminal is optional It protects the Message View terminal from an unauthorized person making changes to the system configuration using the Front Panel Editor The terminal operator does not need a password to run the application Note MessageView 421D terminals do not support the password option Select the check box to enable the password option Then highlight the text in the box and type a 4 digit number as the password A password applies as long as the current application resides in the MessageView terminal Other applications that run at different times in the same terminal may have the same or a different password or none A terminal operator who knows the password can use the Front Panel Editor to disable and enable the password feature provided it is enabled and defined in the application If it is not defined the operator cannot enable it The Time Date tab in the Terminal Setup dialog specifies how the time and date are displayed on the Message View terminal For example Date Formats Time Formats Month Day Year With Leading Zeroes 12 Hour Format With Time Zone amp Time 7 3 95 07 03 95 2 56 Standard Designations 2 56 PM CST Day Month Year With 2 Digit Year P refix 24 Hour Format With Leading Zer
353. tton next to a subject is e a book double click on it to display a list of subtopics aquestion mark double click on it to bring up text on the subject Help Topics Index The Index tab displays a dialog with an alphabetical list of all the Help headings a Sen we i ope ra re ee ee i ee a eg Ar 2 an re tia vam paa wa wr ack pay aig TLA ree icing Tree o lame Publication 2706 817 MessageBuilder Basics 3 17 To locate a topic e use the scroll bar type one or a few letters in the Type box to display the part of the alphabet that contains the subject you are interested in When you see the name of the subject that you want help with 1 Highlight the name in the Click box or type it in the Type box 2 Select the Display button A screen appears with text describing or explaining the selected topic Help Topics Find The Find tab displays a dialog you may use to find every instance of a word that appears in Help text P pian ce 7 1 oo Pe Rac gy ea A a 1 fe Dag ge 2 ie eee Se ee to fall fe Coming Taga fii ey Ei mois fe Ein bisa rge Ca miog fii 1 Type mkw em a G im a i i 2 Paice pad LCi Laat ioc part ace ne An Peles eng hors Pe ae To locate all instances of a term anywhere in the Help files 1 Type part of a word or a whole word in the Enter search text box If you want to be more specific type several words Find locates exactly what you type provided it is in the Hel
354. tup Comms S etup B lock Transfer dialog to disable block transfers if they are not being used Use the tag editor to change the tag array size Use the tag editor to change the tag array size Publication 2706 817 Message Invalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded Entry Handshake Tag name Bit address specified but tag isn t Bit data type Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Handshake Tag name must be of type Bit Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Handshake Tag defined without Embedded Entry Notification Tag Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Handshake Tag name must be of type Output or BTW Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Handshake Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels Invalid Tag Msg number Embedded Entry Handshake Tag name overlaps Discrete 1 0 Rack Control S tatus byte Invalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded Entry Notification Tag defined without Embedded Entry Handshake Tag Invalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded Entry Notify Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded Entry Notify Tag name must be of type Bit nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded Entry Notify Tag name overlaps Discrete I O Rack Control S tatus byte nvalid Tag Msg Anumber Embedded Entry Write Tag name Bit address specified but tag isn t
355. ude the following e bar code scanner e AdaptaScan reader PLC port 0 e other devices with serial communication that can send ASCII data To set up a terminal to communicate with an ASCII Input device see Page 10 27 Slave Port master device A MessageView terminal with a RIO daughterboard and firmware that supports slaving can command up to 126 slave devices The slave devices display messages as they are commanded Each slave device may be addressed individually or a command may be sent to all slaves at the same time using node address 127 Slave devices include e Allen Bradley Dataliner DL10 e Allen Bradley Dataliner DL20 e Allen Bradley Dataliner DL50 e MessageView 421D terminal without a daughterboard Catalog No 2706 M1D See Page 5 8 for the 421D Slave Device To set up a terminal as a master device to communicate with slave devices see Page 10 27 Communications Overview 5 7 Using the Comms Setup button The Comms Setup button in the Terminal Setup dialog allows you to configure communication parameters for the RS 232 port on the terminal This dialog may be accessed only when the terminal specified in the Terminal Setup dialog is a slave device or is controlled by an ASCII Triggering device Catalog Nos 2706 M1D M1N and M1F When the MessageView terminal communicates with an ASCII Triggering device or acts as a slave to a master device it uses the same RS 232 port that Messa
356. ue trigger messages are However bit triggering does provide a way to prioritize messages If two or more bits are set at the same time the terminal processes them according to the following criteria 1 Bit triggered messages are prioritized from Least Significant Bit LSB to Most Significant Bit MSB within a word from Bit 0 to Bit 15 if more than one word is assigned to bit triggering from Word 0 to Word 63 2 The terminal scans the area of memory assigned to bit triggering in prioritized order from LSB to MSB 3 When the terminal detects a set bit the message corresponding to that bit is triggered It is displayed or not according to the following rules if the Bit Trigger is and the Display Line then the message is set 1 is available displayed set 1 is occupied not displayed set 1 becomes available displayed reset 0 becomes available not displayed Example 1 Two messages are bit triggered at the same time Assume all display lines are available and the messages are assigned to different lines Message A Display Line 1 Message B Display Line 2 Bit 2 Word 0 set Bit 0 Word 1 set 1 0 gt 0 Word 0 0 0 1 Word 1 Result Messages A and B are displayed at once Publication 2706 817 4 14 Planning an Application Publication 2706 817 Example 2 Two messages are bit triggered at the same time Assume al
357. uilder The Message Editor Dialog Chapter 7 Creating Messages This chapter covers the following topics The Message Editor dialog e Working with messages e Selecting messages Editing messages Set Preferences Message Editor Terminal View Embedded variables and graphics Numeric variable display ASCII variable display Numeric variable entry ASCII variable entry Message attributes Slaving Function keys LED attributes Special Messages When a new or existing application is opened the Message Editor Table View appears It is the main window for application design Message Edit Box ProjectName Application File Name Menu Bar Standard Toolbar Message Edit Toolbar Attribute Controls Message List Status Bar File Edit View Format Application Window Help ssid MessageBuilder SMP Proj SMP DEMO MBA OS Ie eS Gal EL Siete mmf O OOOO O SMP Proj SMP DEMO MBA F Scroll Hidden I Center Message Text Size M amp feor E Line Topic fi Slaved Msg Scroll Time Bit Trigger 0 2 secs 2 l Enable Wait Time Bit 1 secs 0 Topic f 1 Slaved Msg T Ack I Ack Time Rely iz Energize IX Auto Format I De energize Address Length fi g 20 Message Text Freeze I Auto Clear HE Stack Slave X Enable Chain IX Enable va g Number Slaved Msg Line 1 7c Num Fi Publication 2706 8
358. uilder Basics 3 13 Check Boxes Square boxes that may contain an X or Check boxes are used to select or clear an option An X or V in the box means the option is selected A blank cleared box means the option is not selected e Click on a check box to select or deselect the option e Or select a check box and press the Spacebar to toggle it Radio Buttons Circles that function as a group One of the group has a solid dot in the middle it is selected and all the others are blank Choose a button in the group to select that option and clear all other options e Click on a radio button to select it e Or select a group of radio buttons and press the up or down arrow key to toggle them Spin Controls Small boxes with up down arrows at the right To configure an item within a Spin Control box e Click the up or the down arrow until the required number appears in the box e Or highlight the text and type the number Tabs and Dialog Buttons Some dialog boxes have tabs which open to give new sets of options Others have buttons that open a Tag Form or other dialog Select a tab or button to display a new set of options Publication 2706 817 3 14 MessageBuilder Basics Getting Hel MessageBuilder software has both context sensitive and online help g p Help may be invoked by any of the following commands k e Click the Help Question tool and the mouse arrow changes to a question mark Click the question mark on an i
359. unknown devices or tags to the database Ignore all unknown devices or tags and open the application Do not open the application If Yes or No was chosen the dialog reappears with the next application tag or device not found in the project Publication 2706 817 9 8 Publication 2706 817 Managing Projects If No or Add None was selected the following caution appears Select OK to accept the warning The application opens as usual If application devices or tags are different than those in its project 81 MessageBuilder displays the following dialog if the application you are opening contains different devices terminal controller or tags than those of the same name stored in the application s project A hca an the Mined Database dihewa cospi Fha a betot in Be plied igi beis Sjeti Fssjact Heme ACTT4 Hagara Darca in hoart Dalaba Nae PLCS Tyee linia Desice Hasa PU Tyme PESAN Discrepancies that may exist between the application and project e The application and project reference the same device name but the device types are different e A tag in the application has the same name as a device in the project For example the application contains a tag named GRIPPER and the project contains a Message View terminal named GRIPPER e A device in the application has the same name as a tag in the project For example the application contains a device named MOTOR and the project contains a tag na
360. up button to open the Communications Setup dialog When the selected terminal in the Terminal Setup dialog has only an RS 232 port the Comms Setup button opens a dialog to configure this port Communication Seii ED Bode of Doration ARON Tippen Beret Tamna Hode Humbe asd Mate C Geet Dera oe o Caracal po Bp a poa Emir Gaia Riu Bap Rin me E al Select the radio button for either ASCII Triggered or Slave Device Set the parameter values as needed Parameter Names Default Parameters Options Node Number The node address of 1 the MessageView 1 to 127 terminal Baud Rate 9600 300 600 1200 2400 9600 19 200 38 400 bps H W Handshake Disabled Enabled Disabled Parity None None Odd Even Data Bits 8 7 8 Stop Bits 1 1 2 Note For information on the Hardware Handshake parameter see Page 4 29 5 Select OK to save the RS 232 settings and return to Terminal Setup dialog Note The RS 232 communication parameters may be changed by the terminal operator via the Front Panel Editor Note The application may be Password enabled to prevent the terminal operator from changing the settings and disrupting communications See Page 10 18 Note Since the same RS 232 port on the terminal is used for communications with an ASCII Triggering device or a master device and also with MessageBuilder programming software the terminal must be set to the correct port co
361. ust be configured in the application to match those of the auxiliary device Communications Overview 5 5 The RS 232 port parameters may be configured in the Terminal Setup dialog using either the Aux Port tab see Page 10 27 or the Comms Setup button see Page 10 9 This table shows where to configure parameters for each type of terminal RS 232 Port Parameter Catalog Firmware Protocol Remarks Configuration 2706 M1D ASCII Triggering Comms Setup button Terminal controlled by an ASCII Triggering device Slave Device Terminal acting as a Slave Device 2706 M1N ASCII Triggering Comms Setup button Terminal controlled by an ASCII Triggering device 2706 M1F ASCII Triggering Comms Setup button Terminal controlled by an ASCII Triggering device Remote I O Comms Setup button Terminal controlled by a logic controller through the j Remote I O port aM Slave Port Aux Port tab Connection to an ASCII Input device ASCII Input Connection to a slave device or devices Remote 1 0 Comms Setup button Terminal controlled by a logic controller through the Remote 1 0 port zeae Slave Port Aux Port tab Connection to an ASCII Input device ASCII Input Connection to a slave device or devices Remote 1 0 Comms Setup button Terminal controlled by a logic controller through the Remote 1 0 port BEA Slave Port Aux Port tab Connection to an ASCII Input device ASCII Input Connection to a slave device or devices
362. ut only Value Triggered messages can utilize the If Enable Message Queue is checked Value Trigger Tag must be defined Message Queue nvalid Ack attribute for message with Not more than one operator action can be mbedded Entry Variables required per message m r slo s nvalid Any line attribute with hidden and A message with Line attribute Any can not Slave attributes be hidden and slaved N 55 gt The block transfer length is illegal Sp iea Message that are only Historical Event v z Stacked can not be centered n enable attribute message without the Slave Attribute enabled Embedded ASCII characters nvalid embedded ASCII character with no The message defined is invisible on the Define the message with displayable other displayable characters in message terminal characters mvaa emibscdes camiage reum character The message defined is invisible on the Define displayable characters for the with no other displayable characters in terminal message message nvalid Enable Function keys attribute for Not more than one operator action aki the Conic ang aunInutSs DISADIEINE i function keys or delete the Embedded entry message with Embedded Entry Variables required per message Variables l nflicting attributes Disable th nvalid Enable Function keys attribute for Not m one operator action pesoie meconniedng ee 3 i Ack att
363. ute with ALL Line attribute assignment nvalid Scroll attribute with center attribute nvalid Scroll attribute with HE stack and Hidden Message attributes nvalid Tag name references device name as Node Name This is not the Logic Controller selected in Terminal S etup Comms Setup Invalid Tag Acknowledge Tag name isn t a valid address in the terminal s assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfer channels Invalid Tag Acknowledge Tag name must be of type Bit Invalid Tag Acknowledge Tag name must be of type Input or BTR Invalid Tag Acknowledge Tag name overlaps Discrete I O Rack Control S tatus byte Invalid Tag Acknowledge Tag name Invalid Tag Acknowledge Handshake Tag name must be of type Bit Publication 2706 817 Validation Error Messages Meaning A message with Full Text Size must start on Line 1 since it occupies 4 lines A message with Half Text Size can not start on line 4 since it occupies 2 lines A message with graphical symbols can not start on line 4 since it occupies 2 lines essage can not be entirely empty It must have a length The Message number must be between 1 and 9900 inclusive A message that uses all lines can not be scrolled A message that is centered can not be scrolled Messages that are only Historical Event Stacked can not be scrolled The Node Name assigned to this tag does not match the assigned PLC
364. uto Clear T A 1 L 1 S Auto Format Address Meccane Tevt The Message Edit box on the Table View is active while the Terminal View is displayed If the Terminal View is the active window as a message is edited the changes appear in the Terminal View display The Terminal View may be enlarged or reduced using the Zoom tools or the Zoom command on the View menu See Page 7 17 Note The Terminal View like the Message View terminal can display only 21 characters in Quarter text size 10 characters in Half text size 7 characters in Full text size If the message is longer than the Terminal View can display scroll through the message in the Message Edit box to see the remainder of the message When the Terminal View is the active window its display will follow the insertion point in the Message Edit box That is it will scroll through the message up to the cursor point Dialogs Tab Check Box Radio Button Spin Control MessageBuilder Basics 3 11 MessageBuilder software uses dialogs to request information it needs to carry out a command After you supply the requested information select a command button to confirm or cancel the command Dialogs also display additional information and warnings or explain why a requested task could not be accomplished An ellipsis after a dialog command means another dialog will open when you choose that command Some d
365. utton The name under which you save the application becomes the default for the next save Save or Save As command Note MessageBuilder tracks the date time and version of an application when it is saved Choose Description from the Application menu to see this information When an application has been edited but not saved its name in the title bar has an asterisk Publication 2706 817 6 8 Working with Application Files Renaming and Describing Use the Description command on the Application menu to an Application e enter an application description which can be included in a report e view the version number of an application and when it was last saved palicirlkir Tag Lor Projeni Masa gemeat mempen e select the Description button in the New Application dialog henio Laland Note The Application Name and Project Name do not appear when raise the Description dialog is accessed from the New Application dialog To open the Application Description dialog e choose Description from the Application menu Terminal getap fpeua Mesiaged Funcion Keys LED ndirm Application Description Prelesences Application Name Application Name PETTA Project Name Current Project Associated With Application ACTT4 Description Beam Pointer J When the Application was Saved Last Saved 10 03 95 15 59 49 Version Yersion 102 Note Special k
366. vate a different open application either e select it on the Window menu e click on its title bar The application with its title bar highlighted is the active one The Edit Box menu commands and tool icons apply only to the active application This illustration shows tiled applications with the lower one active Mes eeqebull er hee rey Dobe Li i ma Edit View Format Application Wiadow Help CE ele EIR oO mbm she our sie fee SEE al E izi For Hoty prons FI Publication 2706 817 6 6 Working with Application Files If too many applications are open for available computer memory this dialog appears Close some applications before opening any more new ones Wiarmng These le net eaoagh spate merman T Te caie a hee application oF open an enbating k mplonen Aras cheat ote applicationi belt stem ping le open an application Saving an Application The File menu provides two commands for saving an application e Use the Save command to save the application to the default drive and directory overwriting the previous version e Use the Save As command to save a revised application with a new name so the previous version is not overwritten Important It is good practice to save an application frequently The first time an application is saved the Save As dialog opens so the file can be named To save an existing application file e click the Save File tool on the Standard Toolbar e
367. ver if you want to enable the handshake feature of a data entry variable message both a notification tag and a handshake tag must be defined e When a notification tag is assigned the Message View terminal has a means of signalling that data entered from the terminal has been transferred to the logic controller e When a handshake tag is assigned the logic controller has a means of signalling the Message View terminal that it received the data Note Define both notification and handshake tag or neither If only one is defined the application will not pass validation Note If a message contains more than one data entry variable each variable is supported by its own write tag address However the notification and handshake tags are shared by all data entry variables in the message Consider the write tag to be local to the individual data entry variable and the notification and handshake tags global to the message as a whole Example Message A contains Enter Air Temperature XXX Enter Water Temperature YYY where XXX and YYY are data entry variables If XXX is assigned these tag addresses Write Tag Address TAG_A Notification Tag address TAG_NOTIFY Handshake Tag Address TAG_HAND Then YYY would be assigned these tag addresses Write Tag Address any tag address but TAG _A Notification Tag Address TAG_NOTIFY Handshake Tag Address TAG_HAND If the notification or handshake tag is changed in one of the data entry variable
368. vice 2 Enter the device address 3 Select OK device error device not an SLC processor a file imported from APS format requires an SLC processor which was not defined Select OK then select an SLC device parse error the selected source file was corrupted unsupported type or a type other than the type selected manually edited with uncorrected mistakes Select OK to abort the Tag Import E xport utility Fix the bad file if necessary Choose Import from the Tools menu again and select the same or another file to be imported file error the file does not exist the selected source file does not exist Select OK Select another source file or cancel file error the file already exists2 the selected destination file is already in the project Select Yes to replace the file with the imported file Select No to cancel the import project error the selected project does not exist Select OK Select another project or cancel Import only 2E xport only Publication 2706 817 About Projects Chapter 9 Managing Projects This chapter covers the following topics e About projects e Managing projects e Managing devices in projects e Loading replacing tags or devices in projects e Restoring a project Each MessageBuilder application MBA file is associated with a project The project stores 76 e tag definitions e device information devices are Mes
369. w No Save the tag in the database with the invalid address For information on valid addresses for a specific type of controller refer to the user manual for that controller Note In Form View address validation is always active Working with Tags 8 5 Defining Tags 69 Tog Form rma E aie oe e O O e waitin E ni z bodel ooo Doa mr Das eT CET ik ELLA THM ami Chamis fury 1 TLO HH TOPPED Shanes ira T Ika corrvagee cr stad deere iLL HA Maka TiTi Urea rie T ag ee i tl En Table View Form View Field Description Valid Characters Notes If an invalid character is entered the Tag Editor beeps and does not display it Maximum characters 32 Do notuse blanks tabs carriage returns or non printable Taq Name he name ofthe AtoZ atoz 0109 characters oe tag hyphen underscore _ Tag names cannot begin with 0 9 hyphen or percent percent Tag names are not case sensitive LIST List and list are all the same to the Tag Editor Tag names must be unique in a project Select one of the following e bit 4BCD unsigned integer signed integer Data Type ate format o character array The tag Data Type determines the data format for the variable Boney Use either of these methods Type the letter of the data type for example b for bit Use TAB to move to the Data Type field press ALT 4 to display the list of data types Array Size The number of Range o
370. xico e Netherlands e New Zealand e Norway e Pakistan e Peru e Philippines e Poland e Portugal e Puerto Rico e Qatar e Romania e Russia CIS e Saudi Arabia e Singapore e Slovakia e Slovenia e South Africa Republic e Spain e Sweden e Switzerland e Taiwan e Thailand e Turkey e United Arab Emirates e United Kingdom e United States e Uruguay e Venezuela e Yugoslavia Allen Bradley Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Publication 2706 817 December 1996 40061 287 01 D Supersedes Publiication 2706 817 Dated February 1996 Copyright 1996 Allen Bradley Company Inc Printed in USA
371. y AO Coatral Ghar Graphic Publication 2706 817 Creating Messages Slave devices Slave devices do not support the display of Numeric Entry variables in messages Numeric Entry variables are removed from a message by the master Message View terminal before the message is slaved Although slave devices do not display Numeric Entry variables in a message the master terminal does display them whenever it displays the message ASCII Triggering devices Tag Node Name and Address attributes are ignored by an ASCII Triggering device They may be omitted when creating applications for use with such a device An ASCII Variable Entry allows the terminal operator to change to change or enter a value stored at a controller address This variable may be used in an application designed for a terminal that has both a daughterboard Catalog No 2706 M1D1 MIN1 or M1F1 and firmware that can support an ASCII Input device An ASCII Variable Entry allows the entry of e numeric values from the front keypad e alphanumeric characters from an ASCII Input device input devices are listed on Page 5 6 If the ASCII Entry variable is defined as e an integer signed or unsigned the entered data is displayed in numeric format It may be scaled like data in a Numeric Entry variable e a character array the entered data is displayed in alphanumeric format It cannot be scaled To create the variable set the insertion pointer in the Mess
372. y Text Attributes Several attributes define the way in which a message is displayed Center A message is left justified by default To toggle between centered and left justified for the message in the Message Edit box do one of the following select the Center check box to enable or disable centering e click the Center or Left Justify icon e select Align from the Format menu and choose Left or Center in the menu that appears If you want a message to be right justified insert spaces at the start of the message in the Message Edit box and check the result in the Terminal View Note The number of displayable characters in a centered message must be less than or equal to the number of characters per display line available for the selected text size Publication 2706 817 7 38 Creating Messages Tent Size z i E Mash Time Dea play Drie sta piry Humence Varabe Diagliry AFTI Varie Disglair Hupetic oriobic Entry ASC Yariakic Emiry ASUI Cmim ghar Grapbir Cat Variable Ceable Dancin Dey verse Video Daie Dia poliry Hiimene Variable Diaglirg ASC Variae Digli Sumenc Variable Entry acti Yaria Ensiry aS Caml Ghar braphir Cait Variable Ceghdes Canciain Gey Publication 2706 817 Inverse A message or any part of a message may be displayed with black and white reversed In the Message Edit box highlight e text e a variable e
373. y Port 1 In the Terminal Setup dialog verify the terminal Catalog and Version field 2 Select the Aux Port tab When the selected terminal in the Terminal Setup dialog has only an RS 232 port this tab does not open Soup bird Teens Coen ete Aan Pot ee Pel Dee fam Poot rbai Firid kii Gita fits Enig pim E eo a e 3 Use the list box to select one of the following Slave Port ASCII Input Publication 2706 817 10 28 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2706 817 4 Set the parameter values as needed Parameters Default Options 300 600 1200 2400 9600 19 200 Baud Rate 9600 38 400 bps Data Bits 8 7 8 Parity None None Odd Even Stop Bits 1 1 2 H W Handshake Disabled Enabled Disabled Inter Packet Delay 200 ms 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 ms For information on the Hardware Handshake parameter see Page 4 29 Note The Inter Packet Delay parameter is intended to allow a Dataliner DL10 DL20 or DL50 time to process each message packet before the next packet is sent from the master The worst case for the Dataliner family is 300 ms If the port is configured for an ASCII Input device this option does not apply 5 Select OK to save the RS 232 settings and return to the Terminal Setup dialog Helpful Hints Chapter 17 Validating Applications and Transferring Files This chapter covers the following topics He
374. y attribute in the Terminal Setup Advanced dialog See Page 10 17 Slaving PLC5 RIO Planning an Application 4 15 A MessageView terminal with a RIO daughterboard Catalog Nos 2706 M1D1 M1N1 or M1F1 and firmware that supports a Slave Port can act as a master device with up to 126 slave devices Note A MessageView 421D terminal without a daughterboard can be used as a slave device A list of slave devices is given on Page 5 6 An example of a master terminal setup with four slaves MessageView Terminal Message View Terminal slave buffers Each slave device is addressed individually The Message View terminal has 14 buffers that store messages that are monitored updated and continuously displayed by the slave s Each slave on the network has its own node address Each message is directed to a specific slave to be displayed on a specific line The MessageView Terminal buffer system works as follows 1 Message 1 sent to the slave at node 6 slated for line 1 is stored in one of the buffers and displayed immediately by the slave 2 Message 2 sent to the slave at node 2 slated for line 1 is stored in another buffer and displayed by the second slave 3 Message 3 sent to the slave at node 6 slated for line 2 is stored in a third buffer and displayed concurrently with Message 1 4 Message 4 sent to the slave at node 6 slated for
375. y may or may not have its Indicator tag defined LEDs may be used in any application designed for a MessageView 421F terminal See Page 4 25 for a discussion of LEDs When the application is designed make a list of the LEDs to be used and note which ones need an Indicator tag defined Set them all up before any messages are created Important LED attributes are global e When an LED does not have a tag assigned to it the LED has no tag any time it is used in the application e When a LED is assigned a certain tag that tag remains assigned to it throughout the application When the LED does not have an Indicator tag assigned to it then the LED follows the state of the associated Function key LED1 with F1 LED 16 with F16 For example LED4 will light when Function key F4 is pressed and LED4 remains lit for the duration of the Function key s On state while the message associated with the Function key is actively displayed When the LED has an Indicator tag assigned to it the LED operates independently of the associated Function key For example pressing and releasing Function key F1 will have no effect on the operation of LED1 The controller logic program controls the LED by setting or clearing the bit at the Indicator tag address Thus the controller can indicate a process status without displaying a message Note All assigned LED tags are monitored on a continuous basis except when the terminal is in its Front Panel Edito

2706-817, MessageBuilder Software User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents